Manualacuramdx 2009

08/06/06 16:58:07 09 ACURA MDX MMC North America Owner's M 50 31STX620 enu
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Acura MDX was a wise investment. As you read this manual, you will find
It will give you years of driving pleasure. information that is preceded by a
symbol. This information is
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read
intended to help you avoid damage to
this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
your vehicle, other property, or the
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner's manual in your vehicle so
environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer's staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
2009 MDX i
Main Menu
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of
any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It
may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii 2009 MDX
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
is very important. And operating this ● Safety Labels － on the vehicle.
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. ●
Safety Messages － preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don't follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
Of course, it is not practical or HURT if you don't follow instructions.
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
maintaining your vehicle. You must instructions.
use your own good judgement.
●
Safety Headings－ such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
●
Safety Section － such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
●
Instructions － how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information － please read it
carefully.
2009 MDX iii

Main Menu
Important Handling Information
Your MDX has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 338 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 378. Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
iv 2009 MDX
2009 MDX Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Important Handling Information .................................................................................................................... iv
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column) ..... 61
Features (climate control,audio,rear entertainment,steering wheel,security,cruise control,and other convenience items) ......... 169
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break- in, and cargo loading) ..................................................................... 321
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 337
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 381
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) ............................... 423
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 449
Warranty and Client Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) .......... 465
Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)
00X31-STX-6200 1
Main Menu
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Technical Information

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load and technical information.
luggage and other cargo.
Your Vehicle at a Glance Warranty and Client Relations
A quick reference to the main Driving (U.S. and Canada only)
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, A summary of the warranties
shift the transmission, and park; plus covering your new vehicle, and how
Driver and Passenger Safety
what you need to know if you're to contact us for any reason. Refer to
Important information about the
planning to tow a trailer. your warranty manual for detailed
proper use and care of your vehicle's
information.
seat belts, an overview of the Maintenance
supplemental restraint system, and The maintenance minder shows you Index
valuable information on how to when you need to take your vehicle Service Information Summary
protect children with child restraints. to the dealer for maintenance A summary of the information you
service. There is also a list of things need when you pull up to the fuel
Instruments and Controls
to check and instructions on how to pump.
Explains the purpose of each
check them.
instrument panel indicator and
gauge, and how to use the controls Taking Care of the Unexpected
on the dashboard and steering This section covers several problems
column. motorists sometimes experience, and
details how to handle them.
Features
How to operate the climate control
system, the audio system, rear
entertainment system, and other
convenience features.
2 2009 MDX
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER'S FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL HomeLink® BUTTONS MOONROOF SWITCH MIRROR CONTROL
AIRBAG (P. 9, 27) INDICATORS (P. 63) (P. 276) (P. 152) AUTO BUTTONꭧ

GAUGES (P. 72) (P. 154)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM PASSENGER'S
(P. 157) FRONT AIRBAG
(P. 9, 27)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH CLIMATE CONTROL
(P. 130) SYSTEM (P. 170)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 153) AUDIO SYSTEM
(P. 180)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES AUTOMATIC
(P. 149) TRANSMISSION
(P. 341)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON
(P. 323) REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER TAILGATE (P. 175)
BUTTONꭧ (P. 132)
HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSꭧ HEADPHONE CONNECTORSꭧ

HANDLE (P. 325) PEDAL (P. 153) (P. 267) (P. 268)
ꭧ: If equipped
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 3
Main Menu
HEADLIGHT WASHER HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/ STEERING WHEEL WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL

SWITCHꭧ2 FRONT FOG LIGHTS AUDIO CONTROLS WIPERS/WASHERS BRIGHTNESS
(P. 117) (P. 118) (P. 233) (P. 116) (P. 123)
VEHICLE STABILITY PASSENGER AIRBAG

ASSIST SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR
OFF SWITCH (P. 34)
(P. 359) HAZARD WARNING
MIRROR CONTROLS BUTTON
(P. 155) (P. 122)
DRIVING POSITION REAR WINDOW
MEMORY SYSTEM DEFOGGER
(P. 157) (P. 122)
POWER DOOR LOCK ACCESSORY POWER
MASTER SWITCH SOCKETS
(P. 130) (P. 166)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 153) SEAT HEATER
HORNꭧ1 SWITCHES
POWER WINDOW (P. 148)
SWITCHES
(P. 149) ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM SWITCHꭧ2
FUEL FILL DOOR POWER TAILGATE HOOD RELEASE STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL (P. 361)
RELEASE BUTTON BUTTONꭧ2 HANDLE ADJUSTMENTS BUTTONS
(P. 323) (P. 132) (P. 325) (P. 124) (P. 270)
ꭧ1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
ꭧ2: If equipped
4 2009 MDX
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21 If You Must Drive with Several
information about how to protect Automatic Seat Belt Children ................................. 40
yourself and your passengers. It shows Tensioners .............................. 22 If a Child Requires Close
you how to use seat belts. It explains Seat Belt Maintenance ................. 23 Attention ................................. 40
Driver and Passenger Saf ety

how your airbags work. And it tells you Additional Information About Your Additional Safety Precautions ....... 41
how to properly restrain infants and Airbags .................................. 24 Protecting Infants and Small
children in your vehicle. Airbag System Components ......... 24 Children ................................. 42
How Your Front Airbags Protecting Infants ........................ 42
Work ...................................... 27 Protecting Small Children ............ 43
Important Safety Precautions............. 6 How Your Side Airbags Work ....... 30 Selecting a Child Seat ..................... 45
Your Vehicle's Safety Features .......... 7 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
Seat Belts ..................................... 8 Work ...................................... 32 Installing a Child Seat with
Airbags ........................................ 9 How the SRS Indicator Works ...... 33 LATCH ................................... 47
Protecting Adults and Teens ........... 11 How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
1. Close and Lock the Doors......... 11 Works..................................... 33 Shoulder Belt .......................... 50
2. Adjust the Front Seats .............. 12 How the Passenger Airbag Off Installing a Child Seat with a
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............... 13 Indicator Works ...................... 34 Tether .................................... 51
4. Adjust the Head Restraints ....... 14 Airbag Service ............................. 35 Protecting Larger Children ............. 54
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Additional Safety Precautions ....... 35 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................. 54
Belts ................................... 15 Protecting Children － General Using a Booster Seat.................... 55
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Guidelines .............................. 37 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Position ............................... 17 All Children Must Be Front ...................................... 56
Advice for Pregnant Women......... 18 Restrained............................... 37 Additional Safety Precautions ....... 57
Additional Safety Precautions ....... 19 All Children Should Sit in a Back Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............... 58
Additional Information About Your Seat ........................................ 38 Safety Labels .................................. 59
Seat Belts ............................... 20 The Passenger's Front Airbag Can
Seat Belt System Components ...... 20 Pose Serious Risks .................. 38
2009 MDX 5
Main Menu Table Of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You'll find many safety Restrain All Children Don't Drink and Drive
recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even
section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back one drink can reduce your ability to
The recommendations on this page seat, not the front seat. Infants and respond to changing conditions, and
are the ones we consider to be the small children should be restrained your reaction time gets worse with
most important. in a child seat. Larger children every additional drink. So don't drink
should use a booster seat and a lap/ and drive, and don't let your friends
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
shoulder belt until they can use the drink and drive, either.
A seat belt is your best protection in
belt properly without a booster seat
all types of collisions. Airbags are Control Your Speed
(see pages 37 － 57). Excessive speed is a major factor in
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
your vehicle is equipped with While airbags can save lives, they the higher the speed, the greater the
airbags, make sure you and your can cause serious or fatal injuries to risk, but serious injuries can also
passengers always wear your seat occupants who sit too close to them, occur at lower speeds. Never drive
belts, and wear them properly (see or are not properly restrained. faster than is safe for current
page 15). Infants, young children, and short conditions, regardless of the
adults are at the greatest risk. Be maximum speed posted.
sure to follow all instructions and Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
warnings in this manual. Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 415).
6 2009 MDX
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(1) (4) (9) features that work together to protect
(3) you and your passengers during a
crash.

Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
(7) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(8) However, you and your passengers
(6) (2) can't take full advantage of these
(10)
features unless you remain sitting in
(1) Safety Cage
a proper position and always wear
(5) (11) (2) Crush Zones your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs features can contribute to injuries if
(4) Head Restraints they are not used properly.
(2) (5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts The following pages explain how you
(7) Front Airbags can take an active role in protecting
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags yourself and your passengers.
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
2009 MDX 7
Seat Belts ●
Help keep you from being thrown
Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even ●
Keep you from being thrown out of
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your airbags. ●
Help keep you in a good position
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts Be sure you and your good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most passengers always wear seat injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and belts and wear them properly. allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained When properly worn, seat belts:
in child seats.) Of course, seat belts cannot
●
Keep you connected to the vehicle completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly so you can take advantage of the crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious vehicle's built-in safety features. can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. ●
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including: What you should do: Always wear
In addition, most states and all your seat belt, and make sure you
Canadian provinces require you to – frontal impacts wear it properly.
wear seat belts. – side impacts
– rear impacts
– rollovers
8 2009 MDX
Airbags

Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
Your vehicle has a supplemental
driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
restraint system (SRS) with front
during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
airbags to help protect the heads and
impact (see page 30 for more seating positions during a moderate
chests of the driver and a front seat
information on how your side airbags to severe side impact or rollover (see
passenger during a moderate to
work). page 32 for more information on how
severe frontal collision (see page 27
your side curtain airbags work).
for more information on how your
front airbags work).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 9
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
● Airbags do not replace seat belts.
steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement Remember, however, that no safety
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
the seat belts. system can prevent all injuries or
front passenger should move their
deaths that can occur in a severe
●
Airbags offer no protection in rear seat as far back from the dashboard
impacts, or minor frontal or side crash, even when seat belts are
as possible.
collisions. properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
● Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10 2009 MDX
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Your vehicle has a door and tailgate

The following pages provide open indicator on the multi-
instructions on how to properly information display to indicate when
protect the driver, adult passengers, a specific door or the tailgate is not

and teenage children who are large tightly closed. You will see the
enough and mature enough to drive appropriate indicator and the
or ride in the front. message for each condition.
See pages 37 － 41 for important
guidelines on how to properly protect
infants, small children, and larger
children who ride in your vehicle.
1. Close and Lock the Doors When the tailgate is not tightly
After everyone has entered the closed, the ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’
vehicle, be sure the doors and the message will come on.
tailgate are closed and locked.
When one or more doors are not

tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’
message will come on.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 11
Locking the doors reduces the 2. Adjust the Front Seats

chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
Your vehicle has the auto door
When both tailgate and one or more locking/unlocking feature. For more
doors are not tightly closed, the information, see page 130.
Adjust the driver's seat as far to the
‘‘DOOR & TAILGATE OPEN’’
rear as possible while allowing you to
message will come on.
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
12 2009 MDX
If you sit too close to the steering 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front

wheel or dashboard.
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to See page 140 for how to adjust the
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the front seats.
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 124). Adjust the driver's seat-back to a
If you cannot get far enough away comfortable, upright position, leaving
from the steering wheel and still ample space between your chest and
reach the controls, we recommend the airbag cover in the center of the
that you investigate whether some steering wheel.
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 13
4. Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head
can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their
death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints will
rests against the occupant's chest help protect occupants from whiplash
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver's head restraint so and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the center of the back of your head See page 141 for how to adjust the
of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the center of the head restraints and how the driver's
and being seriously injured. The restraint. and front passenger's active head
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
Have passengers adjust their head restraints work.
greater the risk of injury.
restraints properly as well. Taller
See page 140 for how to adjust the persons should adjust their restraint
seat-backs. as high as possible.
14 2009 MDX
5. Fasten and Position the Seat If necessary, pull up on the belt again
Belts to remove any slack, then check that
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, the belt rests across the center of
then tug on the belt to make sure the your chest and over your shoulder.

belt is securely latched. Check that
This spreads the forces of a crash
the belt is not twisted, because a
over the strongest bones in your
twisted belt can cause serious
upper body.
injuries in a crash.
The second row center seat, and
both third row seats, have a
detachable shoulder belt that can be Improperly positioning the seat
unlatched and retracted, to allow the belts can cause serious injury
seats to be folded down. See page Position the lap part of the belt as low
as possible across your hips, then or death in a crash.
146 for how to unlatch and relatch
the seat belts. pull up on the shoulder part of the
belt so the lap part fits snugly. This Make sure all seat belts are
lets your strong pelvic bones take the properly positioned before
force of a crash and reduces the driving.
chance of internal injuries.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 15
If the seat belt touches or crosses The front seats have adjustable seat Never place the shoulder portion of a
your neck, or if it crosses your arm belt anchors. To adjust the height of lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
instead of your shoulder, you need to an anchor, squeeze the release behind your back. This could cause
adjust the seat belt anchor height. button and slide the anchor up or very serious injuries in a crash.
down as needed (it has four If a seat belt does not seem to work
positions). properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
RELEASE
BUTTON See page 20 for additional
information about your seat belts and
how to take care of them.
16 2009 MDX
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of

Position position in the front seat can be
After all occupants have adjusted seriously or fatally injured in a crash Sitting improperly or out of
their seats and head restraints, and by striking interior parts of the position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.

put on their seat belts, it is very vehicle or being struck by an
important that they continue to sit inflating front airbag.
upright, well back in their seats, with Always sit upright, well back in
their feet on the floor, until the the seat, with your feet on the
vehicle is parked and the engine is floor.
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts
one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
2009 MDX 17
Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit This will reduce the risk of injuries to
upright and adjust the seat as far both you and your unborn child that
back as possible while allowing full can be caused by a crash or an
control of the vehicle. When riding inflating front airbag.
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
Each time you have a checkup, ask
as far back as possible.
your doctor if it's okay for you to
drive.
If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
18 2009 MDX
Additional Safety Precautions ●

Two people should never use the ●
Keep your hands and arms away
● Never let passengers ride in the same seat belt. If they do, they from the airbag covers. If your
cargo area or on top of a folded- could be very seriously injured in a hands or arms are close to an
down back seat. If they do, they crash. airbag cover, they could be injured
could be very seriously injured in a

if the airbag inflates.
crash.
●
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve ● Do not attach or place objects on
●
Passengers should not stand up or occupant comfort or reposition the the front airbag covers. Objects on
change seats while the vehicle is shoulder part of a seat belt can the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
moving. A passenger who is not reduce the protective capability of could interfere with the proper
wearing a seat belt during a crash the belt and increase the chance of operation of the airbags or be
or emergency stop can be thrown serious injury in a crash. propelled inside the vehicle and
against the inside of the vehicle, hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
against other occupants, or out of
● Do not place hard or sharp objects
the vehicle. between yourself and a front ● Do not attach hard objects on or
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp near a door. If a side airbag or a
objects on your lap, or driving with side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
a pipe or other sharp object in your holder or other hard object
mouth, can result in injuries if your attached on or near the door could
front airbag inflates. be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
2009 MDX 19
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components The seat belt system If either the driver or a front
Your seat belt system includes lap/ includes an indicator on the passenger does not fasten their seat
shoulder belts in all seating instrument panel and a beeper to belt while driving, the beeper will
positions. The front seat belts are remind you and your passengers to sound and the indicator will flash
also equipped with automatic seat fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals.
belt tensioners. This system monitors the front seat You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
This system uses the same sensors belts. If you turn the ignition switch BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
as the front airbags to monitor to the ON (II) position before your SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
whether the front seat belts are seat belt is fastened, the beeper will information display (see page 81).
latched or unlatched, and how much sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before When no one is sitting in the front
weight is on the front passenger's
the beeper stops, the indicator will passenger's seat, or a child or small
seat (see pages 29 and 30).
stop flashing but remain on. adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
If a front passenger does not fasten should not sound.
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
20 2009 MDX
If the indicator comes on or the Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency
beeper sounds when the driver's seat The lap/shoulder belt goes over your locking retractor. In normal driving,
belt is latched and there is no front shoulder, across your chest, and the retractor lets you move freely in
seat passenger and no items on the across your hips. your seat while it keeps some tension

front seat, something may be on the belt. During a collision or
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
interfering with the monitoring sudden stop, the retractor
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
system. Look for and remove: automatically locks the belt to help
belt to make sure the buckle is
restrain your body.
●
Any items under the front latched (see page 15 for how to
passenger's seat. properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except
the driver's have a lockable retractor
● Any object(s) hanging on the seat To unlock the belt, press the red
that must be activated to secure a
or in the seat-back pocket. PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
child seat (see page 50).
the belt across your body so that it
●
Any object(s) touching the rear of
retracts completely. After exiting the If the shoulder part of the belt is
the seat-back.
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the pulled all the way out, the lockable
If no obstructions are found, have way and will not get closed in the retractor will activate. The belt will
your vehicle checked by a dealer. door. retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the seat
belt, pull it out only as far as needed.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 21
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The tensioners are designed to

activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
32).
If a side curtain airbag deploys
during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
The tensioners can also be activated
The lap/shoulder belts in the center during a collision in which the front
seat of the second row and both of airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
For added protection, the front seat airbags would not be needed, but the
the third row seats are equipped with
belts are equipped with automatic additional restraint could be helpful.
a detachable anchor that has two
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
parts: a small latch plate and a When the tensioners are activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
buckle. the seat belts will remain tight until
the belts to help hold the driver and a
The detachable seat belt should front passenger in position. they are unbuckled.
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 144.
22 2009 MDX
Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A
condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious
Pull each belt out fully, and look for injury or death if the seat belts

of protection in a subsequent crash.
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check do not work properly when
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the needed.
the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace
not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
409). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Acura provides a limited warranty on
seat belts. See your Acura Warranty
Information booklet for details.
2009 MDX 23
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(6) (1) (11) (8)
(5) (2)
(4)
(3)
(1) Driver's Front Airbag

(2) Passenger's Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (5)
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver's Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors
(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(9) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(10) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit (10) (9) (7) (4)
(11) SRS Indicator
24 2009 MDX
Your Airbag System (SRS) includes:

(16) (13) ● Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint
(17) System) front airbags. The driver's
(12) airbag is stored in the center of the

steering wheel; the front
passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 27).
● Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 30).
●
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the roof
(14) above the side windows. The front
(15) and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page 32).
(12) Front Impact Sensors
(13) Side Curtain Airbags
(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16) Roll Rate Sensor
(17) Safing Sensor
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 25
●
Automatic front seat belt ●
Weight sensors that monitor the ●
An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 22). weight on the front passenger's panel that alerts you to a possible
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs problem with your airbags,
● Sensors that can detect a moderate
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an sensors, or seat belt tensioners
to severe front impact, side impact,
infant or small child), the (see page 33).
or if your vehicle is about to
passenger's front airbag will be
rollover. ●
An indicator on the instrument
turned off (see page 29).
panel that alerts you that the
●
Sensors that can detect whether a ●
A rollover sensor that can detect if passenger's side airbag has been
child is in the passenger's side
your vehicle is about to roll over turned off (see page 33).
airbag path and signal the control
and signal the control unit to
unit to turn the airbag off (see ● An indicator on the dashboard that
deploy both side curtain airbags
page 31). alerts you that the passenger's
and front seat belt tensioners (see
front airbag has been turned off
●
Sensors that can detect whether page 32).
(see page 34).
the driver's seat belt and the front ●
A sophisticated electronic system
passenger's seat belt are latched or ●
Emergency backup power in case
that continually monitors and
unlatched (see page 20). your vehicle's electrical system is
records information about the
disconnected in a crash.
● A driver's seat position sensor that sensors, the control unit, the
monitors the distance of the seat airbag activators, the seat belt
from the front airbag. If the seat is tensioners, and driver and front
too far forward, the airbag will passenger seat belt use when the
inflate with less force (see page ignition switch is in the ON (II)
29). position.
26 2009 MDX
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In After inflating, the front airbags
such cases, the seat belt will provide immediately deflate, so they won't
If you ever have a moderate to severe sufficient protection, and the interfere with the driver's visibility,
frontal collision, sensors will detect supplemental protection offered by or the ability to steer or operate other
the vehicle's rapid deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver's airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front
inflate the driver's and front seat, or if the advanced airbag
passenger's airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger's
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 34).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 27
The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
After a crash, you may see what wearing a seat belt or not.
looks like smoke. This is actually In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbag's surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant's belt is not latched,
Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
people with respiratory problems In a less severe crash, one stage will lower threshold, because the
may experience some temporary ignite first, then the second stage will occupant would need extra
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite a split second later. This protection.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant's belt is latched, the
so. with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
28 2009 MDX
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and

children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
●
Occupants must sit upright and SEAT SEAT
wear their seat belts properly. POSITION WEIGHT
SENSOR SENSOR
●
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors, The driver's advanced front airbag The passenger's advanced front
or put any objects or metal items system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
under the front seats. sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Acura does
too far forward, the airbag will inflate not encourage carrying an infant or
●
Second-row passengers should not with less force, regardless of the small child in front, if the sensors
put their feet under the front seats. severity of the impact. detect the weight of an infant or
Failure to follow these instructions small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29
If there is a problem with the sensor,
could damage the sensors or prevent kg), the system will automatically
the SRS indicator will come on, and
them from working properly. turn the passenger's front airbag off.
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver's
seating position.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 29
Be aware that objects placed on the ●

Moving the front seat forcibly back How Your Side Airbags Work
passenger's seat can also cause the against cargo on the seat or floor
airbag to be turned off. behind it.
When the airbag is turned off, a ●
Hanging heavy items on the front
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in passenger seat, or placing heavy
the center of the dashboard comes items in the seat-back pocket.
on (see page 34). ●
Moving the front passenger's seat
If the weight sensors detect there is or seat-back forcibly back against
no passenger in the front seat, the the folded right-side second-row
airbag will be off. However, the seat.
passenger airbag off indicator will
Also, make sure the floor mat behind
not come on.
the front passenger's seat is hooked
To ensure that the passenger's to the floor mat anchor (see page If you ever have a moderate to severe
advanced front airbag system will 410). If it is not, the mat may side impact, sensors will detect rapid
work properly, do not do anything interfere with the proper operation of acceleration and signal the control
that would increase or decrease the the sensors and operation of the seat. unit to instantly inflate either the
weight on the front passenger's seat. driver's or the passenger's side
This includes: airbag and activate the seat belt
●
A second-row passenger pushing tensioner on the affected side.
or pulling on the back of the front
passenger's seat.
30 2009 MDX
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 33), have the passenger
passenger's side, the passenger's system designed primarily to protect sit upright. Once the passenger is
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger's out of the airbag's deployment path,
seat.

is no passenger. the system will turn the airbag back
Although Acura does not encourage on, and the indicator will go out.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the There will be some delay between
should wear their seat belts and sit position sensors detect a child has the moment the passenger moves
upright and well back in their seats. leaned into the side airbag's into or out of the airbag deployment
deployment path, the airbag will shut path and when the indicator comes
off. on or goes off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a A front seat passenger should not
short adult leans sideways, or a use a cushion or other object as a
larger adult slouches and leans backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
sideways into the airbag's system from working properly.
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
2009 MDX 31
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger's In a Rollover
Work side, the passenger's side curtain If the rollover sensor detects your
airbag will inflate even if there are no vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
occupants on that side of the vehicle. the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger's side
will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
In a Side Impact should wear their seat belts and sit
In a moderate to severe side impact, upright and well back in their seats.
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver's or the
passenger's side of the vehicle.
32 2009 MDX
How the SRS Indicator Works If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off Indicator
The SRS indicator alerts the airbags and seat belt tensioners Works
you to a potential problem may not work properly when you U.S. Canada
with your airbags or seat belt need them.
This indicator

tensioners.
alerts you that the
When you turn the ignition switch to passenger's side airbag has been
the ON (II) position, this indicator automatically shut off. It does not
comes on briefly then goes off. This Ignoring the SRS indicator can mean there is a problem with your
tells you the system is working result in serious injury or death side airbags.
properly. if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work When you turn the ignition switch to
If the indicator comes on at any other properly. the ON (II) position, the indicator
time, or does not come on at all, you should come on briefly and then go
should have the system checked by Have your vehicle checked by a out (see page 66). If it does not come
your dealer. For example: dealer as soon as possible if on, stays on, or comes on while
● If the SRS indicator does not come the SRS indicator alerts you to driving without a passenger in the
on after you turn the ignition a possible problem. front seat, you will also see a
switch to the ON (II) position. ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’
message on the multi-information
●
If the indicator stays on after the display. Have the system checked
engine starts. (see page 81).
●
If the indicator comes on or flashes
on and off while you drive.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK AIRBAG
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page 81).
2009 MDX 33
How the Passenger Airbag Off Be aware that objects placed on the If the indicator comes on with no
Indicator Works front seat can cause the indicator to front seat passenger and no objects
come on. on the seat, or with an adult riding
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR there, something may be interfering
U.S. Canada If no weight is detected on the front
with the weight sensors. Look for
seat, the airbag will be automatically
and remove:
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on. ●
Any items under the front
passenger's seat.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if the ● Any object(s) hanging on the seat
total weight on the seat is near the or in the seat-back pocket.
airbag cutoff threshold. ●
Any object(s), such as a folded-
If an adult or teenage passenger is down back seat, that are touching
riding in front, move the seat as far to the rear of the seat-back.
This indicator alerts you that the the rear as possible, and have the
If no obstructions are found, have
passenger's front airbag has been passenger sit upright and wear the
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
shut off because weight sensors seat belt properly.
soon as possible.
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger's seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
34 2009 MDX
Airbag Service ●
If your vehicle has a moderate to Additional Safety Precautions
Your airbag systems are virtually severe impact. Even if your airbags ● Do not attempt to deactivate your
maintenance free, and there are no do not inflate, your dealer should airbags. Together, airbags and seat
parts you can safely service. inspect the driver's seat position belts provide the best protection.

However, you must have your sensor, the front passenger's ●
Do not tamper with airbag
vehicle serviced if: weight sensors, the front seat belt components or wiring for any
tensioners, and all seat belts and reason. Tampering could cause
●
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
their anchors worn during a crash the airbags to deploy, possibly
that has deployed must be
to make sure they are operating causing very serious injury.
replaced along with the control
properly.
unit and other related parts. Any ●
Do not expose the front
seat belt tensioner that activates passenger's seat-back to liquid. If
must also be replaced. water or another liquid soaks into
Do not try to remove or replace a seat-back, it can prevent the side
any airbag by yourself. This must airbag cutoff system from working
be done by an authorized dealer or properly.
a knowledgeable body shop.
● The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 35
●
Do not remove or modify a front ●
Do not cover or replace front seat-
seat without consulting your back covers without consulting
dealer. This could make the your dealer. Improperly replacing
driver's seat position sensor or the or covering front seat-back covers
front passenger's weight sensors can prevent your side airbags from
ineffective. If it is necessary to inflating during a side impact.
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Services at 800-382-2238.
36 2009 MDX
Protecting Children － General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a

properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children age 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the vehicle them properly (see pages 54 － 57).
If you have children, or ever need to (see pages 42 － 53).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
2009 MDX 37
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger's Front Airbag Can Small Children
Seat Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger's front airbag can be
safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
back seat. the passenger's front airbag is quite far forward, or the child's head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety inflating front airbag can strike the
force to cause very serious injuries.
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
aged 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system that
restrained in a back seat. Some automatically turns the passenger's Larger Children
states have laws restricting where front airbag off (see page 34), please Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
children may ride. follow these guidelines: or killed by an inflating passenger's
Children who ride in the back are Infants front airbag. Whenever possible,
less likely to be injured by striking Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back
interior vehicle parts during a the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
collision or hard braking. Also, with a passenger's front airbag. If the be properly restrained with a seat
children cannot be injured by an airbag inflates, it can hit the back of belt. (See page 54 for important
inflating front airbag when they ride the child seat with enough force to information about protecting larger
in the back. kill or very seriously injure an infant. children.)
38 2009 MDX
To remind you of the passenger's

front airbag hazards, and that U.S. Models DASHBOARD
children must be properly restrained SUN VISORS
in a back seat, your vehicle has

warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 39
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact,
Your vehicle has two rows of back Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another
seats where children can be properly an infant or a small child in the front adult ride with the child in a back
restrained. If you ever have to carry a passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a
group of children, and a child must child, or because the child requires child than the front.
ride in front: attention.
●
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 54). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
●
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 12).
●
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 17).
● Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
15).
40 2009 MDX
Additional Safety Precautions ●

Make sure any unused seat belt For example, infants and small
● Never hold an infant or child on that a child can reach is buckled, children left in a vehicle on a hot
your lap. If you are not wearing a the lockable retractor is activated, day can die from heatstroke. A
seat belt in a crash, you could be and the belt is fully retracted and child left alone with the key in the
locked. If a child wraps a loose

thrown forward and crush the ignition switch can accidentally set
child against the dashboard or a seat belt around their neck, they the vehicle in motion, possibly
seat-back. If you are wearing a seat can be seriously or fatally injured. injuring themselves or others.
belt, the child can be torn from (See pages 50 and 51 for how to
activate and deactivate the ●
Lock all doors and the tailgate
your arms and be seriously hurt or when your vehicle is not in use.
killed. lockable retractor.)
Children who play in vehicles can
●
Never put a seat belt over yourself ● Never let two children use the accidentally get trapped inside.
and a child. During a crash, the same seat belt. If they do, they Teach your children not to play in
belt could press deep into the child could be very seriously injured in a or around vehicles.
and cause serious or fatal injuries. crash.
● Keep vehicle keys/remote
●
Use the childproof door locks to ● Do not leave children alone in a transmitters out of the reach of
prevent children from opening the vehicle. Leaving children without children. Even very young
rear doors. This can prevent adult supervision is illegal in most children learn how to unlock
children from accidentally falling states and Canadian provinces, and vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
out (see page 131). can be very hazardous. switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
2009 MDX 41
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front seat.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed If the passenger's front airbag
facing forward, an infant could be inflates, it can hit the back of the
very seriously injured during a child seat with enough force to kill or
frontal collision. seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed in the
second row, a rear-facing child seat
may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat as
Child Seat Type far back as recommended, or from
An infant must be properly restrained locking their seat-back in the desired
in a rear-facing, reclining child seat position.
until the child reaches the seat
maker's weight or height limit for the It can also interfere with proper
seat, and the child is at least one year operation of the passenger's
old. advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby's head,
neck, and back.
42 2009 MDX
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
strongly recommend that you install child use the child seat until the child
the child seat directly behind the reaches the weight or height limit for
front passenger's seat, move the seat the seat.

as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Placing a rear-facing child seat

in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision. Child Seat Type
A child who is at least one year old,
Always place a rear-facing child and who fits within the child seat
seat in the back seat, not the maker's weight and height limits,
front. should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 43
Child Seat Placement Even with advanced front airbags

We strongly recommend placing a that automatically turn the
forward-facing child seat in a back passenger's front airbag off (see page Placing a forward-facing child
seat, not the front. 34), a back seat is the safest place for seat in the front seat can result
a small child. in serious injury or death if the
Placing a forward-facing child seat in front airbag inflates.
the front seat of a vehicle equipped If it is necessary to put a forward-
with a passenger's airbag can be facing child seat in the front, move If you must place a forward-
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too the vehicle seat as far to the rear as facing child seat in front, move
far forward, or the child's head is possible, be sure the child seat is the vehicle seat as far back as
thrown forward during a collision, an firmly secured to the vehicle and the possible, and properly restrain
inflating airbag can strike the child child is properly strapped in the seat. the child.
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
44 2009 MDX
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need In seating positions and vehicles not Whatever type of seat you choose, to
to choose either a conventional child equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- provide proper protection, a child
seat, or one designed for use with compatible child seat can be installed seat should meet three
the lower anchors and tethers for using a seat belt. requirements:

children (LATCH) system. 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Conventional child seats must be Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
whereas LATCH-compatible seats 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
are secured by attaching the seat to 2. The child seat should be of the
hardware built into the second-row proper type and size to fit the child.
seats. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
Since LATCH-compatible child seats facing for small children.
are easier to install and reduce the 3. The child seat should fit the vehicle
possibility of improper installation, seating position (or positions)
we recommend selecting this style. where it will be used.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
2009 MDX 45
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat A child seat secured with a seat belt The following pages provide
and a good place to install the seat, should be installed as firmly as guidelines on how to properly install
there are three main steps in possible. However, it does not need a child seat. A forward-facing child
installing the seat: to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side seat is used in all examples, but the
movement can be expected and instructions are the same for a rear-
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be should not reduce the child seat's facing child seat.
secured to the vehicle with the lap effectiveness.
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with If the child seat is not secure, try
the LATCH (lower anchors and installing it in a different seating
tethers for children) system. A position, or use a different style of
child whose seat is not properly child seat that can be firmly secured.
secured to the vehicle can be
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
endangered in a crash.
Make sure the child is properly
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly strapped in the child seat
secured. After installing a child according to the child seat maker's
seat, push and pull the seat instructions. A child who is not
forward and from side-to-side to properly secured in a child seat
verify that it is secure. can be seriously injured in a crash.
46 2009 MDX
Installing a Child Seat with MARKS Using the Outer LATCH

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers

for children) at each of the second
row seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH. LOWER ANCHORS
The location of each lower anchor is When you install a child seat in rear
indicated by a small button above the seating position, use the lower
anchor point. To install a LATCH-compatible child
anchors as shown in the illustration.
seat in either outer second row seat:
You can install up to three child seats
at a time with LATCH. 1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
Do not attach two child seat anchors.
connectors to a single lower anchor
at a time. 2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 47
RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE TETHER STRAP
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Lift the head restraint (see page
seat, then attach the seat to the have a flexible-type connector as 141), then route the tether strap
lower anchors according to the shown above. through the legs of the head
child seat maker's instructions. restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow the
making sure the strap is not
Some LATCH-compatible seats child seat maker's instructions for
twisted.
have a rigid-type connector as adjusting or tightening the fit.
shown above.
48 2009 MDX
Using the Center LATCH 2. Follow step 1 through 4 as

described previously to secure the
child seat.
3. Lower the head restraint first.

Route the tether strap over the
head restraint and seat-back, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
4. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the verify that it is secure.
tether anchor, then tighten the
To install a LATCH-compatible child
strap as instructed by the child
seat in the center seating position on
seat maker.
the second row seat, use the center
7. Push and pull the child seat lower anchors as shown above.
forward and from side-to-side to 1. Pull up the cover below the
verify that it is secure. armrest and find one of the
anchors. The other anchor is
located underneath the flap at the
bottom of the outer seat's inner
bolster.
2009 MDX 49
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver's have a lockable retractor that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
the center seating position of second seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
row seat, make sure the detachable through the child seat according to belt all the way out until it stops,
seat belt is securely latched (see the seat maker's instructions, then then let the belt feed back into the
page 146). insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
50 2009 MDX
Installing a Child Seat with a

Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in

the second or third row.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to put
weight on the child seat, or push To deactivate the lockable retractor
on the back of the seat while and remove a child seat, unlatch the
pulling up on the belt. buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 51
Second Row Installation TETHER STRAP
Outer Seating Position
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT 1. After properly securing the child For the center seat, lower the head
seat (see page 50), lift the head restraint, then route the tether strap
Each second row seat has a tether
restraint, then route the tether over the head restraint and seat-back.
anchorage point behind the seat-
strap over the seat-back and
back.
through the head restraint legs.
52 2009 MDX
Third Row Installation

2. Attach the tether strap hook to the 3. Route the tether strap over the
anchor, making sure the tether head restraint, then attach the
Each third row seat has a tether
strap is not twisted. tether strap hook to the anchor,
anchorage point on the tailgate sill.
making sure the strap is not
3. Tighten the strap according to the
1. Select the anchor point you want to twisted.
seat maker's instructions. use. Then open the anchor cover
with a small flat-tip screwdriver. 4. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker's instructions.
2. Secure the child seat in the
desired position (see page 50).
2009 MDX 53
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger's front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give instructions If a child must ride in front,
on how to check proper seat belt fit, move the vehicle seat as far
what kind of booster seat to use if back as possible, use a booster
one is needed, and important seat if needed, have the child
precautions for a child who must sit sit up properly and wear the
in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
54 2009 MDX
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Some states and Canadian provinces
between the child's neck and arm? also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
possible, touching the child's

sure to check current laws in the
thighs?
states or provinces where you intend
5. Will the child be able to stay to drive.
seated like this for the whole trip?
Booster seats can be high-back or
If you answer yes to all these low-back. Whichever style you select,
questions, the child is ready to wear make sure the booster seat meets
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If federal safety standards (see page
you answer no to any question, the 45) and that you follow the booster
child needs to ride on a booster seat. seat maker's instructions.
A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat until
the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 55
If a child who uses a booster seat When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And
must ride in front, move the vehicle Front while age may be one indicator of
seat as far back as possible and be The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
sure the child is wearing the seat belt Administration and Transport there are other important factors you
properly. Canada recommend that all children should consider.
age 12 and under be properly Physical Size
A child may continue using a booster
restrained in a back seat. Physically, a child must be large
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle's or If the passenger's front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
booster's seat-back. A child of this inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 15 and 54). If
height should be tall enough to use frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
the lap/shoulder belt without a serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat. unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front.
of position. Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must
part of a larger child's body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride.
injuries.
56 2009 MDX
If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions ●

Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: ● Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child's comfort or
● Carefully read the owner's manual,
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
and make sure you understand all

crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety
effective and increase the chance
information. ● Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back of serious injury in a crash.
●
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could cause
most position. very serious injuries during a
● Have the child sit up straight, back crash. It also increases the chance
against the seat, and feet on or that the child will slide under the
near the floor. belt in a crash and be injured.
●
Check that the child's seat belt is ●
Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
●
Supervise the child. Even mature crash.
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
2009 MDX 57
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle's exhaust contains With the tailgate open, airflow can
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon pull exhaust gas into your vehicle's
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill tailgate open, open all the windows,
follow the information on this page. you. and set the climate control system as
shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
● The vehicle is raised for an oil
unconfined area, adjust the climate
change.
control system as follows:
●
You notice a change in the sound High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust.
such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
●
The vehicle was in an accident that engine with the garage door closed.
may have damaged the underside. Even with the door open, run the 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
engine only long enough to move the 4. Set the temperature control to a
vehicle out of the garage. comfortable setting.
58 2009 MDX
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn DASHBOARD

you of potential hazards that could cause serious U.S. models only
injury or death. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except

for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed
by the owner), contact your dealer for a replacement.
HOOD
RADIATOR CAP
BATTERY LABEL
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 59
Safety Labels
SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

U.S. models
U.S. models Canadian models
Canadian models
U.S. models
60 2009 MDX
Main Menu
This section gives information about Control Locations .......................... 62 Seats ........................................... 140
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel .......................... 63 Detachable Anchor ................. 146
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators .......... 64 Seat Heaters................................ 148
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges.......................................... 72 Power Windows .......................... 149
controls are within easy reach. Multi-Information Display ............. 73 Moonroof .................................... 152
Controls Near the Steering Parking Brake ............................. 153

Wheel ..................................... 115 Mirrors ....................................... 154
Windshield Wipers and Driving Position Memory
Washers .............................. 116 System .................................... 157
Rear Window Wiper and Interior Lights ............................. 159
Washer ............................... 117 Interior Convenience Items ......... 162
Turn Signal and Headlights ........ 118 Beverage Holders ................... 163
Hazard Warning Button .............. 122 Console Compartment ............ 164
Rear Window Defogger ............... 122 Storage Compartment ............. 164
Instrument Panel Glove Box ............................... 164
Brightness .............................. 123 Sunglasses Holder .................. 165
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 124 Cargo Hooks ........................... 165
Keys and Locks ........................... 126 Sun Visor ................................ 166
Immobilizer System .................... 128 Vanity Mirror .......................... 166
Ignition Switch ............................ 129 Accessory Power Sockets ....... 166
Door Locks ................................. 130 AC Power Outlet ..................... 167
Childproof Door Locks ............ 131
Tailgate ....................................... 131
Power Tailgate ........................ 132
Remote Transmitter .................... 135
2009 MDX 61
Control Locations
DRIVING POSITION INSTRUMENT PANEL HomeLink® BUTTONS MOONROOF SWITCH

MEMORY SYSTEM INDICATORS (P. 63) (P. 276) (P. 152)
(P. 157) GAUGES (P. 72)
MIRROR CONTROL
POWER DOOR LOCK AUTO BUTTONꭧ
MASTER SWITCH (P. 154)
(P. 130)
CLIMATE CONTROL
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM (P. 170)
RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 153)
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW (P. 180)
SWITCHES
(P. 149)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FUEL FILL DOOR (P. 341)
RELEASE BUTTON
(P. 323)
REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER TAILGATE (P. 175)
BUTTONꭧ (P. 132)
HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSꭧ HEADPHONE CONNECTORSꭧ

HANDLE (P. 325) PEDAL (P. 153) (P. 267) (P. 268)
ꭧ: If equipped
62 2009 MDX
Instrument Panel
MESSAGE INDICATOR MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P. 73)

(P. 69)
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P. 64)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P. 70) (P. 70)
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
INDICATORꭧ (P. 71) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 66)

SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P. 66)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 66)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P. 437) LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P. 68)
SH-AWD INDICATOR
(P. 69) LOW FUEL
INDICATOR (P. 71)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P. 70) INDICATOR (P. 70)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 65) CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P. 70)
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 71)

(P. 68) PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 65)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 67)
(P. 65)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P. 70) VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P. 67)
ꭧ: If equipped
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
2009 MDX 63
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many Seat Belt Reminder If either of you do not fasten your
indicators to give you important Indicator seat belt while driving, the beeper
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you will sound and the indicator will flash
turn the ignition switch to the ON again at regular intervals, and you
(II) position. It reminds you and your will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
passengers to fasten your seat belts. BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
A beeper also sounds if you have not SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
fastened your seat belt. information display (see page 81).
If you turn the ignition switch to the For more information, see page 20.
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
64 2009 MDX
Low Oil Pressure U.S. Canada Parking Brake 2. If it stays on after you have fully
Indicator and Brake released the parking brake while
The engine can be severely damaged System Indicator the engine is running, or if it
if this indicator flashes or stays on comes on while driving, it can
This indicator has two functions:
when the engine is running, or if a indicate a problem in the brake
‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ 1. It comes on when you turn the system. You will also see a ‘‘LOW

message is on the multi-information ignition switch to the ON (II) BRAKE FLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECK
display. For more information, see position. It is a reminder to check BRAKE SYSTEM’’ message on the
page 436. the parking brake. Driving with multi-information display (see
the parking brake not fully pages 81). For more information,
Charging System released can damage the rear see page 438.
Indicator brakes, axles, and tires.
If this indicator comes on when the If you drive without releasing the
engine is running, the battery is not parking brake, a beeper will
being charged, and you will also see sound, and you will also see a
a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’ ‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE’’
message on the multi-information message on the multi-information
display. For more information, see display (see page 81).
page 436.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 437.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 65
Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada Anti-lock Brake System

System Indicator Side Airbag Off (ABS) Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when Indicator This indicator normally comes on for
you turn the ignition switch to the This indicator comes on when you a few seconds when you turn the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at any turn the ignition switch to the ON ignition switch to the ON (II)
other time, it indicates a potential (II) position. If it comes on at any position. If this indicator comes on at
problem with your front airbags. This other time, it indicates that the any other time, there is a problem in
indicator will also alert you to a passenger's side airbag has the ABS. If this happens, take the
potential problem with your side automatically shut off. You will also vehicle to your dealer to have it
airbags, passenger's side airbag see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG checked. With this indicator on, your
automatic cutoff system, side curtain OFF’’ message on the multi- vehicle still has normal braking
airbags, or automatic seat belt information display (see page 81). ability but no anti-lock function. You
tensioners. You will also see a For more information, see page 33. will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
message on the multi-information information display (see page 81).
display (see page 81). For more For more information, see page 357.
information, see page 33.
66 2009 MDX
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Turn Signal and

(VSA) System Indicator Hazard Warning
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for Indicators
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the The left or right turn signal indicator
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) blinks when you signal a lane change
position. position. For more information, see or turn. If an indicator does not blink

page 359. or blinks rapidly, it usually means
If it comes on and stays on at any This indicator has four functions. one of the turn signal bulbs is burned
other time, or it does not come on
1. It comes on as a reminder that you out (see page 404). Replace the bulb
when you turn the ignition switch to
have turned off the vehicle stability as soon as possible, since other
the ON (II) position, there is a
assist (VSA) system. drivers cannot see that you are
problem with the VSA system. You
signaling.
will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- page 359). When you press the hazard warning
information display (see page 81). button, both turn signal indicators
Take your vehicle to a dealer to have 3. It flashes when trailer stability and all turn signals on the outside of
it checked. Without VSA, your assist is activating (see page 376). the vehicle flash.
vehicle still has normal driving 4. It comes on along with the VSA
ability, but will not have VSA traction system indicator if there is a
and stability enhancement. For more problem with the VSA system. You
information, see page 359. will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
This indicator may also come on if SYSTEM’’ message and a
there is a problem with the trailer ‘‘CHECK TRAILER STABILITY
stability assist function (see page ASSIST’’ message on the multi-
376). information display (see page 81).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 67
Low Tire Pressure/ If this happens, pull to the side of the A/T Temperature
TPMS Indicator road when it is safe, check which tire Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for has lost pressure on the multi- This indicator monitors the
a few seconds when you turn the information display, and determine temperature of the automatic
ignition switch to the ON (II) the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, transmission fluid. It should come on
position. have the flat tire repaired as soon as for a few seconds when you turn the
This indicator has two functions: possible. If two or more tires are ignition switch to the ON (II)
underinflated, call a professional position. If it comes on while driving,
1. If it comes on while driving, it towing service. For more
indicates that one or more of your it means the transmission fluid
information, see page 446. temperature is too high. Pull to the
vehicle's tires are significantly low
2. If this indicator begins to flash, side of the road when it is safe, shift
on pressure.
there is a problem with the tire to Park, and let the engine idle until
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE pressure monitoring system the indicator goes out.
PRESSURE’’ message on the multi- (TPMS). You will also see a You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMP
information display (see page 82). ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ HIGH’’ message on the multi-
Check the tire pressure monitor on message on the multi-information information display (see page 82).
the multi-information display and display. The indicator continues to
determine the cause (see page 352). flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible. Continuing to drive with the A/T
For more information, see page temperature indicator on may cause
354. serious damage to the transmission.
68 2009 MDX
Message Indicator Super Handling-All If the indicator blinks while driving,

Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) it indicates the differential
This indicator comes on when there Indicator temperature is too high.
is a system message on the multi- This indicator normally comes on for You will also see a ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF
information display. Press the INFO a few seconds when you turn the TEMP. HIGH’’ message on the multi-
button on the steering wheel (see ignition switch to the ON (II) information display (see page 82).

page 73) to see the message (see position. If this indicator comes on at Pull to the side of the road when it is
page 81). any other time, there is a problem in safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
Most of the time, this indicator the SH-AWD system. You will also idle until the indicator goes out.
comes on along with other indicators see a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
in the instrument panel such as the message on the multi-information
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS display (see page 82). Take your
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc. vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD
For more information, see page 348. indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 69
Immobilizer System Lights On Indicator High Beam Indicator

Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when This indicator reminds you that the This indicator comes on with the
you turn the ignition switch to the exterior lights are on. It comes on high beam headlights. For more
ON (II) position. It will then go off if when the light switch is in either the information, see page 118.
you have inserted a properly coded or position. This indicator will
ignition key. If it is not a properly also come on when the light switch is Cruise Main Indicator
coded key, the indicator will blink, in AUTO and the lights turn on
and the engine's fuel system will be automatically. If you turn the ignition This indicator comes on when you
disabled (see page 128). switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the turn on the cruise control system by
LOCK (0) position without turning pressing the CRUISE button (see
off the light switch, this indicator will page 270).
remain on. A reminder chime will
also sound when you open the Cruise Control Indicator
driver's door.
This indicator comes on when you
Fog Light Indicator set the cruise control. See page 270
for information on operating the
This indicator comes on when you cruise control.
turn on the fog lights. For more
70 2009 MDX
Active Damper System Low Fuel Indicator Security System Indicator

Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If this indicator comes on at

any other time, there is a problem in
the system. While this indicator is
on, the comfort button will not work,
and the system will remain in the
sport mode. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK ADS SYSTEM’’ message SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
on the multi-information display.
Have the vehicle checked by your This indicator comes on as a This indicator comes on when the
dealer as soon as possible. For more reminder that you must refuel soon. security system is set. See page 269
information, see page 361. for more information on the security
When the indicator comes on, there
system.
is about 2.9 U.S. gal (10.8 ꤲ) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
2009 MDX 71
Gauges
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine's coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
severe driving conditions, the pointer
TEMPERATURE FUEL GAUGE may rise to the upper zone. If it
GAUGE reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine's cooling
system, see page 434.
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount.
Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
U.S. model is shown.
72 2009 MDX
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display in the INFO (▲/▼) With the ignition switch in the ON
instrument panel displays various BUTTON (II) position, the multi-information
information and messages when the display changes as shown on the
ignition switch is in the ON (II) next page each time you press the
position. Some of the messages help INFO (▲/▼) button or SEL/RESET
you operate your vehicle more button.

comfortably.Others help to keep you
When you turn the ignition switch to
aware of the periodic maintenance
the ON (II) position, your last
your vehicle needs for continued
SEL/ selection is displayed.
trouble-free driving.
RESET
In the multi-information display, the
When you open the driver's door, a BUTTON
system message is also displayed
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the
To change the display, press the (see page 80) and you can customize
multi-information display. When you
INFO (▲/▼) button on the steering your vehicle control settings (see
turn the ignition switch from the ON
wheel repeatedly until the main page 83).
(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I)
position, a ‘‘Goodbye’’ message is menu appears (see page 74).
shown on the display.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 73
Main Menu
INFO button
Go to Customize Menu (See page 83)
SEL/RESET button
Go to HandsFreeLink Menu (See page 278)
(See page 75)
Trip Computer (See page 78)
(See page 75)
(See page 75)
Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 77)
74 2009 MDX
Odometer Trip Meter
TRIP METER

ODOMETER
When the main menu is blank,
SH-AWD or TIRE PRESSURE,
The odometer shows the total This meter shows the number of
pressing the SEL/RESET button
distance your vehicle has been miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
changes the display to ‘‘trip meter/
driven. It measures miles in U.S. driven since you last reset it. There
odometer’’ ‘‘outside temperature/
models and kilometers in Canadian are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
odometer’’ and ‘‘engine oil life/
models. It is illegal under U.S. B. Each trip meter works
odometer’’.
federal law and Canadian provincial independently, so you can keep track
regulations to disconnect, reset, or of two different distances.
alter the odometer with the intent to
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
change the number of miles or
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
kilometers indicated.
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 75
When you reset Trip A, average fuel Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the
economy A is reset at the same time. front bumper. The temperature
When you reset Trip B, average fuel OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE reading can be affected by heat
economy B is reset. U.S. reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
In the customizing mode, you can set
surrounding traffic. This can cause
Trip A and average fuel economy A
an incorrect temperature reading
to reset at the same time when you
when your vehicle speed is under 19
refuel your vehicle (see page 92).
CANADA mph (30 km/h). When you start your
trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
This shows the outside Fahrenheit In certain weather conditions,
temperature in U.S. models, and temperature readings near freezing
Celsius temperature in Canadian (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
models. forming on the road surface.
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 91).
76 2009 MDX
Engine Oil Life SH-AWD Torque Distribution Tire Pressure Monitor

Monitor
ENGINE OIL LIFE

U.S.
Canada
This shows the remaining life of the When the tire pressure monitor is
engine oil. It shows 100% after the This monitor shows how much shown on the multi-information
engine oil is replaced and the display torque is being delivered to each display, press the SEL/RESET
is reset. The engine oil life is wheel. For more information, see button. The display changes as
calculated based on engine operating page 348. shown.
conditions and accumulated engine You can see the pressure of each tire
revolutions. For more information, in this monitor. If one or more tires
see page 383. are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 351.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 77
HandsFreeLink™ To use the system, your cell phone Trip Computer

and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cell phones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page 278
for instructions on how to link your
cell phone to the HFL and how to
receive or make phone calls, or visit
the handsfreelink.com website.
You can receive or make phone calls When the main menu displays ‘‘TRIP
from your cell phone through your COMPUTER’’, pressing the SEL/
vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® RESET button changes the display to
(HFL) system without touching your ‘‘AVERAGE FUEL A/RANGE’’ to
cell phone. ‘‘AVERAGE FUEL B/RANGE’’ and
to ‘‘AVERAGE SPEED/ELAPSED
TIME’’.
78 2009 MDX
AVERAGE FUEL A/B RANGE ELAPSED TIME

This shows your vehicle's average This shows the estimated distance This shows the time passed traveled
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) you can travel on the fuel remaining since you last reset it. When you turn
or liter/100 km (Canadian models) in the fuel tank. This distance is the ignition switch to the ON (II)
since you last reset the Trip A or Trip estimated from the fuel economy you position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.
B. received over the last several miles
If you want to reset the ELAPSED

(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada), so it
You can customize the Trip A and TIME manually, go to the trip
will vary with changes in speed,
AVERAGE FUEL A reset condition computer's ELAPSED TIME display,
traffic, etc.
on the multi-information display (see and press and hold the SEL/RESET
page 92). AVERAGE SPEED button until the number resets.
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph) You can customize the ELAPSED
for U.S. models or kilometers per TIME reset condition on the multi-
hour (km/h) for Canadian models. information display (see page 94).
To reset the AVERAGE SPEED you
have traveled, press and hold the
SEL/RESET button until the number
resets.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 79
System Messages The system message(s) triggers the To cancel the message(s) before 5
appropriate indicator(s) on the seconds elapsed, press the INFO
SYSTEMMESSAGE INDICATOR (▲/▼) button on the steering
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come wheel.
on. The system message indicator
Even if you press the INFO (▲/▼)
does not go off until the problem(s)
button, some messages stay on or
is corrected.
come on again at regular intervals
You will also hear a beep when the until the problem is corrected.
system message comes on for the
You can see the message(s) again by
first time.
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
Most of the messages are displayed repeatedly if the system message
for about 5 seconds, and then the indicator remains lit on the
normal display returns. If there are instrument panel.
If there is a problem with your several system messages to be
vehicle, for example, the engine oil Here is a list of all messages:
shown, the display switches these
level is low or a door is not fully messages every 5 seconds.
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
80 2009 MDX
U.S.
See page See page
11 436
See page
Canada 153
See page See page

20 437
U.S.
See page See page
20 436
See page
Canada 438
See page See page
33 358
U.S. U.S.
See page
359
See page See page
Canada 33 Canada 438
See page
377
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 81
See page See page See page

352 348 340
See page See page

354 348
See page
118
See page See page
351 341
See page See page See page

68 363 383
U.S.
See page See page
398 324
See page
Canada 134
See page
71
82 2009 MDX
Customize Settings If you turn the ignition switch to the

ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to the
normal screen.
You can customize some vehicle

control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER
1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,
customizing is not possible.
To have the driver's ID detected,
make sure your remote transmitter is If you want the settings as they were
linked to the system (see Keyless when the vehicle left the factory,
When the main menu displays Memory Settings™ on page 139). select DEFAULT ALL, as described
‘‘Keyless Memory Settings™,’’ you
on page 86.
can customize some vehicle control
If you want to change any vehicle
settings.
control settings, select CHG
To enter the customizing mode,
SETTING, then press the SEL/
press the SEL/RESET button.
RESET button.
To change the settings, the ignition
switch must be in the ON (II) Refer to the table on the following
position, and the vehicle must be pages about the settings you want to
stopped with the transmission in customize.
Park.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 83
Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page

METER SETUP LANGUAGE SELECTION Changes the language used in the display. ENGLISHꭧ
(P.89) FRENCH 90
SPANISH
ADJUST OUTSIDE Changes the outside temperature reading above or －5°F～ꭗ0°Fꭧ～5°F (U.S.)
TEMP. DISPLAY below its current reading. －3°C～ꭗ0°Cꭧ～3°C 91
(Canada)
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy to ON 92
RESET with REFUEL reset when you refuel. OFFꭧ
ADJUST Changes the indicator alarm volumes into three levels. HIGH
ALARM VOLUME MIDꭧ 93
LOW
ELAPSED TIME RESET Resets the elapsed time of your current trip. MANUAL ONLY
IGN OFFꭧ TRIP B 94
TRIP A
AUTO INTERIOR Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking. MAX LOW
ILLUMINATION HIGH MIN 95
MIDꭧ OFF
POSITION SETUP MEMORY POSITION LINK Changes the driver's seat, the steering wheel, and the ONꭧ 98
(P.97) outside mirror positions to a stored setting. OFF
AUTO TILT & TELESCOPE Moves the steering wheel fully in and up when the key ONꭧ 99
STEERING WHEEL is removed. OFF
ꭧ: Default setting
84 2009 MDX
Group Setup Menu Item Description Setting Option Page

LIGHTING SETUP INTERIOR LIGHT Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights stay 60 sec 15 sec 101
(P.100) DIMMING TIME on after you close the doors and the tailgate. 30 secꭧ
HEADLIGHT Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights stay 60 sec
AUTO OFF TIMER on after you close the driver's door. 30 sec 0 sec 102
15 secꭧ
AUTO LIGHT Changes the timing of when the headlights come on. MAX LOW

SENSITIVITY The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO HIGH MIN 103
position.
MIDꭧ
DOOR/WINDOW AUTO DOOR LOCK Changes the setting of when to automatically lock the SHIFT FROM P
SETUP doors. WITH VEH SPDꭧ 106
(P.105)
OFF
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Changes the setting of when to automatically unlock SHIFT TO P ꭧ DRIVER DOOR/
the driver's/all the doors. IGN OFF ALL DOORS 107
OFF
KEY AND REMOTE Changes which doors unlock with the remote DRIVER DOORꭧ 109
UNLOCK MODE transmitter in a first push. ALL DOORS
KEYLESS LOCK The exterior lights flash each time you press the ONꭧ
ACKNOWLEDGMENT LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also sound OFF 110
when you press the LOCK button twice.
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the doors 90 sec
to relock and the security system to set after you 60 sec 111
unlock but do not open the door.
30 secꭧ
WIPER SETUP WIPER ACTION Changes the wiper operation between two settings INTERMITTENT 113
(P.113) when the wiper switch is in the INT position. WITH VEH SPDꭧ
DEFAULT ALL Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default. SET 86
(P.86) CANCEL
ꭧ: Default setting
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 85
DEFAULT ALL
To set the default settings, press the When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
INFO (▲/▼) button to select SET see the above display for several
If you want to set the default settings,
then press the SEL/RESET button. seconds, then the screen returns to
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.
select DEFAULT ALL, then press the If you want to cancel DEFAULT ALL,
SEL/RESET button. select CANCEL, then press the SEL/ If the setting is not successfully
RESET button. The screen goes back completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
to the previous display. several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.
86 2009 MDX
Customize Settings Each time you press the INFO

You can customize some of the (▲/▼) button, the screen changes
vehicle control settings to your as shown on the next page. Press the
preference. Here are the settings you INFO (▲/▼) button, until you see
can customize: the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button to
●
METER SETUP

enter your selection.
●
POSITION SETUP
● LIGHTING SETUP
● DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
●
WIPER SETUP
When you want to change the
vehicle control settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 87
METER SETUP
see page 89
POSITION SETUP
see page 97
Select ‘‘EXIT’’
LIGHTING SETUP
see page 100
Select
Select ‘‘CANCEL’’ ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
see page 105
WIPER SETUP
see page 113
SEL/RESET BUTTON
INFO (▲/▼) BUTTON
88 2009 MDX
Meter Setup
Here are the six custom settings for
the meter setup:
●
LANGUAGE SELECTION
●
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.

DISPLAY
●
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESET with
REFUEL
● ADJUST ALARM VOLUME
●
ELAPSED TIME RESET
●
AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION
While METER SETUP is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO
(▲/▼) button, the screen changes
as shown in the illustration. Press the SEL/RESET
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see BUTTON
the setting you want to customize, INFO (▲/▼)
then press the SEL/RESET button to BUTTON
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 89
Language Selection
Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully

the selections. completed, the display changes as
There are three language selections
shown above, and then goes back to
you can make: English, French, and Select the desired language by
the customize item screen.
Spanish. To choose the language you pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
want, follow these instructions: then enter your selection by pressing If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
You can choose this customize item
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing
repeat the procedure again.
the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.
90 2009 MDX
Adjust Outside Temp. Display U.S. models U.S. models
Canadian models Canadian models

Adjust the outside temperature value When your selection is successfully
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button completed, the display changes as
If you sometimes find that the
repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET shown above, and then goes back to
temperature reading is a few degrees
button to set the desired value. the customize item screen.
above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
following these instructions: message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 91
Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset With Refuel

To cause Trip A and AVG. FUEL to
reset every time you refuel your Select ON or OFF by pressing the
vehicle, follow these instructions: INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
RESET button. message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP A
& AVG. FUEL RESET with
REFUEL’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
92 2009 MDX
Adjust Alarm Volume

Select the warning alarm volume
from three levels. Select the desired level by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
RESET button. message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST ALARM VOLUME’’ and
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 93
Elapsed Time Reset

There are four elapsed time reset
choices you can make:
MANUAL ONLY － You can reset
the elapsed time, when Trip
Computer's Elapsed Time is
displayed (see page 79).
IGN OFF － The elapsed time is
reset when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
TRIP A － The elapsed time is reset
when the Trip A is reset. You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see
from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing the selections.
TRIP B － The elapsed time is reset the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.
when the Trip B is reset. Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
94 2009 MDX
Auto Interior Illumination

While the headlight switch is turned
on, the interior lights gradually dim,
as the outside light level gets low.
You can customize at which outside
light level the lights start to dim.

There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW
and MIN levels and OFF for the auto
interior illumination settings.
If you want the illuminations to start
dimming as early as possible, select
When your selection is successfully MAX. For illuminations to start You can choose this customize item
completed, the display changes as dimming as late as possible, select from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing
shown above, and then goes back to MIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOW the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.
the customize item screen. for levels in between.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ To disable the auto interior
message appears, go back to illumination function, select OFF.
‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ and
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 95

Select the desired setting by
then enter your selection by pressing If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
INTERIOR ILLUMINATION’’ and
96 2009 MDX
Position Setup
Here are the two custom settings for
the position setup:
●
MEMORY POSITION LINK
●
AUTO TILT & TELESCOPE

STEERING WHEEL
While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is
shown, press the SEL/RESET button
to enter the customize mode.
as shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
NFO (▲or▼)
BUTTON
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 97
Memory Position Link

If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is
set to ‘‘ON,’’ the driver's seat, the Select ON or OFF by pressing the
steering wheel, and outside mirror INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
positions move to the position stored your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
in the memory when you open the RESET button. message appears, go back to
driver's door, using the remote ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ and
transmitter. repeat the procedure again.
from ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ by
repeatedly.
98 2009 MDX
Auto Tilt & Telescope Steering Wheel

When ‘‘AUTO TILT & TELESCOPE
STEERING WHEEL’’ is set to ‘‘ON,’’ Select ON or OFF by pressing the
the steering wheel automatically INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
moves fully in and up when you turn your selection by pressing the SEL/ If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) RESET button. message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
position and remove the key. TILT & TELESCOPE STEERING
WHEEL’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
from ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ by
repeatedly.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 99
Lighting Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the lighting setup:
●
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME
●
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
●
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
the setting you want to customize,
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO (▲or▼)
BUTTON
100 2009 MDX

Interior Light Dimming Time

The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors and tailgate. To Select the desired setting by
change how long the lights stay on pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
before they fade out, follow these then enter your selection by pressing If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
instructions: the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
from ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ by
again.
repeatedly.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 101

Headlight Auto Off Timer

The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you remove the key from
the ignition switch and close the
driver's door. To change how long
the lights stay on before they go off,
follow these instructions:
You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see
from ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ by the selections.
repeatedly.
102 2009 MDX

Auto Light Sensitivity

The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity

from the following five levels:
MAX －
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
HIGH －
When your selection is successfully The headlights come on when it is You can choose this customize item
completed, the display changes as somewhat bright. from ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ by
shown above, and then goes back to MID － pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
the customize item screen. The headlights come on when it is as repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ bright as sunset or sunrise.
message appears, go back to LOW －
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’ The headlights come on when it is
and repeat the procedure again. somewhat dark.
MIN －
The headlights come on when it is
dark.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 103


the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
104 2009 MDX

Door/Window Setup
Here are the five custom settings for
the door/window setup:
●
AUTO DOOR LOCK
●
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

●
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK
MODE
● KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
●
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
While ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ is
the setting you want to customize, SEL/RESET
then press the SEL/RESET button to BUTTON
enter your selection. INFO (▲or▼)
BUTTON
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 105

Auto Door Lock

There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT FROM P －
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEH SPD －
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
16 km/h).
OFF －
The auto door lock is deactivated all You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the time. from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by the selections.
repeatedly.
106 2009 MDX

Auto Door Unlock

There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT TO P － The driver's door or
all the doors, depending on the door
lock mode setting (see page 106),

unlock when you move the shift lever
to Park.
IGN OFF － The driver's door or all
the doors, depending on the door
lock mode setting (see page 106),
When your selection is successfully unlock when you turn the ignition You can choose this customize item
completed, the display changes as switch to the LOCK (0) position. from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
shown above, and then goes back to OFF － The auto door unlock is pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
the customize item screen. deactivated all the time. This is the repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’ factory default setting.
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 107

Press the SEL/RESET button to see If you choose ‘‘SHIFT TO P’’ or ‘‘IGN When your selection is successfully
the selections. OFF’’, you will see the above display. completed, the display changes as
Select the desired setting by Press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button, switch the door lock mode setting
then enter your selection by pressing between the driver's door and all If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
the SEL/RESET button. doors. Then, press the SEL/RESET message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
button to enter your selection. DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
108 2009 MDX

Key and Remote Unlock Mode

To select whether the driver's door
unlocks or all the doors unlock when Select the desired setting by
you unlock the doors with the pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
remote transmitter, follow these then enter your selection by pressing If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
instructions. the SEL/RESET button. message appears, go back to ‘‘KEY
AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’
and repeat the procedure again.
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
repeatedly.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 109

Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 269). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
repeatedly.
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
110 2009 MDX

Security Relock Timer

If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any of the doors or
the tailgate within 30 seconds, the
doors and the tailgate automatically

relock and the security system sets.
You can change this relock time from
30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
When your selection is successfully You can choose this customize item
completed, the display changes as from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
shown above, and then goes back to pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
the customize item screen. repeatedly.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 111


‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
112 2009 MDX

Wiper Setup Wiper Action

You can select from these two
settings when the wiper switch is in
the INT (intermittent) position:
INTERMITTENT － The
intermittent operation varies

according to the selection you make
on the wiper lever's intermittent
SEL/RESET control ring.
BUTTON
INFO (▲/▼) WITH VEH SPD － The intermittent
BUTTON operation varies according to vehicle
speed.
Here is one custom setting for the Each time you press the INFO
wiper setup: (▲/▼) button, the screen changes
●
WIPER ACTION
While ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ is shown, the setting you want to customize,
press the SEL/RESET button to then press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode. enter your selection.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 113

You can choose this customize item Press the SEL/RESET button to see When your selection is successfully
from ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ by pressing the selections. completed, the display changes as
the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly. shown above, and then goes back to
‘‘WIPER ACTION’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
114 2009 MDX

Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/ STEERING WHEEL WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL

HEADLIGHT WASHER FRONT FOG LIGHTS AUDIO CONTROLS WIPERS/WASHERS BRIGHTNESS
SWITCHꭧ1 (P. 118) (P. 233) (P. 116) (P. 123)
(P. 117)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY (P. 34)
ASSIST SYSTEM

OFF SWITCH
(P. 360) HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
MIRROR CONTROLS (P. 122)
(P. 155)
REAR WINDOW
DRIVING POSITION DEFOGGER
MEMORY SYSTEM (P. 122)
(P. 157)
ACCESSORY POWER
POWER DOOR LOCK SOCKETS
MASTER SWITCH (P. 166)
(P. 130)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES SEAT HEATER
(P. 149) SWITCHES
HORNꭧ2 (P. 148)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON ACTIVE DAMPER
(P. 323) SYSTEM SWITCHꭧ1
(P. 361)
POWER TAILGATE HOOD RELEASE STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONꭧ1 (P. 132) HANDLE (P. 325) ADJUSTMENTS (P. 124) BUTTONS (P. 270)
ꭧ1: If equipped
ꭧ2: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
2009 MDX 115

Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to LO － The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI － The wipers run at high speed.
MIST － The wipers run at high
Windshield Washer － Pull the
speed until you release the lever.
wiper control lever toward you, and
OFF － The wipers are not activated. hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
INT － The length of the wipe
low speed, then complete one more
interval is varied automatically
sweep after you release the lever.
according to vehicle speed.
If you turn it to the shortest delay,
the wipers change to low speed
1. MIST operation when the vehicle speed
2. OFF exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
3. INT － Intermittent To change the ‘‘WIPER ACTION’’
4. LO － Low speed setting, see page 113.
5. HI － High speed
6. Windshield washers
116 2009 MDX

Windshield Wipers and Washers
Headlight Washers The headlight washers use the same Rear Window Wiper and Washer
(On Canadian models) fluid reservoir as the windshield
washers.

1. Rotate the switch clockwise to turn
The headlight washers can be the rear window wiper ON.
operated at any time by pressing the
headlight washer button located next 2. Hold past ON to turn the rear
to the steering wheel column. The window wiper on and to spray the
headlights must be turned on to use rear window washer.
this button. In addition, the headlight
washer operates without pressing the
button the first time you turn on the
windshield washers with the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 117

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
3. When you turn the wiper switch to Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal － Push down on the
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will lever to signal a left turn and up to
return to its parked position. signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
4. Rotate the switch
and hold it. The lever will return to
counterclockwise to spray the
center when you release it or
window washer.
complete a turn.
When you shift the transmission to
Headlights On － Turning the
the reverse position with the front
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on
windshield wipers activated, the
the parking lights, taillights,
rear window wiper operates
instrument panel lights, side-marker
automatically.
lights, and rear license plate lights.
When the wiper control lever
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position is INT, the rear wiper 1. Turn signal position turns on the headlights. If
operates intermittently. When it is 2. Off you leave the lights on with the key
LO or HI, the rear wiper operates 3. Parking and indicator lights removed from the ignition switch,
continuously. 4. AUTO you will hear a reminder chime when
The rear window washer uses the 5. Headlights on you open the driver's door.
same fluid reservoir as the 6. High beams
windshield washer. 7. Flash high beams
8. Fog lights off
9. Fog lights on
118 2009 MDX

Turn Signal and Headlights
When the light switch is in either of AUTO － The automatic lighting Even with the automatic lighting
these positions, the lights on feature turns on the headlights and feature turned on, we recommend
indicator comes on as a reminder. all other exterior lights, when it that you turn on the lights manually
senses low ambient light. when driving at night or in a dense
This indicator stays on if you leave
fog, or when you enter dark areas
the lights on and turn the ignition To turn on automatic lighting, turn
such as long tunnels or parking
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the light switch to AUTO at any time.

facilities.
LOCK (0) position. The lights will come on automatically
when the outside light level becomes To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
High Beams － To switch from low
low (at dusk, for example). The SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page 103.
beams to high beams, push the left
lights on indicator comes on as a
lever forward until you hear a click. Do not leave the light switch in
reminder. The lights and indicator
The blue high beam indicator will AUTO if you will not be driving the
will turn off automatically when the
come on (see page 70). Pull it back to vehicle for an extended period (a
system senses high ambient light.
return to low beams. To flash the week or more). You should also turn
high beams, pull the lever back The lights will remain on when you off the lights if you plan to leave the
lightly, then release it. The high turn off the ignition switch. They will engine idling or off for a long time.
beams stay on as long as you hold turn off automatically when you
the lever back. remove the key and open the driver's
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to the position.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 119

LIGHT SENSOR Fog Lights Daytime Running Lights

Turn the fog lights on and off by With the headlight switch off, the
turning the switch next to the daytime running lights come on
headlight switch. when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and release the
You can use the fog lights only when
parking brake. They remain on until
the headlights are on low beam.
you turn the ignition switch off, even
With the light switch in the AUTO
if you set the parking brake.
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on When the headlights are on, the
automatically. They will go off when daytime running lights are off.
the headlights turn off.
The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
120 2009 MDX

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL SYSTEM’’ Automatic Lighting Off Feature If you turn the ignition switch to the
message on the multi-information This feature turns off the headlights, LOCK (0) position with the headlight
display, there is a problem with the all other exterior lights, and the switch on, but do not open the door
daytime running light system. Take instrument panel lights within 15 and get out, the lights turn off after
your vehicle to a dealer to have it seconds after you remove the key 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch
checked. and close the driver's door. is in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).

When the multi-information display To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO The lights turn on again when you
shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 102. unlock or open the driver's door.
daytime running lights are off. If you unlock the door, but do not
The automatic lighting off feature
Follow the procedure in the left open it within 15 seconds, the lights
activates if you leave the headlight
column to turn them on. go off. With the driver's door open,
switch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’
you will hear a lights-on reminder
position or if the lights are turned on
chime.
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position, and you remove the key,
then open and close the driver's
door.
2009 MDX 121

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
Push the button between the center The rear window defogger will clear
vents to turn on the hazard warning fog, frost, and thin ice from the
lights (four-way flashers). This window. Push the defogger button to
causes all four outside turn signals turn it on and off. The indicator in the
and both indicators in the instrument button lights to show the defogger is
panel to flash. Use the hazard on. If you do not turn it off, the
warning lights if you need to park in defogger will shut itself off after
a dangerous area near heavy traffic, about 15 minutes. It also shuts off
or if your vehicle is disabled. when you turn off the ignition. You
have to turn it on again when you
restart the vehicle.
122 2009 MDX

Instrument Panel Brightness
To reduce glare at night, the

instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or . To cancel the glare reduction
function, set the brightness to the
highest level, then press the ＋

button. You will hear a beep when it
is canceled.
You can customize when the glare
reduction function starts. To change
‘‘AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION’’, see page 95 for
Adjust the brightness of the The level of brightness is shown on more information.
instrument panel by pressing the ＋ the multi-information display while
or － button. Press the ＋ button to you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
increase the brightness and the － after you finish adjusting.
button to decrease it. The brightness
can be set differently for when the
headlights are on, and when they are
off.
2009 MDX 123

Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel adjustment Release the switch when the steering
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
before you start driving. wheel reaches the desired position.
Make sure the steering wheel points
towards your chest, not toward your
face, and that you can see the
Adjusting the steering wheel instrument panel gauges and
position while driving may indicators.
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped. Move the steering wheel in, out, up,
or down by pushing and holding the
adjustment switch in that direction.
124 2009 MDX

Steering Wheel Adjustments
When you remove the key from the If your vehicle's battery is
ignition switch, the steering wheel disconnected or goes dead, or the
automatically moves fully in and up. fuse for the power tilt and telescopic
steering wheel is removed, the
To change the ‘‘AUTO TILT &
power tilt and telescopic steering
TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL’’
wheel system needs to be reset when
setting, see page 99.

you reconnect the battery or install
The steering wheel then returns to the fuse.
its original position when you insert
Insert the key into the ignition
the key back in the ignition switch.
switch, and remove it. The steering
Steering wheel movement is also wheel automatically moves fully in
controlled by the driving position and up to let you know the system is
memory system (see page 157). reset.
2009 MDX 125

Keys and Locks
KEY MASTER KEY VALET KEY KEY MASTER KEY VALET KEY These keys contain electronic
NUMBER WITH REMOTE (Light Gray) NUMBER WITH REMOTE (Light Gray) circuits that are activated by the
TAG TRANSMITTER TAG TRANSMITTER immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the circuits
are damaged.
●
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
● Do not drop the keys or set heavy
Models without power tailgate Models with power tailgate
objects on them.
●
Keep the keys away from liquids.
The master key fits all the locks on You should have received a key If they get wet, dry them
your vehicle. The valet key works number tag with your keys. You will immediately with a soft cloth.
only in the ignition and the driver's need this key number if you ever
door lock. You can keep the glove have to get a lost key replaced. Use The valet key does not contain a
box locked when you leave your only Acura-approved key blanks. battery. Do not try to take it apart.
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
126 2009 MDX

Keys and Locks
Retractable Master Key Always use the fully-extended key The key may come in contact with
when you insert it to the ignition your finger while being retracted or
RELEASE BUTTON
switch. If the key does not fully extended. Make sure your fingers do
Push extend, the immobilizer system may not touch the pivot of the key when
not operate properly and prevents retracting or extending the key.
from starting the engine.

Models with power tailgate shown
The master key can be retracted into

the remote transmitter. To use the
key, push the release button to
release the key from the transmitter.
The key should be fully extended. To
retract the key, push the release
button and at the same time push the
key into the remote transmitter until
it is securely latched.
2009 MDX 127

Immobilizer System
The Immobilizer System protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine's fuel following two conditions: (1) This device
Do not attempt to alter this system or may not cause harmful interference, and
system is disabled.
add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle inoperable. interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on operation.
If you have lost your key and you
briefly, then go off. If the indicator Changes or modifications not expressly
cannot start the engine, contact your
starts to blink, it means the system approved by the party responsible for
dealer.
does not recognize the coding of the compliance could void the user's
key. Turn the ignition switch to the authority to operate the equipment.
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
This device complies with Industry
reinsert it, and turn the ignition Canada Standard RSS-210.
switch to the ON (II) position again. Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone. Operation is subject to the following two
The system may not recognize your conditions: (1) this device may not cause
key's coding if another immobilizer interference, and (2) this device must
key or other metal object (i.e. key accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
128 2009 MDX

Ignition Switch
ACCESSORY (I) － You can operate You will hear a reminder beeper if
the audio system and the accessory you leave the key in the ignition
power sockets in this position. switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
ON (II) － This is the normal key
the driver's door. Remove the key to
position when driving. Several of the
turn off the beeper.
indicators on the instrument panel

come on as a test when you turn the The shift lever must be in Park
ignition switch from the before you can remove the key from
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) the ignition switch.
position.
START (III) － Use this position
The ignition switch has four only to start the engine. The switch
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY returns to the ON (II) position when
(I), ON (II), and START (III). you let go of the key.
LOCK (0) － You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key to the LOCK (0)
position, the shift lever must be in
Park, and you must push the key in
slightly.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult to
turn the key. Firmly turn the steering
wheel to the left or right as you turn
the key.
2009 MDX 129

Door Locks
UNLOCK LOCK To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE

UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page
109.
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (about 16 km/h) or
more, all the doors lock
automatically.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page 106.
LOCK UNLOCK When you shift to P after driving, the
driver's door unlocks.
To lock all doors and the tailgate, The lock tab on any passenger's door
press the bottom of the master door locks and unlocks that door. To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
lock switch on either front door, pull UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 107.
All doors and the tailgate can be
the lock tab above the driver's door
locked from the outside by using the
handle, or use the key on the outside
key in the driver's door lock. To
lock on the driver's door.
unlock only the driver's door, insert
Pressing the top of either master the key, turn the key, and release it.
door lock switch will unlock all doors The remaining doors and the tailgate
and the tailgate. unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
130 2009 MDX

Door Locks, Tailgate
Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks Tailgate

With any door and the tailgate open
and the key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. They are not disabled if all
the doors and the tailgate are closed.

If you try to lock an open driver's
door by pulling the lock tab rearward
the lock tab on the driver's door pops
out.
LOCK
The childproof door locks are To open the tailgate, push up inside
designed to prevent children seated the handle, then lift up. To close the
in the rear from accidentally opening tailgate, use the inner handle to pull
the rear doors. Each rear door has a it down, then press down on the back
lock lever near the edge. With the edge.
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
down), the door cannot be opened
while driving to avoid damaging the
from the inside regardless of the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
position of the lock tab. To open the
from getting into the interior. See
door, push the lock tab forward and
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
use the outside door handle.
58.
2009 MDX 131

Tailgate
Power Tailgate If you push the same button or

switch again while the tailgate is
opening or closing, you will hear
three beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened or closed position.
TAILGATE SWITCH
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
The tailgate can also be closed by
pressing the button on the tailgate. If
If equipped
you press the button again while the
The tailgate can be opened and
tailgate is closing, you will hear three
closed with the remote transmitter
beeps, and the tailgate will stop
(see page 135) or the switch in the
moving, reverse direction, and stop
driver's door pocket when both front
at the fully opened position.
doors are unlocked.
Press and hold the tailgate button on
the remote transmitter or the switch
for about 1 second to open or close
the tailgate. Each time you press the
button on the remote transmitter or
the switch, you will hear a beep, and
some front and rear lights will flash.
132 2009 MDX

Tailgate
Auto-Reverse Also check that passengers, ●

When the tailgate or the roof is
The power tailgate has an auto- especially children, do not have their covered with snow or ice.
reverse feature. If it meets resistance hands on the edge of the tailgate or
while opening or closing, it will beep Do not install any accessories on the
on the tailgate sill. The auto reverse
three times and reverse direction. tailgate. It may cause the tailgate not
feature stops working when the
However, the tailgate may not to function properly. If there is snow
tailgate is about to latch so the motor
or ice on the tailgate, make sure to

reverse immediately. Always make can pull the tailgate shut.
sure passengers and objects are clear remove it before you operate the
of the tailgate before opening or If your vehicle's battery is tailgate.
closing it. disconnected, goes dead, or the fuse
If you push the tailgate release
is removed while the tailgate is fully
button inside the handle while the
open, the power tailgate needs to be
tailgate is opening or closing, it will
reset. After connecting the battery or
stop moving. You need to open or
installing the fuse, close the tailgate
Closing a power tailgate while close it the rest of the way manually.
fully by hand.
anyone is in the path of the The tailgate has sensors on both
tailgate can cause serious The power tailgate may not open or
sides. Be careful not to damage
injury. close under the these conditions:
them. If the sensors are damaged,
● The vehicle is parked on a steep the power tailgate does not function
Make sure everyone is clear hill. properly.
before closing the power
tailgate. ●
When the vehicle is swayed in a
strong wind.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 133

Tailgate
If you try to drive off with the tailgate Unlocking the Tailgate
not closed completely, a beeper
sounds and a ‘‘DOOR & TAILGATE
OPEN’’ message is shown on the
multi-information display.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
58.
If there is a problem in the power Push the release lever to the right as
tailgate system, you will see a shown.
‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’ Models with power tailgate
message on the multi-information If the power door lock system cannot If you need to unlock the tailgate
display. Have the system checked by unlock the tailgate, unlock it manually, it means there is a
your dealer. manually. problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
With this message shown on the Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver to
multi-information display, you can remove the cover on the back of the
still open or close the tailgate tailgate.
manually.
134 2009 MDX

Tailgate, Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Models with power tailgate

Models without power tailgate
UNLOCK LOCK
UNLOCK LOCK BUTTON BUTTON
BUTTON BUTTON

TAILGATE
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
PANIC
Models without power tailgate BUTTON To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
If you cannot open the tailgate, ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting,
LOCK － Press this button once to
remove the cover on the back of the see page 110.
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
tailgate (see page 134). Push the
exterior lights will flash. When you
release lever to the right as shown,
push LOCK twice within 5 seconds,
then pull the outer handle to open
you will hear a beep to verify that the
the tailgate.
doors and tailgate are locked and the
security system has set. This button
does not work if any door or tailgate
is not fully closed.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 135

Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK － Press this button once When you press the UNLOCK If you push the same button again
to unlock the driver's door. Push it button, the front and rear individual while the tailgate is opening or
twice to unlock the other doors. map lights and the cargo area light, closing, three beeps sound, the
Some exterior lights will flash twice depending on their switch positions, tailgate stops moving, reverses
when you push the button. If you do will come on (see page 160). If you direction and stops in the fully
not open any door or the tailgate do not open any door or the tailgate, opened or fully closed position.
within 30 seconds, they will the lights stay on for about 30
PANIC － Press and hold this
automatically relock. seconds, then go out. If you relock
button for about 1 second to attract
the doors and the tailgate with the
To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE attention; the horn will sound, and
remote transmitter before 30 seconds
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page the exterior lights will flash for about
have elapsed, the lights will go off
109. 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
immediately.
press any other button on the remote
To change the ‘‘SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER’’ setting, see page 111.
Models with power tailgate transmitter, or turn the ignition
TAILGATE － Press and hold the switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
TAILGATE button to open or close mode does not work when the key is
the power tailgate. When the tailgate in the ignition switch.
begins to move, you will hear a beep,
and some front and rear lights will
flash.
136 2009 MDX

Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter Battery

●
Avoid dropping or throwing the If it takes several pushes on the
transmitter. button to lock or unlock the doors
●
Protect the transmitter from and the tailgate, replace the battery
extreme temperature. as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616

● Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
●
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer. SCREW KEYPAD
To replace the battery:

1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Separate the keypad from the
transmitter by pushing any button
from outside.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 137

Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery and note As required by the FCC:

the polarity. Make sure the This device complies with Part 15 of the
polarity of the new battery is the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
same (－ side facing up), then following two conditions: (1) This device
insert it in the keypad. may not cause harmful interference, and
BATTERY (2) this device must accept any
An improperly disposed of battery interference received, including
can hurt the environment. interference that may cause undesired
Always confirm local regulations operation.
for battery disposal. Changes or modifications not expressly
5. Snap the two halves of the keypad, approved by the party responsible for
then install the parts in reverse compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
3. Place a cloth on the edge of the order.
keypad, and remove the upper half This device complies with Industry
by carefully prying on the edge Canada Standard RSS-210.
with a small flat-tip screwdriver. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
138 2009 MDX

Remote Transmitter
Keyless Memory Settings™ Here are the settings activated with The steering wheel will move to the
the remote: stored position when you insert the
key into the ignition switch.
● Customized settings
(see page 83). You will also see the ‘‘WELCOME
DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘WELCOME DRIVER
●
Driving position memory
2’’ message on the multi-information

(see page 157).
display, depending on which linked
●
Audio system settings remote transmitter is used.
(see page 200).
To turn off this feature, press and
● Climate control settings hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
(see page 171). buttons at the same time. The LED
When you unlock and open the in the remote will blink twice. Then
driver's door with the remote release the buttons. Doing this
When you unlock the driver's door cancels the keyless memory settings
with your remote, each remote transmitter, the driver's seat (except
the power lumbar feature) and for that remote and restores the
activates the keyless memory default settings.
settings related to that remote. The outside mirrors start to move to the
driver's ID (MEMORY 1 or positions stored in memory. The To turn the keyless memory settings
MEMORY 2) is shown on the back of indicator in the related memory back on, repeat this procedure. The
each remote. button to the remote comes on. LED will blink once to indicate the
feature has been turned on.
2009 MDX 139

Seats
Front Seat Power Adjustments Moves the whole seat up

See pages 12 － 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to and forward, or down
properly position the seats and seat- and backward. The front
backs. of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
The controls for the power adjustable
front seats are on the outside edge of
each seat bottom. You can adjust the Adjusts the seat-back
seats with the ignition switch in any angle forward or
position. Make all seat adjustments backward.
before you start driving.
The passenger seat has the same Increases or decreases
adjustments as the driver's seat but the lumbar support.
without any lumbar adjustment. Moves the seat forward (Driver's seat only)
and backward.
Moves the front of the

seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
140 2009 MDX

Seats
Head Restraints FRONT CUSHION

See page 14 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints. SEAT-
BACK
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to

help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
LEGS RELEASE BUTTON
They are most effective when you Adjusting the Head Restraint
adjust them so the center of the back The head restraints adjust for height.
of the occupant's head rests against You need both hands to adjust the
the center of the restraint. restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull
upward. To lower the restraint, push
the release button sideways, and
push the restraint down.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 141

Seats
SECOND CENTER AND THIRD ROW When reinstalling a head restraint,

CUSHION put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height Failure to reinstall the head
while pressing the release button. restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Make sure the head restraint locks in
position when you reinstall it. Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
LEGS RELEASE BUTTON
Removing the Head Restraint

To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
142 2009 MDX

Seats
Active Head Restraints After a collision, the activated For a head restraint system to work
restraint should return to its normal properly:
position. ● Do not hang any items on the head
If the restraints do not return to their restraints, or from the restraint
normal position, or in the event of a legs.
severe collision, have the vehicle

●
Do not place any object between
inspected by an Acura dealer.
an occupant and the seat-back.
● Install each restraint in its proper
location.
●
Only use genuine Acura
replacement head restraints.
The driver's and front passenger's
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant's
head. It also helps protect the
occupants against whiplash and
injuries to the neck and upper spine.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 143

Seats
Adjusting the Second Row Seats Folding the Second Row Seats Make sure that the folded seat-back
The left and right halves can be does not press against the front
folded separately. passenger's seat, as this could cause
the weight sensors to work
1. To unlatch the detachable anchor
improperly.
before folding the seat-back, insert
the latch plate into the slot on the
side of the anchor buckle (see
page 146) and allow the seat belt to
retract. Store the detachable
anchor and seat belt latch plates in
the retractor housing.
HANDLE 2. Lower the head restraints to their
lowest positions.
To change the seat-back angle of the
seats in the second row, pull up on 3. Pull up the handle on the outside
the handle on the outside of the seat- of the seat-back.
back, and push the seat-back. 4. Fold the seat-back forward.
Overall, the seat-back has six Reverse this procedure to return the
different positions. seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving.
144 2009 MDX

Seats
Third Row Access Folding the Third Row Seat

1. Use the latch plate to release the
seat belt from the detachable
anchor (see page 146).
2. Lower the head restraints to their
lowest positions.

NOTE: To fold the third row seat, the
second row seat-back must be folded
down or in the full up right position.
THIRD SEAT HANDLE
RELEASE LEVER 3. Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back
To get into the third row seats, pull
forward.
up the lever on the side of the
passenger's side second row seat- Make sure the outer shoulder belts
back. The seat-back will tilt forward, are positioned on each hook on the
and then can be slid forward. side panel whenever the third seat is
folded.
After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make sure
the seat is fully latched before sitting
in it.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 145

Seats
Reverse this procedure to return the Detachable Anchor When the seats are returned to the
seat to the upright position. Make upright position, these detachable
sure the seat is locked securely anchors should be latched back
before driving. Reconnect the seat properly.
belts to the detachable anchors.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have Using the seat belt with the
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo detachable anchor unlatched
on page 332). increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
LATCH PLATE
Before using the seat belt,
The seat belts in the second row make sure the detachable
center seat and the third row seats anchor is correctly latched.
are equipped with detachable
anchors.
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.
146 2009 MDX

Seats
SECOND ROW CENTER SEAT THIRD ROW SEATS SMALL LATCH PLATE
LATCH PLATE

TRIANGLE
MARKS
HOOK
SMALL LATCH PLATE ANCHOR BUCKLE
Pull out the small latch plate and the Pull out the outer shoulder belts Line up the triangle marks on the
latch plate from each holding slot in from the hook. Both of the third-row small latch plate and anchor buckle
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt hooks should only be used when the when reattaching the belt and
to extend it. seat belt is detached. buckle.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that the
detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
2009 MDX 147

Seat Heaters
Passenger's
Seat
HI
Driver's LOW
HEATERS Seat Front seat Second row seat
Both front seats are equipped with Push the front of the switch, HI, to U.S. Entertainment Packages and
seat heaters. Because of the sensors rapidly heat up the seat. After the Canadian models
for the side airbag cutoff system, seat reaches a comfortable The outer second row seat cushions
there is no heater in the passenger's temperature, select LO by pushing and seat-backs are equipped with
seat-back. The ignition switch must the back of the switch. This will keep seat heaters. Turning the switch on
be in the ON (II) position to use the the seat warm. the driver side warms the outer seat
heaters. behind the driver's seat only. The
passenger side switch warms the
outer seat behind the front passenger
seat.
148 2009 MDX

Seat Heaters, Power Windows
In the HI setting, the heater turns off Power Windows The windows will operate for up to 10
when the seat gets warm, and turns minutes after you turn off the ignition
back on after the seat's temperature DRIVER'S WINDOW MAIN SWITCH switch. Opening either front door
SWITCH
drops. cancels this function.
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with

temperature changes.
Closing a power window on
Follow these precautions when using someone's hands or fingers can
the seat heaters: cause serious injury.
● Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws Make sure your passengers are
large amounts of current from the away from the windows before
battery. Turn the ignition switch to the ON closing them.
●
If the engine is left idling for an (II) position to raise or lower any
extended period, do not use the window. To open a window, push the AUTO － To open either front
seat heaters even on the LO switch down and hold it. Release the window fully, push the window
setting. It can weaken the battery, switch when you want the window to switch firmly down to the second
causing hard starting. stop. Pull back on the switch and detent, then release it. The window
hold it to close the window. automatically goes down all the way.
To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 149

Power Windows
To close either front window fully, AUTO REVERSE － If either front If your vehicle's battery is
pull back the window switch firmly to window senses any obstacle while it disconnected or goes dead, or the
the second detent, then release it. is closing automatically, it will driver's window fuse is removed, the
The window automatically goes all reverse direction and then stop. To AUTO function may be disabled. If
the way up. To stop the window from close the window, remove the the AUTO function is disabled, the
going all the way up, push down on obstacle, then use the window switch power window system will need to be
the window switch briefly. again. reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
When you push the MAIN switch in, Auto reverse stops sensing when the
the switch is off, and the passengers' window is almost closed. You should 1. Start the engine. Push down and
windows cannot be raised or always check that all passengers and hold the driver's window switch
lowered. To cancel this feature, push objects are away from the window until the window is fully open.
on the switch again to get it to pop before closing it.
2. Pull and hold the driver's window
out. Keep the MAIN switch pushed switch to close the window
in when you have children in the completely, then hold the switch
vehicle so they do not injure for about 2 seconds.
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally. If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
150 2009 MDX

Power Windows
Opening the Windows and Opening/Closing the Windows 3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
Moonroof with the Remote and Moonroof with the Key hold it. All four windows and the
Transmitter moonroof start to open. To stop
You can open all of the windows and the windows and the moonroof,
the moonroof from outside with the release the key.
remote transmitter.
4. To open the windows and the

1. Press the UNLOCK button once to moonroof further, turn and hold
unlock the driver's door. the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. All the To close:
doors unlock, and all four windows
1. Insert the key in the driver's door
and moonroof start to open. To
lock.
stop the windows and moonroof,
release the button. 2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
You can open and close the windows then release it.
3. To open the windows and and moonroof with the key in the
moonroof further, press the button driver's door lock. 3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again (within 10 seconds of step 1) again, and hold it. All four windows
and hold it. If the windows and the To open: and the moonroof start to close. To
moonroof stop before the desired 1. Insert the key in the driver's door stop the windows and the
position, repeat steps 1 and 2. lock. moonroof, release the key.
You cannot close the windows or the 2. Turn the key clockwise, then
moonroof with the remote release it.
transmitter.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 151

Power Windows, Moonroof
4. To close the windows and the Moonroof To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
moonroof further, turn and hold center of the moonroof switch. To
the key again (within 10 seconds stop the moonroof from tilting up
of step 2). fully, push the switch briefly.
Auto reverse does not work when To close the moonroof fully, firmly
closing the windows and moonroof push the moonroof switch forward,
with the key. then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
NOTE: If the windows and the
stop the moonroof from closing, push
moonroof stop before the desired
the switch briefly.
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
To open or close the moonroof
MOONROOF SWITCH partially, pull back or push forward
the moonroof switch lightly and hold
To open the moonroof fully, pull back it. The moonroof will stop when you
the moonroof switch firmly. The release the switch.
moonroof opens all the way. To stop
the moonroof from opening fully,
push the switch briefly.
152 2009 MDX

Moonroof, Parking Brake
Auto Reverse You can open and close the Parking Brake
If the moonroof runs into any moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
obstacle while it is closing you turn off the ignition switch. RELEASE HANDLE
automatically, it will reverse Opening either front door cancels
direction, and then stop. To close the this function.
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then

use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You If you try to open the moonroof in
should always check that all below-freezing temperatures, or when it
passengers and objects are away is covered with snow or ice, you can
from the moonroof before closing it. damage the moonroof panel or its
motor. PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the

pedal down with your foot. To
Opening or closing the release it, pull the release handle
moonroof on someone's hands fully. The parking brake indicator on
or fingers can cause serious the instrument panel should go out
injury. when the parking brake is fully
released (see page 65).
Make sure all hands and fingers You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
are clear of the moonroof PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
before opening or closing it. multi-information display (see page
81).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 153

Parking Brake, Mirrors
Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
Driving the vehicle with the parking clean and adjusted for best visibility.
brake applied can damage the rear Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound if you start driving.
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
SENSOR
INDICATOR
AUTO BUTTON
The inside mirror can automatically

darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
154 2009 MDX

Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push the appropriate edge of the

adjustment switch to move the
There is also a sensor on the back of mirror right, left, up, or down.
the mirror. Items hung on the mirror SELECTOR
may block this sensor and affect its SWITCH 4. When you finish, move the
performance. selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the adjustment

switch off to keep your settings.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver's side) or R (passenger's
side).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 155

Mirrors
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror Heated Mirrors

Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in reverse, HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
the selected mirror will tilt down
slightly to improve your view as you
parallel park. Shifting out of reverse
will return the mirror to its their
original position.
●
To tilt the driver's mirror, place the
selector switch in the left position.
● To tilt the passenger's mirror,
place the switch in the right
position.
The outside mirrors are heated to
●
To turn the feature off, place the remove fog and frost. With the
switch in the center position. ignition switch in the ON (II)
Outside mirror positions can be position, turn on the heaters by
stored in the driving position pressing the button. The indicator in
memory system (see page 157). the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
156 2009 MDX

Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature Storing a Driving Position in MEMORY BUTTONS
for the steering wheel, driver's seat, Memory
and outside mirror positions. Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.
Seat, except for power lumbar,
steering wheel and outside mirror 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
positions can be stored in separate (II) position. You cannot add a new

memories. You select a memorized driving position to the memory
position by pushing the appropriate unless the ignition switch is in the
button or using the appropriate ON (II) position. You can recall a
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or memorized position with the
Driver 2). For more information see ignition switch in any position. MEMO BUTTON
page 139.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable 3. Press and release the MEMO
position (see page 140). button on the control panel. You
Adjust the steering wheel to a will hear a beep. Immediately
comfortable position (see page press and hold one of the memory
124). buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two
Adjust the outside mirrors for best beeps. The indicator in the
visibility (see page 155). memory button will come on. The
current positions of the driver's
seat, steering wheel, and outside
mirrors are now stored.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 157

Driving Position Memory System
Doing any of the following after Selecting a Memorized Position To stop the system's automatic
pressing the MEMO button will To select a memorized position, do adjustment, do any of these actions:
cancel the storing procedure. this: ● Press any button on the control
●
Not pressing a memory button 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked. panel: MEMO, 1, or 2.
within 5 seconds.
2. Press the desired memory button ●
Push any of the adjustment
●
Readjusting the seat position. (1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then switches for the seat.
release the button.
●
Readjusting the outside mirror ●
Shift out of Park.
position. The system will move the seat, ● Adjust the outside mirrors.
steering wheel, and outside mirrors
Each memory button stores only one
to the memorized positions. The If desired, you can use the
driving position. Storing a new
indicator in the selected memory adjustment switches to change the
position erases the previous setting
button will flash during movement. positions of the seat, steering wheel
stored in that button's memory. If
When the adjustments are complete, or outside mirrors after they are in
you want to add a new position while
you will hear two beeps, and the their memorized position. If you
retaining the current one, use the
indicator will remain on. change the memorized position, the
other memory button.
indicator in the memory button will
To change the ‘‘MEMORY
go out. To keep this driving position
POSITION LINK’’ setting, see page
for later use, you must store it in the
98.
driving position memory.
158 2009 MDX

Interior Lights
Light Control Switch ●

The individual map lights in the After all doors are closed tightly, the
second row and the cargo area lights dim slightly, then fade out in
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION
light in the third row cannot be about 30 seconds.
turned on.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
OFF When the switch is in the door activated DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
position: 101.

ON ●
The individual map lights in the With any door or the tailgate left
front and second rows come on open, the lights stay on about 3
when any door or the tailgate is minutes, then go out.
opened, or when the remote
transmitter is used to unlock the The lights also come on when the
doors (see page 135). When the key is removed from the ignition
doors and the tailgate are closed, switch.
The light control switch has three each light can be turned on and off
positions: OFF, Door Activated, and by pushing the lens.
ON.
●
The cargo area light comes on
When the switch is in the OFF position: when any door or the tailgate is
●
The individual door lights or the opened if the light control switch is
tailgate lights will operate when a in the door activated (center)
door or the tailgate is opened. position. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, the cargo area
● The individual map lights in the light can be turned on with the
front can be turned on and off by switch in the light.
pressing the lenses.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 159

Interior Lights
When the light control switch is in the Individual Map Lights

ON position:
FRONT
●
All the individual map lights come
on and stay on as long as the
switch remains in the ON position.
● The cargo (3rd row) area light
comes on if the switch is in the
door activated position.
COURTESY LIGHT
The courtesy light between the map

lights comes on when you turn the
Turn on the front row individual map
parking lights on. To adjust its
lights by pushing the lens. Push the
brightness, press either of the
lens again to turn it off. With the light
instrument panel brightness control
control switch in the door activated
buttons (＋ or －).
position, the second row map lights
can be turned on by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off.
160 2009 MDX

Interior Lights
Cargo Area Light Tailgate Lights Individual Interior Lights

The lights in the tailgate have an on- The courtesy lights in all four doors
off switch to control if the lights come on when you open any door.
come on when the tailgate is opened. The light around the ignition switch
ON The tailgate lights do not come on comes on when any door is opened.
when any other doors are opened. After you close the door, the ignition

switch light stays on for about 30
seconds regardless of the interior
OFF
light dimming time setting (see page
101).
The cargo area light has a three-

position switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, it comes on when
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.
2009 MDX 161

Interior Convenience Items
SUNGLASSES HOLDER COAT HOOK
SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
GLOVE BOX GROCERY HOOK
CENTER POCKET
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT BEVERAGE HOLDER
ARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDER ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
162 2009 MDX

Beverage Holders FRONT LID

Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage

holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable containers
in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
ARMREST BEVERAGE HOLDER
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Beverage holders are also provided To open the beverage holder, press
Open the front beverage holder by in the second row seat armrest. Pivot and release the front lid. To close,
sliding the lid. down the seat-back to use them. press the lid again until it latches.
When you put back the armrest in
the center seat-back, make sure the
lid is closed properly.
2009 MDX 163

Console Compartment Storage Compartment Glove Box

Open the glove box by pulling the
LIDS handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.
BUTTONS
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
LID
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Your vehicle is equipped with a front The storage compartment with a
seat armrest pad that is also a sliding lid is at the left-side foot of the Always keep the glove box
console compartment. To open the front passenger seat. closed while driving.
console compartment fully, push
For the third row, a storage
both buttons at the front of the
compartment is located in the
compartment.
passenger side armrest. To open the
compartment, push the button and
lift the lid.
164 2009 MDX

Sunglasses Holder Cargo Hooks

HOOK
PUSH
SUNGLASSES HOLDER Some larger styles of sunglasses may

not fit in the holder.
To open the sunglasses holder, push The hooks on the floor of the cargo
then release the raised detent. It will You may also store small items in area enable you to tie down items
unlatch and swing down. To close it, this holder. Make sure they are small stored in the back. Make sure all
push it until it latches. Make sure the enough to let the holder close and stored items are secured before
holder is closed while you are latch, and that they are not heavy driving.
driving. enough to cause the holder to pop
open while driving.
2009 MDX 165

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Accessory Power Sockets

Your vehicle has two or three
accessory power sockets, depending
on the model. All models have the
front accessory power socket under
the audio system and rear socket
behind the third row seat on the
driver's side.
Slide
SUN VISOR
To use the sun visor, pull it down. To use the vanity mirror on the back
When using the sun visor for the of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
side window, remove the support rod
The vanity mirror light will not come
from the clip, and swing it out.
on if the sun visor is slid outward.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
166 2009 MDX

Each socket is intended to supply AC Power Outlet

power for 12 volt DC accessories that
are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.

MDX, Technology, and U.S. Sport
Packages models
The accessory power socket is U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models
located at the back of the front
There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
console compartment.
inside the front console
To use an accessory power socket, compartment. To use the AC power
the ignition switch must be in the outlet, open the lids and open the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. outlet cover. Insert the plug into the
receptacle slightly, turn it 90°
clockwise, then push in the plug all
the way.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 167

Always run the engine when you use NOTE: The AC power outlet is not
the AC power outlet. designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
The maximum capacity for this
wattage such as cathode-ray tube
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100
type televisions, refrigerators,
watts or less. If you use an appliance
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
which requires more than 100 watts,
suitable for devices that process
it automatically stops supplying the
precise data such as medical
power. If this happens, turn the
equipment or measuring
ignition switch off and turn it on
instruments. Any appliances that
again.
require an extremely stable power
supply such as microcomputer-
controlled electric blankets, touch
sensor lamps, etc., should not be
connected to this outlet.
168 2009 MDX

Main Menu
Features
The climate control system in your Climate Control System .............. 170 Playing the XM® Satellite Radio
vehicle provides a comfortable Rear Climate Controls ............. 175 (Models with navigation
driving environment in all weather Audio System .............................. 180 system) ............................... 210
conditions. Playing the AM/FM Radio Playing Discs (Models with
(Models without navigation navigation system) .................. 218
The standard audio system has many
system) ............................... 181 Disc Changer Error
features. This section describes
Playing the XM® Satellite Radio Messages ................................ 228
those features and how to use them.
(Models without navigation Protecting Your Discs ................. 229
Features
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system) ............................... 185 Auxiliary Input Jack .................... 232
system that requires a code number Playing Discs (Models without Remote Audio Controls ............... 233
to enable it. navigation system) .................. 190 Radio Theft Protection ................ 235
Disc Changer Error Message Setting the Clock and
(Models without navigation Calendar ................................. 236
system) ............................... 199 Rear Entertainment System ........ 237
Audio System (Models with Security System .......................... 269
navigation system) .................. 200 Cruise Control ............................ 270
Playing the AM/FM Radio Compass ..................................... 273
(Models with navigation HomeLink® Universal
system) ............................... 201 Transceiver ............................. 276
AM/FM Radio Reception ............ 205 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ....... 278
Playing the AM/FM Radio AcuraLink® (U.S. models
(Models with navigation only) ....................................... 307
system) ............................... 207 Rearview Camera and
Monitor ................................... 319
2009 MDX 169

Climate Control System
FRONT CONTROL PANEL OFF BUTTON

DRIVER'S SIDE TEMPERATURE FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE TEMPERATURE
AUTO BUTTON AUTO INDICATOR FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVER'S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
BUTTONS FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
DUAL BUTTON MODE BUTTON

REAR BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
REAR CONTROL PANEL
REAR PASSENGER AUTO SYNC INDICATOR
COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE
REAR PASSENGER FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
AUTO BUTTON MODE BUTTON

OFF BUTTON
170 2009 MDX

Personalization Setting Using Automatic Climate Control The system automatically selects the
When you unlock the doors with The automatic climate control system proper mix of conditioned and/or
your remote, the driver's ID (Driver in your vehicle picks the proper heated air that will, as quickly as
1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the combination of air conditioning, possible, raise or lower the interior
climate control settings are turned to heating, and ventilation to maintain temperature to your preference.
the respective mode automatically the interior temperature you select. Temperature Control
when the ignition is turned to the ON The system also adjusts the fan The driver's side temperature, the
(II) position. speed and airflow levels. passenger's side temperature and the
Features
Voice Control System 1. Press the Auto button on the front rear passenger compartment
On models with navigation system control panel. temperature can be set separately.
The climate control system can also Press the ▲ button of the
2. Set the desired temperature with appropriate temperature control to
be operated by voice control. See the
the temperature control buttons. increase the temperature of airflow.
Navi section in your quick start guide
You will see AUTO in the system's Press the ▼ button to decrease it.
for an overview of this system, and
display. Each set temperature is shown in the
the navigation system manual for
complete details. 3. You can set the driver's side display. The rear temperature is
temperature, the passenger's side shown in the display on the back of
temperature, and the temperature the center console.
of the rear passenger compartment
separately.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 171

When you set the temperature to its On models with navigation system Dual Button
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit In the Auto mode, the vehicle's You can set the temperatures for the
( ), the system runs at full cooling interior temperature is independently driver's side and the passenger's side
or heating only. It does not regulate regulated for the driver, front separately when this button is
the interior temperature. passenger, and rear passengers pressed (indicator is on). When the
according to each adjusted indicator in the DUAL button is off,
When you press a fan control button, the temperatures for both sides are
temperature. The system also
the fan is taken out of AUTO mode. synchronized to the driver's side set
regulates each temperature based on
When the indicator in the dual the information of the sun light temperature. When defrost mode is
button is on, the driver's side and sensor and the sun's position which selected, dual mode operation is
passenger's side temperature can be is updated automatically by the canceled.
controlled independently (see page navigation's global positioning
177). system (GPS). For example, if the
driver's side of the vehicle is getting
When the indicator in the rear button
too much sun, the system will adjust
is on, the temperature of the rear
to a lower temperature.
passenger compartment can be
controlled independently (see page
177).
172 2009 MDX

Rear Button To Turn Everything Off Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

When you press this button, the If you press the OFF button, the This button turns the air
indicator in the button comes on, and climate control system shuts off conditioning on and off. You will see
the temperature of the rear completely. A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
passenger compartment can be ●
Keep the system completely off for When you turn the A/C off, the
adjusted separately with the
short periods only. system cannot regulate the inside
temperature control buttons on the
temperature if you set the
back of the center console. With the ●
To keep stale air and mustiness temperature control below the
Features
indicator off, the temperature of the from collecting, you should have outside temperature.
rear passenger compartment is the fan running at all times.
synchronized to the driver's side set Recirculation Button
temperature. You will see the AUTO Semi-automatic Operation When the indicator in the button is
SYNC on the system display of the You can manually select various on, air from the vehicle's interior is
rear control panel. Changing the functions of the climate control sent throughout the system again.
temperature of the rear passenger system when it is in fully automatic When the indicator is off, air is
compartment also makes the mode. All other features remain brought in from the outside of the
indicator turn on, and takes the automatically controlled. Making any vehicle (fresh air mode).
system out of synchronized mode. manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out. The outside air intakes for the
This causes the word SYNC in the climate control system are at the
display to go out. Fan Control base of the windshield. Keep this
Press the ▲ button to increase the area clear of leaves and other debris.
fan speed and airflow. Press the ▼
button to decrease it. The system should be left in fresh air
mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 173

Switch to recirculation mode when Airflow is divided between the For your safety, make sure you have
driving through dusty or smoky floor and corner vents and the a clear view through all the windows
conditions, then return to fresh air defroster vents at the base of the before driving.
mode. windshield. When the indicator in the button is
Rear Window Defogger Button Windshield Defroster Button on, the front passenger's and rear
This button turns the rear window This button directs the main airflow passenger compartment
defogger off and on (see page 122). to the windshield for faster temperatures cannot be set
Pushing this button also turns the defrosting. It also overrides any separately from the driver's.
power mirror heaters on and off. mode selection you may have made.
Mode Control When you select , the system
Use the mode control button to automatically switches to fresh air
select the vents the air flows from. mode and turns on the A/C. For
Some air will flow from the faster defrosting, manually set the
dashboard vents in all modes. fan speed to high. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield by
Air flows from the center and closing the corner vents on the
corner vents in the dashboard. dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
Airflow is divided between the the wheel under each corner vent.
vents in the dashboard and the floor When you turn off by pressing
vents. the button again, the system returns
Air flows from the floor vents. to its former settings.
174 2009 MDX

Rear Climate Controls REAR CONTROL PANEL REAR PASSENGER

COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE
REAR PASSENGER FAN

COMPARTMENT CONTROL
TEMPERATURE BUTTONS
CONTROL
BUTTONS
Features
AUTO BUTTON MODE BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
REAR BUTTON
You can use the rear control panel
Rear Button when the indicator in the REAR
When the indicator in this button is off, button on the front control panel is
the temperature of the rear passenger on. Pressing any control button on
compartment is synchronized to the the rear control panel turns on the
driver's side set temperature. If the rear button indicator on the front
AUTO mode is selected on the front control panel.
control panel, you will see the AUTO
SYNC on the rear system display. When
the indicator in this button is on, the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment can be adjusted with the
rear temperature control buttons. A
passenger can also adjust the fan speed
and airflow.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 175

Temperature Control Fan Control Automatic Operation

Press the ▲ temperature control Press the ▲ fan control button to Pressing the AUTO button puts the
button to increase the temperature of increase the fan speed and airflow. system in automatic operation mode.
airflow, and the ▼ button to decrease Press the ▼ button to decrease it. The rear system automatically
it. The temperature you adjust is The level of the fan speed is shown in adjusts the fan speed and airflow
shown in the system display. the display. levels to maintain the selected
Mode Control temperature of the rear passenger
Each time you press the mode compartment. You will see AUTO in
button, the mode display changes the display.
from to . Pressing the OFF button shuts off
the rear climate control system.
When is selected, air flows from
the upper vents on the back of the
center console.
When is selected, air flows from
the lower vents.
176 2009 MDX

Triple Zone Temperature Control

The temperatures of the driver's side
and the front passenger's side can be Driver's Side Passenger's Side
controlled independently when the
indicator in the DUAL button is on.
When the indicator in the REAR
button is on, the temperature of the
rear passenger compartment can be
Features
controlled independently.
To adjust each temperature, press
either of the temperature control
buttons (▲or▼) on the climate
control panel.
Rear Passenger Compartment
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 177

Push AUTO or . The selected When the indicator in the REAR

temperatures appear in the display. button is off, the temperature of the
When the indicator in the DUAL rear passenger compartment is
button is off, you can adjust both synchronized to the driver's side set
sides to the same temperature by temperature. You will see the AUTO
adjusting the driver's temperature SYNC on the system display of the
control buttons. rear control panel.
To set the driver's side temperature To set the temperature of the rear
to a different value than the passenger compartment to a different
passenger's side, press the DUAL value than the driver's side, press the
button, then press either of the REAR button, then press either
driver's temperature control button temperature control buttons on the
(▲or▼). To set the passenger's side back of the center console. The word
to a different value than the driver's ‘‘SYNC’’ in the display goes out. You
side, press either of the front can also adjust the rear temperature
passenger's temperature control without pressing the REAR button
button (▲or▼). You can adjust the first. Pressing either button causes
passenger's side without pressing the indicator of the REAR button to
the DUAL button first. turn on.
When you set each temperature to its
lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.
178 2009 MDX

Sunlight and Temperature TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR

Sensors
Features
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
To regulate the interior temperature

and humidity, the climate control
system has two sensors. A sunlight
sensor is located in the top of the
dashboard and a temperature/
humidity sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
2009 MDX 179

Audio System
An audio system is standard on all

With navigation system With rear entertainment system
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle's audio system.
For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages 181 through 199.
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages 200 through 227.
Without navigation system
180 2009 MDX

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
AUTO SELECT BUTTON SEEK BUTTONS
FM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOB
AM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 181

To Play the Radio To Select a Station SCAN － The scan function samples
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to all stations with strong signals on the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected selected band. To activate it, press
Turn the system on by pushing the band: tune, seek, scan, the preset the SCAN button, then release it.
power/volume knob or the AM or buttons, and auto select. You will see SCAN in the display.
FM button. Adjust the volume by The system will scan for a station
TUNE － Use the TUNE knob to
turning the power/volume knob. with a strong signal. When it finds
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
one, it will stop and play that station
The band and frequency that the Turn the knob right to tune to a
for about 10 seconds.
radio was last tuned to are displayed. higher frequency, or left to tune to a
To change bands, press the AM or lower frequency. If you do nothing, the system will
FM button. On the FM band, ST will scan for the next strong station and
SEEK － The SEEK function
be displayed if the station is play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
searches up and down from the
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo a station that you want to listen to,
current frequency to find a station
reproduction in AM is not available. press the SCAN button again.
with a strong signal. To activate it,
On the AM band, AM noise press the ＋ or － SEEK button, then
reduction turns on automatically. release it.
182 2009 MDX

Preset － Each preset button can AUTO SELECT － If you are To turn off auto select, press the A.SEL
store one frequency on AM and two traveling far from home and can no (auto select) button. This restores
frequencies on FM. longer receive your preset stations, the presets you originally set.
you can use the auto select feature to
1. Select the desired band, AM or The presets may be lost if your
find stations in the local area.
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store vehicle's battery goes dead, is
two frequencies with each preset Press the A.SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’ disconnected, or the radio fuse is
button. flashes in the display, and the system removed.
goes into scan mode for several
Features
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan For information on AM/FM radio
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
function to tune the radio to a frequencies and reception, see page
six AM and twelve FM stations in the
desired station. 205.
preset buttons.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
until you hear a beep.
pressing a preset button if auto select
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a cannot find a strong station for that
total of six stations on AM and preset button.
twelve stations on FM.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store other
frequencies on the preset buttons as
previously described.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 183

Adjusting the Sound SVC － Adjusts the volume level This function is set to MID as the
Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob based on the vehicle speed. default setting when the vehicle
repeatedly to display the BASS, leaves the factory.
Each mode is shown in the display as
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to Audio System Lighting
SUBWOOFER, and SVC (speed- You can use the instrument panel
adjust the setting to your liking.
sensitive volume compensation) brightness control buttons to adjust
When the level reaches the center,
settings.
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. the illumination of the audio system
BASS － Adjusts the bass. (see page 123). The audio system
The system will return to the audio
illuminates when the parking lights
TREBLE － Adjusts the treble. display about 5 seconds after you
are on, even if the radio is off.
stop adjusting a mode.
FADER － Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound. Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
BALANCE － Adjusts the side-to- The SVC mode controls the volume
side strength of the sound. based on vehicle speed. The faster
SUBWOOFER － Adjusts the you go, the louder the audio volume
strength of sound from the becomes. As you slow down, the
subwoofer speaker. audio volume decreases.
CENTER － Adjusts the strength of The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
sound from the center speaker. SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
184 2009 MDX

Playing the XM® Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)
Features
XM RADIO BUTTON CATEGORY BUTTONS
SCAN BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOB
DISP/MODE BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 185

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)

®
Your vehicle is capable of receiving Operating the Satellite Radio You may experience periods when
XM® Satellite Radio anywhere in the To listen to XM satellite radio, turn XM Radio does not transmit the
United States, except Hawaii and the ignition switch to the artist's name and song title
Alaska. ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. information. If this happens, there is
On Canadian models, you can also Push the power/volume knob to turn nothing wrong with your system.
receive XM® Satellite Radio in on the audio system, and press the
TUNE － Turn the TUNE knob to
Canada. button. The last channel you
change channel selections. Turn the
XM® is a registered trademark of XM listened to will show in the display.
knob right for higher numbered
Satellite Radio, Inc. Adjust the volume by turning the
channels and left for lower numbered
power/volume knob.
XM satellite radio receives signals channels. In the category mode, you
from two satellites to produce clear, MODE － To switch between can only select channels within that
high-quality digital reception. It channel mode and category mode, category.
offers many channels in several press and hold the DISP/MODE
CATEGORY (－ or ＋) － Press
categories. Along with a large button until the mode changes.
either button to select another
selection of different types of music,
In the channel mode, you can select category.
XM satellite radio allows you to view
all of the available channels. In the
channel and category selections in
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
the display.
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
186 2009 MDX

SCAN － The SCAN function gives 2. Use the TUNE knob, the The presets may be lost if your
you a sampling of all channels while CATEGORY buttons, or the SCAN vehicle's battery goes dead, is
in the channel mode. In the category buttons to tune to a desired disconnected, or the radio fuse is
mode, only the stations within that channel. removed.
category are scanned. To activate XM Radio Display Messages
In category mode, only channels
scan, press the SCAN button. The
within that category can be selected.
system plays each channel in ‘‘LOADING’’ － XM is loading the
In channel mode, all channels can be
numerical order for a few seconds, audio or program information.
selected.
Features
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to 3. Pick the preset button you want for ‘‘OFF AIR’’ － The channel
continue listening to, press the that channel. Press and hold the currently selected is no longer
button again. button until you hear a beep. broadcasting.
Preset － You can store up to 12 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the ‘‘UPDATING’’ － The encryption
preset channels using the six preset first six channels. code is being updated. Wait until the
buttons. Each button stores one encryption code is fully updated.
5. Press the XM button again. The
channel from the XM1 band and one Channels 0 and 1 should still work
other XM band will show. Store
channel from the XM2 band. normally.
the next six channels using steps 2
To store a channel: and 3.
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 Once a channel is stored, simply
or XM2 will show in the display. press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 187

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)

®
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ － The signal is Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in

currently too weak. Move the vehicle mountains or large obstacles to these areas.
to an area away from tall buildings, the south.
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘ ’’ － The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ － There is a problem SATELLITE
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
GROUND REPEATER
The XM satellites are in orbit over Satellite signals are more likely to be
the equator; therefore, objects south blocked by tall buildings and
of the vehicle may cause satellite mountains the farther north you
reception interruptions. To help travel from the equator. Carrying
compensate for this, ground-based large items on a roof rack can also
repeaters are placed in major block the signal.
metropolitan areas.
188 2009 MDX

Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: After you've registered with XM Radio,
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly keep your audio system in the Satellite
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for Radio mode while you wait for
these conditions: compliance could void the user's activation. This should take about 30
authority to operate the equipment. minutes.
●
Driving on the north side of an
Receiving Satellite Radio Service While waiting for activation, make sure
east/west mountain road. If your XM Radio service has expired or your vehicle remains in an open area
●
Driving on the north side of a large you purchased your vehicle from a with good reception. Once your audio
Features
commercial truck on an east/west previous owner, you can listen to a system is activated, ‘‘CATEGORY’’ or
road. sampling of the broadcasts available on ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display, and
XM Satellite Radio. With the ignition you'll be able to listen to XM Radio
● Driving in tunnels. switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to
(II) position, push the power/volume send an activation signal to your vehicle
●
Driving on a road beside a vertical knob to turn on the audio system, and for at least 12 hours from the activation
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south press the button. A variety of request. If the service has not been
of you. music types and styles will play. activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Driving on the lower level of a Radio.
●
If you decide to purchase XM satellite
multi-tiered road. radio service, contact XM Radio at www.
xmradio.com, or at 1-800-852-9696. In
● Driving on a single lane road Canada, contact XM Canada at www.
alongside dense trees taller than xmradio.ca, or at 1-877-438-9677. You
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. will need to give them your radio I.D.
●
Large items carried on a roof rack. number and your credit card number.
To get your radio I.D. number, turn the
There may be other geographic TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the
situations that could affect XM radio display. Your I.D. will appear in the
reception. display.
2009 MDX 189

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
MP3/WMA INDICATOR TRACK/FILE NUMBER

FOLDER
NUMBER
DISC SLOT SEEK BUTTONS
DISC LOAD BUTTON DISC EJECT BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE (FOLDER) KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
RANDOM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON
190 2009 MDX

To Play a Disc This audio system can also play The specifications of the compatible
To load or play discs, the ignition CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in WMA files are:
switch must be in the ACCESSORY MP3 or WMA formats. When playing Sampling frequency:
(I) or ON (II) position. a disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ in 22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz
the display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’ Bitrate:
You operate the disc changer with
will appear in the display. The disc, 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
the same controls used for the radio.
folder and track numbers are Compatible with variable bitrate and
To select the disc changer, press the
displayed. You can select up to 255 multi-session.
DISC button. You will see ‘‘DISC’’ in
Features
folders or tracks. Maximum layers
the display. The disc and track
(including ROOT): 8 layers
numbers, and the elapsed time are Video CDs and DVD discs do not
shown in the display. You can also work in this unit.
select the displayed information with
The specifications of the compatible
the DISP button (see page 193). The
MP3 files are:
system will continuously play a disc
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
until you change modes.
(MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bitrate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. Compatible with variable bitrate and
The label can curl up and cause the multi-session.
disc to jam in the unit. Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 191

NOTE: Loading Discs You cannot load and play 3-inch

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is Your vehicle's in-dash disc changer (8-cm) discs in this unit.
protected by digital rights holds up to six discs.
4. When the disc load indicator turns
management (DRM), the audio unit 1. Press the LOAD button until you green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
displays CD FORMAT, and then hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the display again, insert the next disc
skips to the next file. display. To load only one disc, in the slot. Do not try to insert a
press and release the LOAD disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
button. could damage the audio unit.
2. The disc number for an empty 5. Repeat this until all six positions
position begins blinking. are loaded. If you are not loading
3. Insert the disc into the disc slot all six positions, the system begins
when the green disc load indicator playing the last disc loaded.
comes on. Insert it only about You can also load a disc into an
halfway; the drive will pull it in the empty position while a disc is playing
rest of the way. You will see by pressing the appropriate preset
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the button. The system stops playing the
disc load indicator turns red and current disc and starts the loading
blinks as the disc is loaded. sequence. It then plays the disc just
loaded.
192 2009 MDX

Text Data Display Function If the text data has more than 16 ●
When you insert a disc, and the
Each time you press the DISP characters, you will see the first 15 system begins to play.
button, the display shows you the characters and the ＞ indicator in the
text data on a disc, if the disc was When playing a CD-DA with text
display. Press and hold the DISP
recorded with text data. data, the album and track name are
button until the next 16 characters
shown in the display. With a disc in
You can see the album, artist, and are shown. You can see up to about
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
track name in the display. If a disc is 31 characters of the text data.
folder and file name.
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can If you press and hold the DISP
Features
see the folder and file name, and the When you turn on the audio system
button again, the display shows the
album, artist, and track tag. next time, the system keeps your
first 16 characters again.
selection with the DISP button.
With the folder name, you will see If any letter is not available, it is
the FOLDER indicator in the display. replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the
The TRACK indicator is shown with display.
the file or track name. When the disc has no text data, you
When you press and release the will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
DISP button while a disc without text You will also see some text data
data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO under these conditions:
INFO’’ on the display. ● When a new folder, file, or track is
The display shows up to about 16 selected.
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
●
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 193

To Change or Select Tracks/Files To move rapidly within a track or file, REPEAT (Track Repeat) － To
Use the seek buttons while a disc is press and hold the ＋ or － seek continuously replay a track (file in
playing to select passages and button. MP3 or WMA mode), press and
change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA release the RPT button. You will see
mode). In MP3 or WMA mode
RPT in the display. Press and hold
FOLDER SELECTION － To select
In MP3 or WMA mode, use the the RPT button to turn it off.
a different folder, turn the TUNE
TUNE knob to select folders in the knob to move to the beginning of the Pressing either seek button also
disc and use either seek button to next folder. Turn the knob to the turns off the repeat feature.
change files. right until it clicks once to skip to the
To select a different disc, use the next folder, and to the left to move to
appropriate preset buttons (1 the beginning of the current folder.
through 6). If you select an empty Turn it again to skip to the beginning
position, the system will go into the of the previous folder. Turning the
loading sequence (see page 192). TUNE knob more than two clicks
skips several folders.
SEEK/SKIP － Each time you press
and release the ＋ seek button, the
player skips forward to the beginning
of the next track (file in MP3 or
WMA mode). Press and release the
－ seek button to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
194 2009 MDX

In MP3 or WMA mode Each time you press and release the In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER REPEAT － This feature, RPT button, the mode changes from FOLDER RANDOM － This
when activated, replays all the files file repeat to folder repeat, to disc feature, when activated, plays the
on the selected folder in the order repeat then to normal playing. files within a current folder in
they are compressed in MP3 or random order, rather than in the
RANDOM (Random within a disc)
WMA. To activate folder repeat order they are compressed in MP3
－ This feature plays the tracks
mode, press and release the RPT or WMA. To activate folder random
within a disc (the files in MP3 or
button repeatedly until you see F- play, press and release the RDM
WMA mode) in random order. To
Features
RPT in the display. The system button repeatedly. You will see F-
activate random play, press and
continuously replays the current RDM in the display. The system will
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
folder. Press and hold the RPT then select and play files randomly.
WMA mode, press the RDM button
button to turn it off. Pressing the This continues until you deactivate
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
RDM button, or selecting a different folder random play by pressing and
disc random play). You will see RDM
folder with the TUNE knob also holding the RDM button again, or
in the display. Press the RDM button
turns off the repeat feature. you select a different folder with the
for 2 seconds to return to normal
TUNE knob.
DISC REPEAT － This feature play.
continuously replays the current Each time you press and release the
disc. To activate disc repeat, press RDM button, the mode changes from
and release the RPT button folder random play, to within a disc
repeatedly until you see D-RPT in the random play, then to normal play.
display. Press and hold the RPT
button again to turn it off.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 195

SCAN － The SCAN function In MP3 or WMA mode Pressing either seek button, or
samples all the tracks on the disc in F-SCAN － This feature, when selecting a different disc (using the
the order they are recorded on the activated, samples the first file in preset buttons) or folder (using the
disc (all files in the selected folder in each folder on the disc in the order TUNE knob) turns off the SCAN or
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the they are recorded. To activate the F-SCAN feature.
scan feature, press and release the folder scan feature, press and release
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the SCAN button repeatedly. You will
the display. You will get a 10 second see F-SCAN in the display. The
sampling of each track/file in the system will then play the first file in
disc/folder. Press and hold the the main folders for about 10
SCAN button to get out of scan mode seconds. If you do nothing, the
and play the last track sampled. system will then play the following
first files for 10 seconds each. When
it plays a file that you want to
continue listening to, press and hold
the SCAN button.
196 2009 MDX

D-SCAN － This feature, when When the first track in the last disc, To Stop Playing a Disc
activated, samples the first track in or the first file in the last main folder Press the eject button ( ) to
each disc in order (the first file in the in the last disc begins to play, the remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
main folder on each disc in MP3 or disc scan mode will be canceled. but do not remove it from the slot,
WMA mode). To activate the disc Pressing either seek button or the system will automatically reload
scan feature, press and release the selecting a different folder with the the disc after 10 seconds. To begin
SCAN button repeatedly until TUNE knob also turns off the scan playing, press the DISC button.
D-SCAN shows in the display. The feature.
You can also eject the disc when the
Features
system will then play the first track/
Each time you press and release the ignition switch is off.
file in the first main folder in the first
SCAN button, the mode changes
disc for about 10 seconds. If you do To play the radio when a disc is
from scan, disc scan, then to normal
nothing, the system will then play the playing, press the AM or FM button.
playing.
following first tracks/files for 10 Press the DISC button again to
seconds each. When it plays a track/ In MP3 or WMA mode switch back to the disc changer.
file that you want to continue Each time you press and release the
listening to, press and hold the SCAN button, the mode changes
SCAN button again. from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal playing.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 197

If you turn the system off while a disc To remove a different disc from the
is playing, either with the power/ changer, first select it with the
volume knob or by turning off the appropriate preset button. When that
ignition switch, the disc will stay in disc begins playing, press the eject
the drive. When you turn the system button. Continue pressing the eject
back on, the disc will begin playing button to remove all the discs from
where it left off. the changer.
Removing Discs from the In-dash You can also eject discs when the
Disc Changer ignition switch is off. The disc that
To remove the disc currently in play, was last selected is ejected first.
press the eject button. When a disc is
removed from a slot, the system Protecting Discs
automatically begins the load For information on how to handle
sequence so you can load another and protect compact discs, see page
disc in that position. If you do not 229.
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM).
198 2009 MDX

Disc Changer Error Message (Models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the Error Message Cause Solution
error messages you may see in the HEAT ERROR High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
display while playing a disc. normal.
FORMAT Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next supported
If you see an error message in the supported track or file plays automatically.
display while playing a disc, press BAD DISC － Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
the eject button. After ejecting the OWNER'S Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
disc, check it for damage or MANUAL PUSH (see page 230). Insert the disc again. If the code
deformation. If there is no damage, EJECT does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
Features
BAD DISC － removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
insert the disc again. PLEASE CHECK force the disc out of the player.
Servo Error
OWNER'S
For the additional information on MANUAL
damaged discs, see page 230.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the
disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new disc
plays, there is a problem with the
first disc. If the error message cycle
repeats and you cannot clear it, take
your vehicle to a dealer.
2009 MDX 199

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial The knob turns left and right. Use it Personalization Setting
On models with navigation system to make selections or adjustments to When you unlock the doors with
Most audio system functions can still a list or menu on the screen. your remote and turn the audio
be controlled by standard buttons, system on, the driver's ID (Driver 1
The selector can be pushed left,
dials, and knobs, but some functions or Driver 2) is detected, and the
right, up, down, and in. Use the
can only be accessed using the radio presets and sound level
selector to scroll through lists, to
interface dial. The interface dial has settings (see page 207) are turned to
select menus, and to highlight menu
two parts, a knob and a selector. the respective memorized mode
items. When you make a selection,
automatically.
KNOB ENTER push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection. Voice Control System
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start guide
for an overview of this system, and
the navigation system manual for
complete details.
SELECTOR
200 2009 MDX

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Without rear entertainment system With rear entertainment system

AUDIO DISPLAY AUDIO DISPLAY
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS
Features
AUTO
SCAN SELECT
SCAN BUTTON
BUTTON BUTTON
SEEK SEEK
BUTTONS AM/FM
AM/FM BUTTON BUTTONS
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
POWER/ POWER/ TUNE KNOB

VOLUME PRESET VOLUME
KNOB BUTTONS KNOB
AUDIO
AUDIO BUTTON
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
INTERFACE DIAL
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 201

The band and frequency that the

STEREO ICON BAND radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM
bands, STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
audio display, if the station is TUNE ICON
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
To Play the AM/FM Radio reproduction on AM is not available. TUNE － Use the TUNE knob to
The ignition switch must be in the To Select a Station tune the radio to a desired frequency.
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) You can use any of five methods to Turn the knob right to tune to a
position. Press the AUDIO button to find radio stations on the selected higher frequency, or left to tune to a
view the audio control display. Turn band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the lower frequency. To tune with the
the system on by pressing the preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT. interface dial, push the selector
power/volume knob or the AM/FM down, and turn the knob to TUNE.
button. Adjust the volume by turning Then press ENTER on the selector,
the power/volume knob. and turn the knob to the desired
frequency. To exit the TUNE mode,
press ENTER on the selector.
202 2009 MDX

SEEK － The SEEK function To scan with the interface dial, push
searches up and down from the SCAN ICON the selector down, and then push it
current frequency to find a station to the right. You will see SCAN
with a strong signal. To activate it, flashing on the screen.
press the － or ＋ SEEK button, then
The system will scan for a station
release it. You can also activate
with a strong signal. When it finds
SEEK by pushing the interface
one, it will stop and play that station
selector to the right or left.
for about 10 seconds. If you do
Features
nothing, the system will then scan for
the next strong station and play it for
10 seconds. When it plays a station
that you want to listen to, press the
SCAN － The SCAN function scan button again, or push the
samples all stations with strong interface selector to the right again.
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 203

Preset － Each preset button or You can also press the A.SEL button.
preset icon can store one frequency AUTO SEL ICON You will see AUTO SEL on the
on AM and two frequencies on FM. screen, and the system goes into
scan mode for several seconds. The
To store a preset memory location:
system stores the frequencies of six
1. Select the desired band, AM or AM and twelve FM stations in the
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store preset buttons.
two sets of FM frequencies with
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
the preset buttons (on-screen
select cannot find a strong station for
icons).
every preset button.If you do not like
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan the stations auto select has stored,
function to tune the radio to a you can store other frequencies on
desired station. AUTO SELECT － If you are the preset buttons (icons) as
traveling far from home and can no previously described.
3. Press the preset button, and hold it longer receive your preset stations,
until you hear a beep. You can also you can use the auto select feature to To turn off auto select, press ENTER
store frequencies with the find stations in the local area. on the interface selector or press the
interface dial. Select the preset A.SEL button again. This restores
icon you want to store the Push the interface selector down to the presets you originally set.
frequency on, then press ENTER scroll down the screen, highlight
on the interface selector, and hold A.SEL, then press ENTER on the
it for more than 2 seconds. interface selector. You will see AUTO
SEL on the screen, and the system
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a goes into scan mode for several
total of six stations on AM and seconds.
twelve stations on FM.
204 2009 MDX

AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these as the distance from the station's
frequencies: transmitter, nearby large objects, and
atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station's signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
Features
Radio stations on the AM band are
transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). Driving very near the transmitter of a
listening to an FM station, you will
Stations must use these exact see the stereo indicator flickering off station that is broadcasting on a
frequencies. It is fairly common for and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
stations to round-off the frequency in Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
their advertising, so your radio could go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio's reception. You
display a frequency of 100.9 even completely as you get out of range of may temporarily hear both stations,
though the announcer may identify the station's signal. or hear only the station you are close
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’ to.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 205

AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by

band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station's transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
Electrical interference from passing
in city driving.
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
206 2009 MDX

Adjusting the Sound

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
and Speed-sensitive volume
Features
compensation (SVC).
These adjustments can be made by SOUND ICON
the SOUND button or the interface
dial.
To adjust them, press the AUDIO Select the mode you want to adjust
button, push the interface selector by turning the interface dial.
down, and turn the interface knob to
You can also adjust the sound by
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the
pushing the SOUND button
selector.
repeatedly. Each mode is shown in
the audio display as it changes. Turn
the TUNE knob to adjust the setting
to your liking.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 207

BASS/TREBLE － To adjust bass FADER/BALANCE － These CENTER/SUBWOOFER － To

and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, modes adjust the strength of the adjust the strength of the sound from
and press ENTER on the interface sound coming from each speaker. the center or subwoofer speaker,
selector. The current setting is Fader adjusts the front-to-back select it and press ENTER on the
shown on the display. Turn the strength, while balance adjusts the interface selector. Turn the interface
interface knob to the desired level, side-to-side strength. To adjust fader knob to the desired level, and enter
and enter your selection by pressing and balance, select FADER or your selection by pressing ENTER
ENTER on the interface selector. BALANCE, then press ENTER on on the interface selector.
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
208 2009 MDX

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II － Dolby To set this feature on or off, select Speed-sensitive Volume
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on Compensation (SVC)
creates multi-channel surround the interface selector. Rotate the The SVC mode controls the volume
sound from 2 channel stereo audio interface dial to ON or OFF, and based on vehicle speed. The faster
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only press ENTER. you go, the louder the audio volume
activate when listening to DISC becomes. As you slow down, the
Manufactured under license from audio volume decreases.
(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM radio,
Dolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,
and AUX. When ProLogic II is active, The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbol
Features
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display. SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
are trademarks of Dolby
ProLogic ON/OFF settings are Laboratories. HIGH. The default setting is MID. To
independently controlled for DISC, change the SVC mode, select SVC,
XM and AUX sources. then press ENTER on the interface
selector. The current setting is
shown on the screen. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
2009 MDX 209

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)

®
AUDIO DISPLAY AUDIO DISPLAY

CATEGORY BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS
XM SCAN
BUTTON BUTTON CATEGORY
SCAN BUTTONS
BUTTON
TUNE TUNE KNOB
POWER/ KNOB POWER/
VOLUME VOLUME
KNOB KNOB DISPLAY/
DISPLAY/
MODE XM MODE
PRESET BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
BUTTONS
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL
210 2009 MDX

Playing the XM® Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle is capable of receiving Operating the XM Radio Push the AUDIO button to display
XM® Satellite Radio anywhere in the XM information on the screen. You
United States, and Canada, except can operate the XM Satellite Radio
Hawaii and Alaska. XM® is a system with the interface dial.
registered trademark of XM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
XM Satellite Radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
Features
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM Satellite Radio also allows you to
view channel and category selections To listen to XM satellite radio, turn
in the audio display. the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Push the power/volume knob to turn
on the audio system, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 211


®
MODE － To switch between the In the category mode, such as Jazz, TUNE － Turn the TUNE knob to
category mode and channel mode, Rock, Classical, etc., you can change channel selections. Turn the
press and hold the DISP/MODE navigate through all of the channels knob right for higher numbered
button until the mode changes. The within that category. In the channel channels and left for lower numbered
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is mode, you can select all of the channels. You can also change
displayed on the screen. To switch available channels. channels with the interface selector,
the mode with the interface dial, push down the interface selector to
Each time you press and release the
scroll down, select MODE, and press choose TUNE and press ENTER on
DISP/MODE button, the audio
ENTER on the selector. the selector. Turn the interface knob
display changes in the following
to the same directions. In the
sequence: channel name, channel
category mode, you can only select
number, category, artist name, and
channels within that category.
music title.
On the screen, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
212 2009 MDX

CATEGORY (－ or ＋) － Press SCAN － The scan function gives The system plays each channel in
either button to select another you a sampling of all channels while numerical order for a few seconds,
category. You can also change a in the channel mode. In the category then selects the next channel. When
category by pushing the interface mode, only the channels within that you hear a channel you want to
selector left or right. category are scanned. To activate continue listening to, push the
SCAN, press the SCAN button. To interface selector to the right again
scan with the interface dial, scroll or press the SCAN button to cancel.
down, and push the interface selector
Features
to the right. You will see SCAN on
the screen and audio display.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 213


®
2. Use the tune or scan function to 5. Press the button or scroll

XM BAND tune to a desired channel. up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
In category mode, only channels
channels using steps 2 and 3.
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all Once a channel is stored, press
channels can be selected. and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
3. Pick the preset button you want for
that channel. Press and hold the
preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Preset － You can store up to 12 Select your desired number and
preset channels using the six preset press and hold ENTER on the
buttons. Each button stores one interface selector.
channel from the XM1 band and one 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
channel from the XM2 band. first six channels.
To store a channel:
1. Press the button or scroll
up by pushing the interface
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
will be shown on the display.
214 2009 MDX

XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ － The signal is

currently too
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
‘‘LOADING’’ － XM is loading the away from tall
audio or program buildings, and
information. with an
‘‘OFF AIR’’ － The channel unobstructed
Features
currently selected view of the
is no longer southern
broadcasting. horizon.
‘‘UPDATING’’ － The encryption ‘‘ ’’ － The selected channel
code is being number does not exist
updated. Wait or is not part of your
until the subscription, or this
encryption code channel has no artist or
is fully updated. title information at this
Channels 0 and 1 time.
should still work
normally. ‘‘ANTENNA’’－ There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your
dealer.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 215


®
The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
216 2009 MDX

Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: After you've registered with XM Radio,
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly keep your audio system in the Satellite
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for Radio mode while you wait for activation.
these conditions: compliance could void the user's This should take about 30 minutes.
authority to operate the equipment. While waiting for activation, make sure
●
Driving on the north side of an your vehicle remains in an open area
Receiving XM Satellite Radio Service
east/west mountain road. If your XM Radio service has expired or with good reception. Once your audio
●
Driving on the north side of a large you purchased your vehicle from a system is activated, ‘‘category’’ or ‘‘CH’’
Features
commercial truck on an east/west previous owner, you can listen to a will appear in the display, and you'll be
sampling of the broadcasts available on able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.
road. XM Radio will continue to send an
XM Satellite Radio. With the ignition
● Driving in tunnels. switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON activation signal to your vehicle for at
(II) position, push the power/volume least 12 hours from the activation
●
Driving on a road beside a vertical knob to turn on the audio system, and request. If the service has not been
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south press the button. A variety of activated after 36 hours, contact XM
of you. music types and styles will play. Radio.
●
Driving on the lower level of a If you decide to purchase XM satellite
multi-tiered road. radio service, contact XM Radio at www.
xmradio.com, or at 1-800-852-9696. In
● Driving on a single lane road Canada, contact XM Canada at www.
alongside dense trees taller than xmradio.ca, or at 1-877-438-9677. You will
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. need to give them your radio I.D.
number and your credit card number. To
There may be other geographic get your radio I.D. number, turn the
situations that could affect satellite TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the
radio reception. display. Your I.D. will appear in the
display.
2009 MDX 217

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO DISPLAY
REPEAT BUTTON AUDIO DISPLAY
RANDOM BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BUTTONS
SCAN SCAN RANDOM

BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
LOAD EJECT SEEK
LOAD BUTTONS
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
POWER/ POWER/ EJECT
VOLUME FOLDER VOLUME BUTTON
KNOB KNOB KNOB
DISC BUTTON DISPLAY/ REPEAT FOLDER
MODE BUTTON KNOB
PRESET BUTTON
BUTTONS DISC BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON
218 2009 MDX

Your vehicle's audio system has an The changer can also play MP3 or
in-dash disc changer with the same WMA format (see page 224).
controls used for the radio. To
DVD-A discs not meeting DVD
operate the disc changer, the ignition
verification standards may not be
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
playable.
(I) or the ON (II) position.
The changer cannot play DVD-V
The disc changer can play these disc
format.
formats:
Features
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
● CD (CD-DA)
discs are not playable.
● CD-R/RW
Manufactured under license under
●
DVD-A U.S. Patent # 's:5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
●
DVD-R/RW
other U.S. and worldwide patents
●
MP3/WMA issued & pending. DTS and DTS
The disc packages or jackets should Digital Surround are registered
have one of these marks. trademarks and the DTS logos and
Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 219

3. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the 2. ‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen

audio display again, insert the next for an empty position in the
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. disc into the slot. changer. When the green load
The label can curl up and cause the Do not try to insert a disc until indicator comes on and you see
disc to jam in the unit. ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could the ‘‘LOAD’’ in the audio display,
damage the audio unit. insert the disc into the slot. Insert
Loading Discs in the Changer it only about halfway; the drive will
4. Repeat this until all six positions
To load multiple discs in one pull it in the rest of the way.
are loaded. If you are not loading
operation: all six positions, the system will You can select the position to load a
1. With the ignition in the then begin playing the last disc disc. Turn the interface knob or
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) loaded. press a preset button to select the
position, press and hold the LOAD position, then press ENTER on the
If you stop loading discs before all
button until you hear a beep and selector. This starts the loading
six positions are filled, the system
see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display, sequence. If you do not select the
will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load
then release the button. position, the system loads the disc to
operation, and begin playing the last
the first empty position in numerical
2. Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it disc loaded.
order.
only about halfway; the drive will To load a single disc:
pull it in the rest of the way. You If you press the LOAD button while a
will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in audio display. 1. Press and release the LOAD disc is playing, the system will stop
When you insert the first disc, the button. playing that disc and start the loading
changer will start to play the disc. sequence. It will then play the disc
just loaded.
220 2009 MDX

To Play a Disc The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3, If the disc does not carry album,
and WMA formats. track, or artist name, pressing the
DISP button changes the display
When you play CD-TEXT, you will
from normal display to ‘‘NO INFO’’.
see the track name, artist name, and
album name on the screen. When To Change Tracks
you play MP3/WMA discs, you will Each time you press and release the
see the track name and folder name SEEK (＋) button or push the
on the screen. If the disc was not interface selector to the right, the
Features
recorded with this information, it will player skips forward to the beginning
not be displayed. of the next track. Press and release
the SEEK (－) button or push the
CURRENT DISC
Each time you press the DISP interface selector to the left to skip
button, the audio display changes backward to the beginning of the
from album name, to track name, to current track. Press the SEEK (－)
Select the changer by pressing the artist name, and then to normal
DISC button. The system will begin button or push the interface selector
display that shows the track number to the left again to skip to the
playing the last selected disc in the and the current time. When playing a
disc changer. You will see the previous track. To move rapidly
disc in MP3/WMA, the display mode within a track, press and hold the
current disc position highlighted. changes from folder name, to file SEEK (－) or SEEK (＋) button.
To select a different disc, press the name, to artist tag, to album tag, to
corresponding number on the preset track tag, and then to normal display.
buttons, or turn the interface knob to
highlight the desired disc, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 221

To Choose a Track Track Scan Disc Scan

When you press the SCAN button or When you press the SCAN button
scroll down and push the interface repeatedly until you see D-SCAN in
selector to the left, the next track of the audio display, or push down the
the current track plays for about 10 interface selector to the right, the
seconds. You will see SCAN next to first track of the current disc plays
TRACK on the screen and audio for about 10 seconds. You will see
display. To listen to the rest of the SCAN next to DISC on the screen
track, press and hold the SCAN and D-SCAN in the audio display. To
button until you hear a beep or push listen to the rest of the disc, press
the interface selector to the left again and hold the SCAN button until you
CURRENT TRACK within 10 seconds. hear a beep, or push down the
interface selector to the right again
If you don't, the system advances to
within 10 seconds.
You can also choose a track directly the next track, plays about 10
from a track list. Press ENTER on seconds of it, and continues through If you don't, the system advances to
the interface selector, and the track the rest of the tracks the same way. the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
list screen will be shown. If there are of its first track, and continues
no track names, track numbers are through the rest of the discs the
displayed. You will see the current same way. When the system reaches
track is highlighted. Turn the the last disc, DISC SCAN is
interface knob to select the desired canceled, and that disc continues to
track, then press ENTER on the play.
interface selector.
To exit the track list display, press
the AUDIO button, or push the
interface selector to the left.
222 2009 MDX

Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play

To replay the current track To replay the current disc To play the tracks of the current disc
continuously, press and release the continuously, press the RPT button in random order, press and release
RPT button, or use the interface repeatedly until you see D-RPT in the the RDM button, or use the interface
selector to scroll down, select audio display, or use the interface selector to scroll down, select
TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER selector to scroll down, select DISC TRACK RANDOM, and press
on the interface selector. As a REPEAT, and press ENTER on the ENTER on the interface selector. As
reminder, you will see REPEAT next interface selector. As a reminder, you a reminder, you will see RANDOM
Features
to TRACK on the screen and RPT in will see REPEAT next to DISC on the next to TRACK on the screen and
the audio display. To turn this feature screen and D-RPT in the audio RDM in the audio display. To turn
off, press and hold the RPT button display. To turn this feature off, press this feature off, press and hold the
until you hear a beep, or highlight and hold the RPT button until you RDM button until you hear a beep, or
TRACK REPEAT (if not already hear a beep, or highlight DISC highlight TRACK RANDOM (if not
highlighted), and press ENTER on REPEAT (if not already highlighted), already highlighted), and press
the interface selector again. and press ENTER on the interface ENTER on the interface selector
selector again. again.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 223

To Pause a Disc Playing a DVD-A Disc The specifications of the compatible

To pause a disc, press the preset Use the disc controls previously WMA files are:
button which corresponds to the described. Sampling frequency: 22.05/32/44.1/
current disc. To play the disc again, 48 kHz
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
press the preset button again. Bitrate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192
The changer plays MP3/WMA files
kbps
To Stop Playing a Disc in recorded order. Each disc can
Compatible with variable bitrate and
To take the system out of disc mode, hold up to 400 playable files within 8
multi-session.
press the AM/FM button the folder layers. When playing MP3
button, or the AUX button. To return discs, a disc can support a maximum To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the
to disc mode, press the DISC button. number of 100 folders, and each disc controls previously described,
folder can hold 255 playable files. along with the following information.
If you turn the system off while a disc
is playing, either with the power/ The specifications of the compatible
volume knob or the ignition switch, MP3 files are:
play will continue at the same point Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
when you turn it back on. (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bitrate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
Compatible with variable bitrate and
multi-session.
224 2009 MDX

Changing the Folders Changing and Selecting the Folders/

While playing an MP3/WMA disc, Files
you can select a folder within the
disc by turning the TUNE knob.
Each time you rotate the knob, the
folder title and its first file's
information appear in the audio
display in recorded order.
Features
Repeat the procedure to go into a
lower folder. If you highlight a file
If you use the interface selector, you and press ENTER, the system starts
can see the list of all the files and to play your selected file.
folders within a disc. While playing a
MP3/WMA disc, press the AUDIO
button. The currently playing folder
and file information comes on the
screen. Turn the selector knob,
highlight the folder you want to see
the information within, and press
ENTER.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 225

Folder Scan Folder Repeat Folder Random

This feature, when activated, samples This feature, when activated, replays This feature, when activated, plays in
the first file of each folder for 10 all files on the selected folder. To the current folder in random order.
seconds. To scan a folder, press the activate folder repeat mode, press To activate folder random play, press
SCAN button repeatedly until you and hold the RPT button repeatedly the RDM button twice, or use the
see F-SCAN in the audio display. You until you see F-RPT in the audio interface selector to scroll down,
will see SCAN next to FOLDER and display, or use the interface selector select FOLDER RANDOM by
F-SCAN in the audio display. to scroll down, select FOLDER interface knob, and press ENTER on
REPEAT by interface knob, and the interface selector. You will see
To listen to the rest of the folder,
press ENTER on the interface RANDOM next to FOLDER on the
press and hold the SCAN button until
selector. You will see REPEAT next screen and F-RDM in the audio
you hear a beep. If you do not, the
to FOLDER on the screen and F-RPT display. To turn this feature off, press
system advances to the next folder,
in the audio display. To turn this and hold the RDM button until you
plays 10 seconds of it, and continues
feature off, press and hold the PRT hear a beep, or highlight FOLDER
throughout the rest of the folder the
button until you hear a beep, or RANDOM (if not already
same way. When the system samples
highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not highlighted), and press ENTER on
the first file of all folders, folder scan
already highlighted), and press the interface selector again.
is canceled, and the last file played
ENTER on the interface selector
comes back.
again.
226 2009 MDX

Removing Discs from the Changer To remove a different disc from the
To remove the disc that is currently changer, first select it by pressing
playing, press the eject button. You the corresponding number on the
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the audio preset button or turning the interface
display. When you remove the disc knob, and pressing ENTER on the
from the slot, the system interface selector. When that disc
automatically enters the previous begins playing, press the eject
mode AM, FM1, FM2, or XM button.
Features
Satellite Radio. The system also
When you press the eject button
begins the load sequence so you can
while listening to the radio, or with
load another disc. If you do not load
the audio system turned off, the disc
another disc, the load sequence is
that was last selected is ejected. After
canceled, and the system continues
that disc is ejected, pressing the eject
playing in the previous mode.
button again will eject the next disc
If you do not remove the disc from in numerical order. By doing this six
the slot, the system will reload the times, you can remove all the discs
disc after 10 seconds. To begin from the changer.
playing the disc, press the disc
You can also eject discs when the
button.
ignition switch is off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button.
2009 MDX 227

Disc Changer Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the Error Message Cause Solution
error messages you may see in the HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
display while playing a disc. normal.
FORMAT Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next supported
If you see an error message in the supported track or file plays automatically.
display while playing a disc, press BAD DISC － Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
the eject button. After ejecting the OWNER'S Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
disc, check it for damage or MANUAL PUSH (see page 229). Insert the disc again. If the code
deformation. If there is no damage, EJECT does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
BAD DISC － removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
insert the disc again. PLEASE CHECK force the disc out of the player.
Servo Error
OWNER'S
For the additional information on MANUAL
damaged discs, see page 229.
The audio system will try to play the
disc.
228 2009 MDX

Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

●When using CD-R or CD-RW When a disc is not being played,
discs, use only high quality discs store it in its case to protect it from
labeled for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
●
When recording a CD-R or
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
changer. Wipe across the disc from the center
Features
to the outside edge.
● Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- A new disc may be rough on the
shaped discs may jam in the drive inner and outer edges. The small
or cause other problems. plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
can flake off and fall on the recording touch either surface. Do not place
●
Handle your discs properly to
surface of the disc, causing skipping stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
prevent damage and skipping.
or other problems. Remove these These, along with contamination
pieces by rubbing the inner and from finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip
outer edges with the side of a pencil pens, can cause the disc to not play
or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the Never try to insert foreign objects in
disc to jam in the unit. the disc changer.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 229

Additional Information on 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown to Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
the right: Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped
Cracked Burrs
230 2009 MDX

4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs ●

Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo. For the
rear entertainment system, see
page 264.
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
● CD-R or CD-RW may not play due ● Audio unit may not play the
to the recording conditions. following formats.
●
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
●
This audio unit cannot play a
Can Shape Arrow Shape
Dualdisc® .
2009 MDX 231

Auxiliary Input Jack
All models except U.S. Entertainment U.S. Entertainment Package and

Package and Canadian Elite Package Canadian Elite Package models
models
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone

The auxiliary input jack is inside the connectors for the rear
front console compartment. The entertainment system are on the
system will accept auxiliary input back of the center console
from standard audio accessories. compartment.
When a compatible audio unit is For more information, see page 267.
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
232 2009 MDX

Remote Audio Controls
The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a disc, the system
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next
or bottom of the button, hold it until track each time you press the top
MODE the desired volume is reached, then (＋) of the CH button. Press the
BUTTON release it. bottom (－) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
CH The MODE button changes the
it again to return to the previous
BUTTON mode. Pressing the button
track. You will see the disc and track
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
Features
numbers in the upper display.
DISC (if a disc is loaded), DVD video
(if equipped), XM1, XM2, or AUX. To go to the next disc, press the top
VOL BUTTON
(＋) of the button. Press the bottom
If you are listening to the radio, use
(－) to go back to the previous disc.
Three controls for the audio system the CH button to change stations.
When you play an MP3/WMA disc,
are mounted in the steering wheel Each time you press the top (＋) of
press the top (＋) of the button for 1
hub. These let you control basic the button, the system goes to the
second to go to the next folder. Press
functions without removing your next preset station on the band you
the bottom (－) for 1 second to go
hand from the wheel. are listening to. Press the bottom
back to the previous folder.
(－) to go back to the previous
station.
To search up and down from the
current frequency and find a station
with a strong signal, press the top
(＋) or bottom (－) of the button for
1 second.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 233

Remote Audio Controls
If you are listening to XM Satellite If you are playing a DVD video, use
Radio, use the CH button to change the channel button to change
channels. Each time you press the chapters. Each time you press the
top (＋) of the button, the system top (＋) of the button, the system
goes to the next preset channel. goes to the next chapter. Press the
Press the bottom (－) to go back to bottom (－) to return to the
the previous preset channel. beginning of the current chapter.
To go to the next channel of the Press it again to return to the
category you are listening to, press previous chapter.
the top (＋) of the button for 1
second. Press the bottom (－) for 1
second to go back to the previous
channel.
234 2009 MDX

Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle's audio system may If your vehicle's battery is The system will retain your AM and
disable itself if it is disconnected disconnected or goes dead, or the FM presets even if power is
from electrical power for any reason. radio fuse is removed, the audio disconnected.
To make it work again, you must system will disable itself. If this
enter a specific five-digit code with happens, you will see ‘‘ ’’ in
the preset buttons. Because there are the audio display the next time you
hundreds of number combinations turn on the system. Use the preset
possible from the five digits, making buttons to enter the five-digit code.
Features
the system work without knowing The code is located on the radio code
the exact code is nearly impossible. card included in your owner's
manual kit. When it is entered
You should have received a card that
correctly, the radio will start playing.
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store If you make a mistake entering the
this card in a safe place at home. In code, do not start over; complete the
addition, you should write the audio five-digit sequence, then enter the
system's serial number in this correct code. You have 10 tries to
owner's manual. enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
If you lose the card, you must obtain
must then leave the system on for 1
the code number from your dealer.
hour before trying again.
To do this, you will need the audio
system's serial number.
2009 MDX 235

Setting the Clock and Calendar
4. After you set the day information,

pressing the SET button again will
cancel this setting mode and the
system shows the adjusted display.
The system will also automatically
return to the normal display about 10
seconds after you stop adjusting a
mode.
On models with navigation system
U.S. model is shown : Press SET The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
On models without navigation system 2. Press and release the SET button system (GPS), and the displayed
You can see the clock and calendar repeatedly. The mode switches time is updated automatically by the
information on the upper display. from hours, minutes, AM/PM, GPS. Refer to the navigation system
year, month, then to day as shown manual for how to adjust the time.
To set the clock and the calendar:
above.
1. Press and hold the SET button
3. Select the desired mode by
until the clock display begins to
pressing the SET button, then
blink.
press either ▼ or ▲ button to
change the setting.
236 2009 MDX

Rear Entertainment System
Available on U.S. Entertainment Package To Turn On the System The rear system selects the source it
and Canadian Elite Package models Press the REAR PWR button. The was last set to. If that source has
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear indicator on the REAR PWR button been removed (the DVD has been
entertainment system that includes a will come on, as well as the indicator ejected from the player, for example),
DVD player for the enjoyment of the on the FRONT SOURCE button. The you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in the
rear passengers. rear seat passengers can then display. You should select another
With this system, the rear operate the rear system from the source or insert a DVD.
passengers can enjoy a different control panel in the ceiling. The rear Rear Speakers
Features
entertainment source (radio, disc control panel can also be detached When you turn on the system, the rear
changer, DVD player, XM Radio, or and used as a remote control, by speakers are automatically turned off if
optional CD changer/tape player) pushing the RELEASE button, and the rear system selects a different
than the front seat occupants. The pulling the remote toward you. entertainment source than the front
system. You will see the Rear Speakers
audio is broadcast through the Pressing the REAR CTRL OFF Off icon both in the audio display and the
supplied wireless headphones. button disables rear control. The overhead screen. The sound for the rear
The ignition switch must be in the indicator in the button comes on and system is sent to the wireless
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) your passengers can no longer headphones.
position to operate the rear operate the system with the rear If you want to turn the rear speakers on
entertainment system. control panel. When the button is again, press and hold the REAR PWR
pressed, the ‘‘CTRL OFF’’ message button until the Rear Speakers Off icon
appears in the overhead screen to let goes off.
your passengers know that the
NOTE: The rear speakers are connected
control panel is disabled. to the front system, so they will always
play the source that the front system is
set to.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 237

U.S. Entertainment Package and

REAR PWR BUTTON REAR CTRL OFF BUTTON Overhead Screen Unit
FRONT SOURCE BUTTON REAR SOURCE BUTTON
238 2009 MDX

To Select Rear Entertainment Operating the DVD Player from REAR CONTROL PANEL
from the Front Control Panel the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment The DVD player in your rear
system from the front panel, press entertainment system can play DVD
the REAR SOURCE button. You will video discs, audio CDs MP3/WMA
hear two beeps and the indicator in discs and DTS CDs.
the button comes on to show that the
control panel is enabled.
Features
If you do not operate the rear OPEN BUTTON
entertainment system from the front
panel within 10 seconds, the OVERHEAD SCREEN
indicator goes off and the FRONT
SOURCE indicator comes on Open the overhead screen by
automatically. pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
To play the radio, the buttons for the Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
front entertainment system have the If you pivot the screen too far
same functions. forward, past the second detent, the
If discs are loaded in the disc display will turn off. Pivot the screen
changer of the upper part, select the back to the second or first detent to
6 DISC button. If a disc is loaded in turn the display back on. To close the
the lower player, select the DVD screen, pivot it up until it latches.
button.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 239

Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/

U.S. Entertainment Package and CD slot in the audio unit.
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS will pull it in the rest of the way.
PLAY － Press the DVD ( )
button if the DVD does not start
playing automatically.
PAUSE － Press the DVD ( )
button to pause the DVD. Press the
button again or press PLAY to
resume. Pause works only with the
DVD player.
EJECT BUTTON
PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON
240 2009 MDX

SEEK/SKIP － Press and hold the EJECT － Press the eject button to Using the Rear Control Panel
＋ button to move forward; you will remove the DVD from the drive. To turn on the rear entertainment
see the time elapsed shown in the system from the rear control panel,
To Return to Front Audio Controls
overhead screen advancing rapidly. press the PWR button. Use the AM/
To return front panel control to the
Press and hold the － button to move front audio system. Press the
FM button, XM RADIO button, 6
backward; you will see the time DISC button, DVD button, or AUX
FRONT SOURCE button. You will
elapsed shown in the overhead button to select the entertainment
hear a beep and the indicator in the
screen decreasing. Release the source. The selected source will be
button comes on. The indicator also
Features
button when the system reaches the shown in the display. Make sure the
comes on automatically, when you do
point you want. rear control operation has not been
not operate the rear entertainment
disabled with the REAR CTRL button
Each time you press the ＋ button system for 10 seconds.
on the front panel. When the audio
and release it, the system skips
system is off or the front side rear
forward to the beginning of the next
power is off, the rear control panel
track or chapter. Press and release
cannot be turned on.
the － button to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
and release it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track or
chapter.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 241

To Play the Radio from the Rear

Control Panel
Use the ▲ , ▼ , , or button to
highlight SEEK, TUNE, AUTO
SELECT, SCAN, or one of the preset REAR CONTROL PANEL
radio stations on the overhead
screen. You can enter the
highlighted function by pressing the
ENT button. These functions have
the same features as those of the
front audio system. You can also use
the or buttons to seek up/
down and or to tune up/down. To Play the XM Radio from the Use the ▲ , ▼ , , or button to
Rear Control Panel highlight CATE (to change
You can also use the or categories), CHAN (to change
buttons to change categories up/ channels), MODE (to change
down and or to change category or channel mode), SCAN,
channels up/down within a category or one of the preset channels on the
(in CATEGORY mode) or up/down overhead screen. You can enter the
for all channels (in CH mode). highlighted function by pressing the
ENT button. These functions have
the same features as those of the
front audio system.
242 2009 MDX

While the overhead screen is closed, To Play a Disc in the 6-Disc To change the disc currently playing,
you can see the XM radio Changer from the Rear Control use the ▲ , ▼ , , or button to
information in the subsidiary display Panel highlight your selected disc icon, and
in the ceiling. Pressing the DISP If discs are loaded in the disc press ENT.
MODE button repeatedly changes changer, select them by pressing the
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer
the subsidiary display from the 6 DISC button.
and the overhead screen is not open,
channel number, to the category
Use the ▲ , ▼ , , or button to pressing the ▲ or ▼ button changes
name, to the music title, to the artist
highlight REPEAT, RANDOM, the discs.
Features
name, and to the channel name, and
SCAN, , (skip), , or
then back to the channel number.
(cue) on the overhead screen. You
To change mode, press and hold the can enter the highlighted function by
DISP MODE button for 5 seconds. pressing the ENT button. These
functions have the same features as
those of the front audio system.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 243

To Play a DVD from the Rear REAR CONTROL PANEL

Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try to
view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The OPEN
screen will swing down part-way. BUTTON
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far OVERHEAD SCREEN
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen Press the button again quickly to To select the menu on the DVD,
back to the second or first detent to go to the previous chapter. press the MENU/SCROLL button.
turn the display back on. To close the Use the ▲ , ▼ , , and buttons to
To move rapidly within a chapter,
screen, pivot it up until it latches. move to the desired menu selection,
press and hold the or button.
then press the ENT button to enter
Press the button when you want The system will continue to move
your selection.
to pause the DVD. Press this button through the chapter. Press the
again to go back to PLAY. button to move forward, or the
button to move backward. Release
Press the button to skip to the the button when the system reaches
beginning of the next chapter. Press the point you want.
the button to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
244 2009 MDX

DISP Button MENU SCROLL Button Top Menu
Features
When you press the DISP button When you press the MENU SCROLL When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’, the
while a DVD is playing, the current button while a DVD is playing, the screen changes to the DVD's title
status of title, chapter, elapsed time, DVD Menu appears. The menu menu. This menu also appears when
angle, subtitle, audio, and sound options are TOP MENU, MENU, you press the MENU SCROLL
characteristics, with the personal PLAY MODE, SEARCH, and NUM button while a DVD is not playing.
surround logo are displayed. To INPUT. To go back to play, press the
return to the DVD video screen, RETURN button.
To go to your selected menu, use the
press the DISP button again.
or button to highlight the icon
If you do not press the DISP button, and press the ENT button. To return
the screen returns to the DVD video to the DVD video screen, select
screen after several seconds. EXIT.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 245

Menu Play Mode ‘‘Audio’’
When you select ‘‘MENU’’ with the When you select ‘‘PLAY MODE’’ To change the Audio setting,
or button, the screen changes to with the or button, you can highlight ‘‘Audio’’ from the play
the DVD's title menu. change the DVD's Audio, Subtitle or mode menu with the ▼ or ▲ button
Angle setting. and press the ENT button. A
submenu of the dubbed language
appears. You can select another
language by pressing the or
button. The sound characteristics
(Dolby Digital, LPCM, MPEG Audio,
dts) recorded with the selected
language is also displayed next to the
language.
246 2009 MDX

The selectable languages vary from ‘‘Subtitle’’ After selecting your desired subtitle,
DVD to DVD, and this feature may press the RETURN button or cursor
not be available on some DVDs. back with the ▼ or ▲ button to go
back to the top of the Play Mode
Press the RETURN button or cursor
menu. Press the RETURN button
back with the ▼ or ▲ button to go
again to exit completely.
menu. Press the RETURN button
again to exit completely.
Features
To change the DVD's subtitle,
highlight ‘‘Subtitle’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or ▲ button
and press the ENT button. You can
see the available subtitles with the
or button. Press the ENT button
when your desired subtitle is
highlighted.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 247

‘‘Angle’’ If there are no multiple angles Search

available on the DVD, you cannot
change from ‘‘Angle 1’’.
Press the RETURN button or cursor
back with the ▼ or ▲ button to go
menu.
Press the RETURN button again to
exit completely.
To change the view angle, highlight When you highlight ‘‘Search’’ with
‘‘Angle’’ from the play mode menu the or button, the ‘‘Jump to
with the ▼ or ▲ button and press chapter and title number input’’
the ENT button. You can see the message appears. To select
available angle options with the or ‘‘Chapter’’ or ‘‘Title’’ search, press the
button. Press the ENT button ENT button.
when your desired subtitle is
highlighted.
248 2009 MDX

‘‘Title/Chapter Search’’ NumInput
Features
Select the first digit number using
the ▼ , ▲ , , or button, and
With ‘‘Title’’ highlighted, use the A numerical command can be issued
enter it by pressing the ENT button.
or button to jump to your desired to a DVD by inputting a two digit
If you want to change the number,
title and press the ENT button. number, and a button number can be
select ‘‘DEL,’’ and press the ENT
When ‘‘Chapter’’ is highlighted, selected on the screen.
button, then select and enter the new
follow the same procedure for the
When you highlight, ‘‘NumInput’’ number.
chapter search.
with the or button, the ‘‘Jump to
keypad’’ message appears. Press the
ENT button to go to the NumInput
selection screen.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 249

Select and enter the second digit SETUP Button Disp Adjust
number the same way. The cursor To adjust the display, highlight ‘‘Disp
will automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’ Adjust’’ from the setup menu with
icon when you press the ENT button. the ▼ or ▲ button and press the
Press the ENT button to enter the ENT button. You can adjust these
number command. To go back to the display settings:
DVD screen, press the RETURN ●
Brightness
button or select EXIT and press the
ENT button. ●
Contrast
● Black Level
●
Tint
●
Color
When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is playing, the setup
menu appears. The menu options are
DISP ADUSTMENT, ASPECT
RATIO, and PERSONAL
SURROUND.
To change a setup, use the or
button to highlight your selection
and press the ENT button. To return
to the DVD video screen, select
EXIT.
250 2009 MDX

Features
Select the quality you want to adjust If you want to set the display to the The display changes as shown above.
by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENT
Adjust the setting by pressing the pressing the ▲ or ▼ button, and,
button. You will see the message
or button. When you are finished then pressing the ENT button.
‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
with your adjustment, cursor back to
the display for 5 seconds.
the top of the setup menu, or press
the RETURN button to exit.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 251

Aspect Ratio The selected setting will be

You can set the screen mode to these highlighted in blue for one second,
settings: and the screen returns to the play
mode in the selected setting.
●
Normal
●
Wide
●
Zoom
● Full
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing

the or button, then press the
ENT button.
The selectable setting menu is
displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue.
pressing the or button, then
press the ENT button.
252 2009 MDX

Personal Surround Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’ If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logo
by pressing the or button, and disappears, and there will be no
enter your selection by pressing the special sound effect.
ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.
Features
To change the Personal Surround
setting, highlight ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ from the setup menu
with the ▼ or ▲ button and press
the ENT button. The effect selection
appears.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 253

INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language) Menu Language
When you press the SETUP button When you select ‘‘Language’’ with To select the language used in the
on the rear control panel when a the or button, the menu shown DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL above appears. Language’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed. button.
To return to the stop or previous
There are two selectable menus: screen, select ‘‘Exit’’ using the or
‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’ button, and then press the ENT, or
the SETUP button.
254 2009 MDX

Features
Select the desired language by If you want another language than If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
pressing the or button, and then those listed, you need to enter the ENT button, the display returns to
pressing the ENT button. code number of the desired the initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’
language. Select ‘‘other,’’ and press menu.
The selectable languages are,
the ENT button. The display changes
English, French, Spanish, German,
as shown in the next column.
Italian, Dutch, Chinese, Korean,
Thai, Japanese or others.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 255

Audio Language
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display If you made a mistake entering a

changes to the language code input number digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the
You can select the dubbed language
mode. Select the first digit using the display with the ▼ , ▲ , , or
before playing DVDs.
▼ , ▲ , , or button, and press button, and press the ENT button on
Select ‘‘Audio Language’’ by pressing
the ENT button to enter it. Repeat the control panel. Then select and
the ▼ or ▲ button. You will see the
this until all four digits are filled. enter the correct digit as described.
submenu next to ‘‘Audio Language.’’
When the fourth digit is entered, the The display returns to the initial
cursor automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ ‘‘Language’’ menu screen. Follow the same instructions you
on the display. Press the ENT button used to set the menu language.
on the control panel to enter the new
language code.
256 2009 MDX

Subtitle Language INITIAL SETTINGS (Others) Dynamic Range

‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Features
You can select the subtitle language When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the top
before playing DVDs. of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’ screen,
Select ‘‘Subtitle Language’’ by the above menu appears on the
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button. You will screen.
see the submenu next to the
‘‘Subtitle Language.’’
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 257

Angle Mark
ANGLE MARK
When you select the ‘‘Dynamic Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
Range’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲ ▼ or ▲ button. The above submenu
When you switch to another angle
button, you will see the submenu appears. If you want the angle mark
while playing a DVD, the angle mark
next to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ as to be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the
is displayed in the upper right corner
shown above. or button.
of the screen.
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,
You can set the system to display or
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
not display this angle mark.
the or button.
258 2009 MDX

Parental Level
You can place an auditory restriction
by changing the parental control
level. The higher the level number,
the lower the restriction.
Features
Highlight ‘‘Parental Level’’ and press When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’ the
the ENT button. You will see the display changes as shown above. To
submenu. If you select ‘‘No’’ and change the level, you need to enter
press the ENT button, the screen your four digit password. Select the
goes back to the ‘‘Others’’ menu. number for the first digit by pressing
the ▼ , ▲ , , or button, and
enter it by pressing the ENT button.
Repeat this until all four digits are
filled. When you enter the fourth
number, the cursor automatically
moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the display.
Press the ENT button on the control
panel.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 259

Changing the Password
If the system does not recognize the If you enter the password correctly,
password you entered, you will see you can then change the parental
The password was set to ‘‘1111’’
the above display. Repeat the control level.
when the vehicle left the factory.
parental control level steps until you
Once you correctly enter the
enter the correct password.
password, press the or button to
change the level, and then press the
ENT button to enter your selection.
260 2009 MDX

Features
To change the password, select Select the first digit by pressing the If the system does not recognize the
‘‘Password.’’ You will see the above ▼ , ▲ , , or button, and enter it password you entered, you will see
menu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ by by pressing the ENT button. Repeat the above display. Repeat the
pressing the or button, then this until all four digits are entered. password setting steps until you
press the ENT button. When you enter the fourth number, enter the correct password.
the cursor automatically moves to
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
‘‘ENT’’ on the display. Press the ENT
ENT button, the display returns to
button on the control panel.
the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 261

Remote Control
RELEASE BUTTON
If you forget the password, select The display changes as shown above.
‘‘Password,’’ and press the ▲ button If you want to use the default
The rear control panel can be
10 times. password (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ and
detached from the ceiling unit and
press the ENT button.
used as a remote control. To remove
The message ‘‘Default password it from the ceiling unit, press the
setting applied’’ is displayed for 5 release button. The control panel will
seconds. swing down partway. Pivot it down
further past the detent until it
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.
262 2009 MDX

Replacing the Remote Control An improperly disposed of battery As required by the FCC:
Batteries can hurt the environment. This device complies with Part 15 of the
Always confirm local regulations for FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
COVER following two conditions: (1) This device
battery disposal.
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Features
Canada Standard RSS-210.
If it takes several pushes on the Operation is subject to the following two
button to operate the rear conditions: (1) this device may not cause
entertainment system, have your interference, and (2) this device must
dealer replace the batteries as soon accept any interference that may cause
as possible. undesired operation of the device.
Battery type: BR3032
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 263

Playable DVDs The DVD player can also play discs Protecting DVDs
recorded in MP3/WMA formats and The tips on how to handle and
DTS CDs. protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
Those packages or jackets should
‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page 229.
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be played
in this system.
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection
There are various types of DVDs technology must be authorized by
available. Some of them are not Macrovision, and is intended for
compatible with your system. home and other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise authorized by
The DVD player in your rear Macrovision.
entertainment system can play DVDs
and CDs bearing the above marks on Reverse engineering or disassembly
their packages or jackets. is prohibited.
264 2009 MDX

DVD Player Error Messages Error Message Cause Solution

The chart on the right explains the Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
error messages you may see in the Check for an error indication. Insert the disc again.
DISC ERROR FOCUS Error
If the code does not disappear or the disc cannot be
display while playing a disc. removed, consult your dealer.
Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
If you see an error message in the Check for an error indication. Insert the disc again.
MECH ERROR Mechanical Error
display while playing a disc, press If the code does not disappear or the disc cannot be
the eject button. After ejecting the removed, consult your dealer.
disc, check it for damage or HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
Features
normal.
deformation. If there is no damage, The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc,
insert the disc again. REGION ERR Invalid region code
and insert a disc compatible with this system.
PARENT ERR Invalid parental Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control
The audio system will try to play the control level level (see page 259).
disc.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 265

Wireless Headphones To use the headphones, pivot the

earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocket of either front seat.
VOLUME DIAL
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
Some state and local government
headphones that come with the
agencies prohibit the use of
system. When using the
headphones by the driver of a motor
headphones, make sure you wear
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
them correctly: L (left) and R (right)
and regulations.
are marked on the sides of the frame.
Wearing the headphones backwards
may affect audio reception, limiting
the sound quality and range.
266 2009 MDX

Replacing Batteries COVER Auxiliary Input Jacks
Features
BATTERY
TAB
Remove the battery. Install the new
battery in the earpiece as shown in
Each headphone uses one AAA Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
the diagram next to the battery slot.
battery. The battery is under the connectors for the rear
Slide the cover back into place on the
cover on the left earpiece. To remove entertainment system are on the
earpiece, then press down on the
the cover, insert a coin in the slot and back of the center console
back edge to lock it in place.
twist it slightly to pry the cover away compartment.
from the earpiece. Pull the cover
outward, and pivot it out of the way.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 267

VOLUME DIALS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
The system will accept auxiliary There are three headphone

inputs from standard video games connectors for the third seat
and video equipment. passengers. Each connector has its
Some video game power supplies own volume control.
may cause poor picture quality.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
268 2009 MDX

Security System
The security system helps to protect The security system will not set if the
your vehicle and valuables from hood, tailgate, or any door is not fully
theft. The horn sounds and a closed. If the system will not set,
combination of headlights, position check that the doors, the tailgate and
lights, side marker lights and the hood are fully closed.
taillights flashes if someone attempts
Do not attempt to alter this system or
to break into your vehicle or remove
add other devices to it.
the audio unit. This alarm continues
Features
for 2 minutes, then the system
resets. To reset an activated system
before the 2 minutes have elapsed, SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
unlock the driver's door with the key
or the remote transmitter. Once the security system is set,
The security system automatically opening any door, the tailgate, or the
sets 15 seconds after you lock the hood without using the key or the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the remote transmitter, will cause it to
system to activate, you must lock the alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
doors and the tailgate from the removed from the dashboard or the
outside with the key, driver's lock wiring is cut.
tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
2009 MDX 269

Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET/
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) DECEL button on the steering
CRUISE BUTTON
without keeping your foot on the wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
accelerator pedal. It should be used RES/ACCEL indicator on the instrument panel
BUTTON
for cruising on straight, open comes on to show the system is
highways. It is not recommended for now activated.
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise CANCEL BUTTON SET/DECEL

control can lead to a crash. BUTTON
1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
Use the cruise control only steering wheel. The CRUISE
when traveling on open MAIN indicator on the instrument
highways in good weather. panel comes on.
The cruise control system can be
left on, even when it is not in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
270 2009 MDX

Cruise Control
Cruise control may not hold the set Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising
speed when you are going up and You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
down hills. If your vehicle speed speed in any of these ways: ● Press and hold the SET/DECEL
increases going down a hill, use the ●
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed.
the cruise control. To resume the set
desired cruising speed, release the
speed, press the RES/ACCEL ●
To slow down in very small
button.
button. The CRUISE CONTROL amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
Features
indicator on the instrument panel will ●
Push on the accelerator pedal. button. Each time you do this,
come back on. Accelerate to the desired cruising your vehicle will slow down about
speed, then press the SET/ 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
When climbing a steep hill, the
DECEL button.
automatic transmission may ●
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
downshift to hold the set speed. ●
To increase the speed in very your foot. The CRUISE CONTROL
small amounts, tap the RES/ indicator on the instrument panel
ACCEL button. Each time you do will go out. When the vehicle
this, your vehicle will speed up slows to the desired speed, press
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). the SET/DECEL button.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 271

Cruise Control
Even with cruise control turned on, Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
you can still use the accelerator pedal When you push the CANCEL button
to speed up for passing. After CRUISE BUTTON or tap the brake pedal, the system
completing the pass, take your foot remembers the previously set speed.
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle To return to that speed, accelerate to
will return to the set cruising speed. above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
causes cruise control to cancel.
comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
the same speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
CANCEL BUTTON the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
●
Tap the brake pedal.
●
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
● Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
272 2009 MDX

Compass
Compass Operation
Canadian MDX model
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through Press and
hold SET
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past Press SET
large vehicles, or driving near large Press ▼
objects that can cause a magnetic
Features
COMPASS DISPLAY
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
Compass Calibration 1. Press and hold the SET button for 3. Press the ▼ button. ‘‘CAL ? Y’’ will
If you see ‘‘－－’’ in the compass five seconds until the clock display be displayed.
display and ‘‘CAL’’ and ‘‘ ’’ are changes to ‘‘ZON ? N.’’ (Clock
4. Press the SET button. The
shown in the calendar display, the adjustment mode will be started
compass display will change to
compass is self-calibrating. after the first two seconds.)
‘‘－－’’ and ‘‘CAL’’ and ‘‘ ’’ are
The compass may need to be 2. Press the SET button. ‘‘CAL ? N’’ shown.
manually calibrated after exposure to will be displayed. At this point,
a strong magnetic field. If the 5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two
pressing the SET button will exit
compass seems to be continually complete circles.
calibration mode.
showing the wrong direction and is
not self-calibrating, do the following.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 273

Compass
6. When the display goes from 4. Find the zone for your area on the
‘‘－－’’ to an actual heading, the map.
unit is calibrated and the display
5. If the zone is incorrect, press the
returns to normal.
▼ button to cycle the count down,
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open or the ▲ button to cycle the count
area, away from buildings, power up. Once the correct zone is
lines, and other vehicles. displayed, continue to step 6.
Compass Zone Selection 6. Press the SET button to set the
In most areas, there is a variation zone selection.
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so 7. Press and hold the SET button for
the compass can compensate for this about 5 seconds to exit the zone
1. Press and hold the SET button for selection and return display to
variation. To check and select the five seconds until the clock display normal.
zone, do this: changes to ‘‘ZON ? N.’’ (Clock
adjustment mode will be started
after the first two seconds.)
2. Press the ▼ button. ‘‘ZON ? Y’’ will
be displayed.
3. Press the SET button. The zone
the compass is currently in will be
displayed.
274 2009 MDX

Compass
Zone Map
Features
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 275

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

®
The HomeLink® Universal Units manufactured between April 1, Important Safety Precautions
Transceiver built into your vehicle 1982 and January 1, 1993 may be Refer to the safety information that came
can be programmed to operate up to equipped with safety stop and with your garage door opener to test that
three remote controlled devices reverse features. If your unit does not the safety features are functioning
properly. If you do not have this
around your home, such as garage have an external entrapment information, contact the manufacturer of
doors, lighting, or home security protection system, an easy test to the equipment.
systems. confirm the function and Before programming HomeLink to a
performance of the safety stop and garage door or gate opener, make sure
General Safety Information
reverse feature is to lay a 2 ╳ 4 that people and objects are out of the way
Before programming your HomeLink of the device to prevent potential injury
under the closing door. The door
to operate a garage door opener, or damage.
should stop and reverse upon
confirm that the opener has an When programming a garage door
contacting the piece of wood.
external entrapment protection opener, park just outside the garage.
As an additional safety feature,
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
garage door openers manufactured Training HomeLink
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
after January 1, 1993 are required to Before you begin － If you just
have external entrapment protection received your vehicle and have not
If your garage door was systems, such as an electronic eye, trained any of the buttons in
manufactured before April 1, 1982, which detect an object obstructing HomeLink before, you should erase
you may not be able to program the door. any previously learned codes before
HomeLink to operate it. These units training the first button.
do not have safety features that cause To do this, press and hold the two
the motor to stop and reverse it if an outside buttons on the HomeLink
obstacle is detected during closing, transceiver for about 20 seconds,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not until the red indicator flashes.
use HomeLink with any garage door Release the buttons, then proceed to
opener that lacks safety stop and step 1.
reverse features.
276 2009 MDX

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

Training a Button 3 Press and hold the programmed Retraining a Button
Homelink button for about a 1
1 Position the remote transmitter you second.
Press and hold the desired
wish to link 1-3 inches from the Does the device (garage door opener) work?
HomeLink button until the HomeLink
HomeLink button you want to program. indicator begins to flash slowly.
NO YES
Indicator remains Indicator flashes rapidly
4 Press and hold the Training
Features
on for about 25 for 2 seconds, then
HomeLink button complete seconds (standard remains on for about 23
2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink again. transmitter) seconds (rolling code
button and the button on the remote transmitter)
transmitter you wish to link. HomeLink indicator HomeLink

Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) blink at a
faster rate after about 10 seconds?
flashes for 2 seconds, LED is on.
then remains on.
2 When the indicator begins to flash
slowly, continue to hold the HomeLink
NO YES a The remote has a rolling code. button and follow steps 1-3 under
Press the "learn" button on the Training a Button.
remotely controlled device
(e.g., garage door opener). Erasing Codes
a Press and hold the button on the To erase codes stored in all buttons, press
remote and the HomeLink button at and hold the two outer buttons until the
the same time. Then, while b Within 30 seconds, press and hold HomeLink indicator begins to flash (about
continuing to hold the HomeLink the programmed HomeLink button 10 to 20 seconds), then release the buttons.
button, press and release the button for 2 seconds. You should erase all three codes before
on the remote every 2 seconds. selling the vehicle.
Does the LED blink at a faster rate within 20
seconds? 5 Press the programmed HomeLink If you have any problems programming
button again; the remotely HomeLink, see the owner's manual included with
controlled device should operate. the device you are trying to program, or call
NO YES HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or go online to
www.homelink.com.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 277

HomeLink Universal Transceiver, Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

®
HomeLink® is a registered trademark As required by the FCC: Your vehicle is equipped with
of Johnson Controls, Inc. This device complies with Part 15 of the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL).
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the HFL uses Bluetooth® technology to
following two conditions: (1) This device link your cell phone to your vehicle.
may not cause harmful interference, and With HFL, you can place and receive
interference received, including calls through your vehicle's audio
interference that may cause undesired system, without the distraction of
operation. handling your cell phone. To use this
feature, you need a Bluetooth-
Changes or modifications not expressly compatible cell phone with the
approved by the party responsible for Hands-Free Profile. For more
compliance could void the user's information, and a list of compatible
cell phones, visit www.acura.com/
This device complies with Industry handsfreelink, or call 1-888-528-7876.
Canada Standard RSS-210. In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call
Operation is subject to the following two 1-888-9-ACURA-9. The HFL is
conditions: (1) this device may not cause available in English on U.S. models,
interference, and (2) this device must and in both English and French on
undesired operation of the device. Canadian models. To change the
language, see page 304.
Here are the main features of the
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL
begin on page 289.
278 2009 MDX

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Voice Control To use the HFL, your phone must On models with navigation system
HFL recognizes simple voice have approved Bluetooth capability Your vehicle's HFL system has the
commands, such as phone numbers along with the Hands Free Profile. cellular phonebook import function.
and names. It uses these commands This type of phone is available This allows you to import your
to automatically dial, receive, and through many phone makers and cellular phonebook to the HFL.
store numbers. For more information cellular carriers. You can also find an Using the navigation system, you can
on voice control, see Using Voice approved phone by visiting make a call directly and store a
Control on page 282. www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or by desired number in the HFL from the
Features
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology calling the HandsFreeLink® list shown on the navigation display.
consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. For more information on how to
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark
In Canada, visit www.acura.ca, or call import the phonebook or to make a
of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
1-888-9-ACURA-9. call, see page 289.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to the HFL. Incoming/Outgoing Calls On all models
The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, With a linked phone, HFL allows you You can also store the desired
which means the maximum range to send and receive calls in your number to the HFL directly from
between your phone and vehicle is vehicle without holding the phone. your cell phone using the receive
30 feet (10 meters). contact function in the HFL.
Phonebook
The HFL can store up to 50 names
and phone numbers in its
phonebook. With a linked phone,
you can then automatically dial any
name or number in the phonebook.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 279

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink®
®
Microphone HFL Buttons HFL Back: This button is used to end

The HFL microphone is on the a call, go back to the previous voice
ceiling, between the front map lights HFL TALK BUTTON control command, and to cancel an
and the console buttons. On models operation.
with navigation system, the
microphone is shared with the
navigation system.
Audio System
When the HFL is in use, the sound
comes through the vehicle's front
audio system speakers. If the audio
HFL BACK
system is in use while operating BUTTON
either of the HFL buttons or making
a call, the HFL over-rides the audio To operate the HFL, use the HFL
system. To change the volume level, Talk and Back buttons on the left
use the audio system volume knob, side of the steering wheel.
or the steering wheel volume
controls. The HFL buttons are used as follows:
HFL Talk: This button is used before
you give a command, to answer
incoming calls, and to confirm
system information.
Press and release the button, then
wait for a beep before giving a
command.
280 2009 MDX

Multi-Information Display ●
Signal Strengthꭧ － Indicates the How to Use the HFL
network signal strength of the The HFL is operated by the HFL
SIGNAL HFL BATTERY current phone. Five bars equals Talk and Back buttons on the left
STRENGTH MODE LEVEL STATUS
full strength. side of the steering wheel. The next
few pages provide instructions for all
●
ROAM Statusꭧ － Indicates your
basic features of the HFL.
phone is roaming.
NOTE: All phones may not operate
●
Battery Level Statusꭧ － Indicates
identically, and some may cause
Features
the power currently remaining in
inconsistent operation of the HFL.
your phone's battery. Five bars
equals full battery strength.
ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING ●
HFL Mode － Indicates when you
are dialing and receiving calls.
When you are operating the HFL, or ●
Phone Dialing － Indicates the
when you manually select HFL on number you entered or the
the multi-information display, you number of the incoming call.
will see this information on the
screen: ꭧ: Some phones do not send this
information to the HFL.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 281

®
Using Voice Control ●

Give a voice command in a clear ●
To hear a list of available options at
Here are some guidelines for using natural speaking voice without any time, press the Talk button,
voice control: pausing between words or wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands
numbers. If the system cannot free link help.’’
●
To enter a command, press and
recognize your command because
release the Talk button. Then, ●
Many commands can be spoken
of the background noise, speak
after the beep, say your command together. For example, you can
louder.
in a clear, natural tone. say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
Close the windows and the
●
If the microphone picks up voices
● ●
To enter a string of numbers in a
moonroof. other than yours, the system may
Call or Dial command, you can say
not interpret your voice commands
them all at once, or you can
● When voice commands are used, correctly.
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
the fan speed will be automatically ●
If the HFL does not recognize a 10, and 11.
adjusted to low. However, for
better voice recognition, lowering command, its response is, ●
To skip a voice prompt, press the
the fan speed may be necessary. ‘‘Pardon.’’ If it doesn't recognize
Talk button while the HFL is
the command a second time, its
speaking. The HFL will then begin
●
Adjust the airflow from both the response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it
listening for your next command.
dashboard and side vents so they doesn't recognize the command a
do not blow against the third time, it plays the Help
microphone on the ceiling. prompt.
282 2009 MDX

●
To go back one step in a command ●
When you finish a command Setting Up the System
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press sequence, the HFL goes back to The voice of the HFL can be set to
the Back button. its main menu. For example, when male or female (U.S. models only).
If nothing is said while the HFL is you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the Also, the incoming notification can
listening for a command, the HFL HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no
will time out and stop its voice stored.’’ The next time you press notification.
recognition. The next time you the Talk button, you will be at the
To set up the system, do this:
press the Talk button, the HFL main menu.
Features
begins listening from the point at 1. Press and release the Talk button.
which it timed out. After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
● To end a command sequence at are setup and clear.’’
any time, press and hold the Back
button, or press and release the 2. Press and release the Talk button.
Talk button, wait for the beep, and After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time you HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
press the Talk button, the HFL male or female prompts?’’
begins from its main menu.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 283

®
3. Press and release the Talk button. 5. Press and release the Talk button. Setting Your Passcode
After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or The HFL will accept a numeric, four-
‘‘Female,’’ depending on the ‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘A digit passcode that you can use for
system voice you want. The HFL ring tone will be used’’ or ‘‘An security purposes.
response is, ‘‘Male (Female) incoming call prompt will be
To set your passcode, do this:
prompts have been selected. used.’’
Would you like an audible If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you will 1. Follow the system setup procedure
notification of an incoming call?’’ hear a ring tone through the audio as described previously.
speakers to announce an incoming
4. Press and release the Talk button. 2. Press and release the Talk button.
call. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you
If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
will hear this message to announce
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
an incoming call: ‘‘You have an 3. The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
the notification to be a ring tone or
incoming call.’’ four-digit number you would like
prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ after the to set as your passcode?’’
beep, the HFL returns to its main 6. The HFL response continues ‘‘A
menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no security option is available to lock 4. Press and release the Talk button.
ring tone or prompt playback the HFL system. Each time the After the beep, say the four-digit
during an incoming call. The audio vehicle is turned on, a passcode passcode you want to use. For
system will still mute, and a would be required to use this example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL
message will be displayed. system. Would you like this response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this
security option turned on?’’ If you correct?’’
say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set your
passcode. Refer to the setting
procedure in the next column.
284 2009 MDX

5. Press and release the Talk button. 1. The HFL will prompt you for your Pairing Your Phone
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The passcode each time the ignition Your Bluetooth® compatible phone
HFL response is ‘‘Security is on. switch is turned to the ON (II) with HandsFree Profile must be
Each time the vehicle is turned on, position and you press the Talk paired to the HFL before you can
the passcode will be required to button. You will only be asked for make and receive hands-free calls.
use the system. The system setup the passcode once per ignition To confirm that your phone is
is complete. Returning to the main cycle. If the passcode is set, its Bluetooth compatible, visit
menu.’’ response is ‘‘The system is locked. www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call
Features
What is the four-digit passcode?’’ 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit
6. Press and release the Talk button.
www.acura.ca, or call
If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, the 2. Press and release the Talk button.
1-888-9-ACURA-9. Your phone
HFL response is ‘‘Security will not After the beep, say your four-digit
retailer should also be able to
be used. The system setup is passcode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2,
confirm that your phone is Bluetooth
complete.’’ 3, 4.’’
compatible.
To enter your passcode, do this; 3. If the passcode is correct, the HFL
Once a passcode is set, you can lock response is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If the
the HFL so it only operates after the passcode is not correct, the HFL
passcode is entered. response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4 is incorrect.
Please try again.’’ Go back to the
step 2.
If you forget your passcode and you
cannot activate the HFL, consult your
dealer to cancel the passcode.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 285

®
NOTE: 1. With your phone on and the 4. Press and release the Talk button.
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
● HFL does not allow you to pair
ON (II) position, press and release HFL response is ‘‘Searching for a
your phone if the vehicle is
the Talk button. After the beep, Bluetooth phone.’’
moving.
say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL
NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a
●
For pairing, your phone must be in response is ‘‘Phone setup options
common way to get your phone into
its Discovery mode. are status, pair, edit, delete, and
its Discovery mode. If these steps do
Up to six phones can be paired to list.’’
●
not work on your phone, refer to the
the HFL. 2. Press and release the Talk button. phone's operating manual.
● The following procedure works for After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The 5. Follow the prompts on your phone
HFL response is ‘‘The pairing to get it into its Discovery mode.
most phones. If you cannot pair
process requires operation of your The phone will search for the HFL.
your phone to the HFL with this
procedure, refer to your phone's cell phone. For safety, only When it comes up, select
operating manual, visit perform this function while the HandsFreeLink from the list of
www.acura.com/handsfreelink, call
vehicle is stopped. State a four- options displayed on your phone.
the Hands Free Link® consumer digit code for pairing. Note this
code. It will be requested by the 6. When asked by the phone, enter
support at (888) 528-7876, or call
phone.’’ the four-digit code from step 3 into
your phone retailer. In Canada,
your phone. The HFL response is
visit www.acura.ca or call (888) 9- 3. Press and release the Talk button. ‘‘A new phone has been found.
ACURA-9. After the beep, say the four-digit What would you like to name this
●
During the pairing process, turn code you want to use. For phone?’’
off any previously paired phones example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL
before pairing a new phone. response is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this
correct?’’
286 2009 MDX

7. Press and release the Talk button. To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:
After the beep, say the name you 1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
want to use. For example, say After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
‘‘Eric's phone.’’ The HFL response
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone setup The HFL response is ‘‘Phone setup
is ‘‘Eric's phone has been options are status, pair, edit, options are status, pair, edit,
successfully paired. Returning to delete, and list.’’ delete, and list.’’
the main menu.’’
8. If you want to pair another phone,
Features
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
repeat steps 1 through 7. HFL response is ‘‘Which phone HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone
Once the pairing process is would you like to edit?’’ would you like to delete?’’
completed, AcuraLink may display a
connection confirmation screen. This After the beep, say the name of the After the beep, say the name of the
screen is used to create a data phone you want to rename. For phone you want to delete. For
connection between your cell phone example, say ‘‘Eric's phone.’’ The example say ‘‘Eric's phone.’’ The
and the AcuraLink system. You can HFL response is ‘‘What is the new HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
choose to set up the data connection name for Eric's phone?’’ to delete Eric's phone?’’
now, or do it later. If you want to do it
now, exit the HFL menu by pressing 4. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button.
the HFL Back button one or more After the beep, say the new name After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
times. of the phone. For example, say HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
‘‘Lisa's phone.’’ The HFL response delete Eric's phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to
is, ‘‘The name has been changed. continue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go
Returning to the main menu.’’ back,’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 287

®
5. Press and release the Talk button. To find out the status of the phone being To change from the currently linked
If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the used, do this: phone to another paired phone, do this:
HFL response is ‘‘The phone has 1. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
been deleted. Returning to the After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone The HFL response is ‘‘Searching
or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be setup options are status, pair, edit, for the next phone.’’ The HFL then
deleted. delete, and list.’’ disconnects the linked phone and
To list all paired phones, do this: searches for another paired phone.
If no other phones are found, the
1. Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An
first phone remains linked.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ example of the HFL response is,
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone setup ‘‘Eric's phone is linked. Battery
options are status, pair, edit, strength is three bars. Signal
delete, and list.’’ strength is five bars, and the
phone is roaming. Returning to the
2. Press and release the Talk button. main menu.’’
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the name
of each paired phone. When all
phones paired to the system have
been read, the HFL response is
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’
288 2009 MDX

Making a Call 2. Press and release the Talk button. To make a call using a name in the HFL
You can make calls using any phone After the beep, say the number phonebook, do this:
number, or by using a name in the you want to call. For example, say 1. With your phone on and the
HFL phonebook. You can also redial ‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
the last number called. During a call, is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or ON (II) position, press and release
the HFL allows you to talk up to 30 continue to add numbers.’’ the Talk button. After the beep,
minutes after you remove the key say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
On models with navigation system
from the ignition switch. Continuing response is, ‘‘What name or
You can also make a call directly
Features
a call without running the engine number would you like to call/
from the list shown on the
may discharge and weaken the dial?’’
navigation display.
vehicle's battery.
To make a call using a phone number,
do this: After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ After the beep, say the name you
The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or want to call. For example, say
1. With your phone on and the ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or will hear the person you called ‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
ON (II) position, press and release through the audio speakers. To 3. Press and release the Talk button.
the Talk button. After the beep, change the volume, use the audio After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL system volume knob, or the HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
response is, ‘‘What name or steering wheel volume controls. ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
number would you like to call/
4. To end the call, press the Back will hear the person you called
dial?’’
button. through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the
steering wheel volume controls.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 289

®
4. To end the call, press the Back Sending Numbers or Names 3. Press and release the Talk button.
button. During a Call After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
The HFL allows you to send dial tones will be sent, and the call
To redial the last number called by
numbers or names during a call. This will continue.
the phone, press and release the Talk
is useful when you call a menu-
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Redial.’’ To send a name during a call, do this:
driven phone system. You can also
The HFL response is, ‘‘Redialing.’’
program account numbers into the 1. Press and release the Talk button.
Once connected, you will hear the
HFL phonebook for easy retrieval After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
person you called through the audio
during menu-driven calls. HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
speakers. To change the volume, use
number would you like to send?’’
the audio system volume knob, or To send a number during a call, do this:
the steering wheel volume controls. 2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
want to send. For example, say
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL
number would you like to send?’’
response is ‘‘Would you like to
2. Press and release the Talk button. send account number?’’
After the beep, say the number
you want to send. For example, say
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘1,
dial tones will be sent, and the call
2, 3. Say send, or continue to add
will continue.
numbers.’’
NOTE: To send a pound (＃), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say
‘‘star.’’
290 2009 MDX

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call Muting a Call

If you receive a call when you are not During a call, you can transfer it from During a call, you can mute or
on the phone, the HFL interrupts the the HFL to your phone, or from your unmute your voice to the person you
audio system (if it is on), and plays phone to the HFL. are talking to.
the incoming call notification, if
To transfer a call from the HFL to your To mute your voice, do this:
activated. To answer the call, press phone, do this:
the Talk button and begin speaking. Press and release the Talk button. 1. Press and release the Talk button.
If you don't want to answer the call, After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
Features
press the Back button. audio switches from the HFL to the HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’
If your phone has Call Waiting, and phone. To unmute your voice, do this:
you receive a call when you are on To transfer a call from your phone to the 2. Press and release the Talk button.
the phone, press and release the Talk HFL, do this: After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
button to answer it. When you do HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is
this, the original call is placed on Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The canceled.’’
hold. To return to the original call,
press the Talk button again. If you audio switches from your phone to
don't want to answer the new call, the HFL.
disregard it, and continue with your
original call. If you want to hang up
the original call and answer the new
call, press the Back button.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 291

®
Setting up the Phonebook 3. Press and release the Talk button. To edit the number of a name, do this:
The HFL phonebook can store up to After the beep, say the name you
50 names with their associated would like to store. For example,
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
numbers. These can be any types of say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
numbers. For example, you can store number.’’ The HFL response is
options are store, edit, delete,
a phone number and use it to make a ‘‘What is the number for Eric,’’ or
receive contact, and list.’’
call, or you can store an account ‘‘What is the number for account
number and use it during a call to a number?’’ 2. Press and release the Talk button.
menu-driven phone system. After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
To add a name, do this: After the beep, say the number.
would you like to edit?’’
For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘123 456 3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
7891.’’ Say ‘‘Enter.’’ or continue to After the beep, say the name you
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
add numbers. would like to edit. For example,
options are store, edit, delete,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
receive contact, and list.’’ 5. Press and release the Talk button.
‘‘What is the new number for
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
2. Press and release the Talk button. Eric?’’
HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account
After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
number) has been stored. 4. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
Returning to the main menu.’’ After the beep, say the new
would you like to store?’’
number for Eric. For example, say
‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ Say ‘‘Enter.’’ or
continue to add numbers.
292 2009 MDX

5. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button. To call a name from the phonebook list,
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The do this:
HFL response is ‘‘The number has HFL response is, ‘‘The name has 1. Press and release the Talk button.
been changed. Returning to the been deleted. Returning to the After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
main menu.’’ main menu.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do options are store, edit, delete,
this: receive contact, and list.’’
Features
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ 1. Press and release the Talk button. 2. Press and release the Talk button.
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
options are store, edit, delete, The HFL response is, ‘‘The HFL responds by listing the names
receive contact, and list.’’ Phonebook options are store, edit, in the phonebook. When it says
delete, receive contact, and list.’’ the name you want to call, for
2. Press and release the Talk button. example, Eric, press the Talk
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The 2. Press and release the Talk button.
button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
would you like to delete?’’ HFL responds by listing the names
to call Eric?’’
in the phonebook. When the end
3. Press and release the Talk button. of the list is reached, the HFL 3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you response is, ‘‘The entire list has After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
would like to delete. For example, been read. Returning to the main HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is menu.’’ connected, you will hear the
‘‘Would you like to delete Eric?’’ person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob, or the steering
wheel volume controls.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 293

®
Storing a Phone Number Directly 2. Press and release the Talk button. 5. Press and release the Talk button.
from Your Phone After the beep, say ‘‘Receive After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
You can store the desired number to contact.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘No.’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ the HFL
the HFL phonebook directly from ‘‘The receive process requires response is, ‘‘Neil at work has
your cellular phone. operation of your cell phone. For been stored. Would you like HFL
safety, only perform this function to receive another contact?’’ Go to
NOTE: Your phone may not have
while the vehicle is stopped. HFL step 6.
this capability. Visit www.acura.com/
is now waiting to receive a contact
handsfreelink or call the Hands Free If you say ‘‘No,’’ the HFL response
from a Bluetooth device.’’
Link® consumer support at is ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
(888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit 3. Select a desired number from the
www.acura.ca or call list on your phone, and transmit/
(888) 9-ACURA-9. You can see your send (individual steps will vary for
phone's owner's manual for each type of phone, refer to your
information. phone's owner's manual) via
Bluetooth. The HFL response is
To store a phone number from your
phone: ‘‘One phone number has been
received for this contact. What
1. With your phone on and the name would you like to store for
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY the mobile number? To discard
(I) or ON (II) position, press and this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL 4. Press and release the Talk button.
response is, ‘‘Phonebook options After the beep, say the name you
are store, edit, delete, receive would like to store. For example,
contact and list.’’ say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘Neil at work will be
stored. Is this correct?’’
294 2009 MDX

6. If you want to continue to store any 8. Press and release the Talk button. Cellular Phonebook Options
other numbers, press and release After the beep, say the name you On models with navigation system
the Talk button. After the beep, would like to store. For example, The cellular phonebook option allows
say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL response is, say ‘‘Susan at work.’’ The HFL you to store up to 1,000 names and
‘‘HFL is now waiting to receive a response is, ‘‘Susan at work will be 10,000 phone numbers in the
contact from a Bluetooth device.’’ stored. Is this correct?’’ phonebook of Bluetooth®
HandsFreeLink® from your cellular
7. Select a desired number from the 9. Press and release the Talk button.
phonebook. The maximum names
list on your phone, and transmit/ After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
Features
and numbers to be stored varies on
send (individual steps will vary for ‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susan
the data size. With the HFL, you can
each type of phone, refer to your at work has been stored. Would
then automatically dial any name or
phone's owner's manual) via you like HFL to receive another
number in the phonebook.
Bluetooth. The HFL response is contact?’’
‘‘One phone number has been NOTE: Your phone may not have
10. If you do not want to continue to
received for this contact. What this capability. Visit www.acura.com/
store any other numbers, press
name would you like to store for handsfreelink or call the Hands Free
and release the Talk button. After
the cell phone number? To discard Link® consumer support at
the beep, say ‘‘No.’’ The HFL
this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’ (888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit
response is ‘‘Returning to the main
www.acura.ca or call
menu.’’
(888) 9-ACURA-9. You can see your
phone's owner's manual for
information.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 295

®
PIN Number: This option allows you Search Imported Phonebook: This
to add, change, or remove a PIN option allows you to search the
number for any phonebook that has phone numbers stored in the HFL.
been imported. When you enter keyword for a
person's name, such as the first
Import Cellular Phonebook: This
name or last name, the system will
option allows you to store the
find the number you want and let you
phonebook of your cellular phone in
make calls.
the HFL. When you link your phone
to the HFL and select this option, the Delete Imported Phonebook: This
system will start importing and option allows you to delete the stored
loading the phonebook. phonebook from the HFL. When you
link your phone to the HFL and
To use the cellular phonebook with select this option, the system will
the HFL, say or select ‘‘Cellular automatically delete the phonebook
Phonebook’’ from the Information of the linked phone from the HFL
screen. The navigation display will (see page 295).
change as shown above.
If any phonebook is not stored and
your phone is not linked to the HFL,
Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.
296 2009 MDX

To import the cellular phonebook NOTE: To search the imported phonebook

You can import the phonebook of ● HFL does not allow you to pair
your cellular phone in the HFL. Link your phone if the vehicle is
your phone to the HFL and select
moving.
‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’ from
the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. When ●
Up to six phones can be paired to
the message ‘‘The import was the HFL.
successful.’’ is displayed, push in on For information on linking to the
Features
the Interface Dial to select ‘‘OK.’’ HFL, see page 285.
You can search the stored number

by entering keywords to make calls
by using the HFL.
Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
The display will change as shown
above.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 297

®
Select a phonebook from the Select the number (1－6) of the

displayed list. If the phonebook you desired person from the list.
select has a PIN icon, you will need
Up to three category icons are
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
displayed in the right side of the list.
phonebook. The following screen
These category icons indicate how
will appear.
many numbers are stored for the
person. If a name has more than
three category icons, ‘‘...’’ is
displayed.
The following category icons will
appear:
Enter the keyword for a person's
name, such as the first name or last
name, using the Interface Dial. If the Preference
system does not find an exact match,
say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finish
entering the keyword.
Home
Enter the PIN number to access the The system will display a list of
phonebook. You cannot access a PIN person's names, with the closest
protected phonebook if you do not match to the name you entered at the
use the correct PIN number. top of the list. Cell phone
298 2009 MDX

To store in the Bluetooth®

HandsFreeLink®
Work
Pager
Features
Fax
After selecting a person, the system
will display a list of the person's
phone numbers. Say or select ‘‘STORE IN
Car
Select the desired number from the HandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select a
list to make a call. number to call’’ screen. The screen
shown above will appear.
Voice Select the desired number from the
list to store it in the HFL.
Other
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 299

®
To delete the imported phonebook
Enter the PIN number to access the Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message
phonebook. You cannot access a PIN ‘‘The imported phonebook has been
You can delete the stored phonebook
protected phonebook if you do not deleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
from the HFL.
use the correct PIN number. complete the deletion.
Link your phone to the HFL and
select ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’ After you enter the correct PIN
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. number, or if the phonebook you
The display will change as shown select is not PIN protected, the
above. following screen appears.
Select a phonebook from the
displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
300 2009 MDX

To add, change, or remove a PIN To add a PIN number

number from any phonebook
Features
2. Enter the 4-digit PIN number. You
will be asked to re-enter the PIN to
1. Select the phonebook you wish to
You can add, change or remove a verify.
add the PIN number to. The
PIN number from any phonebook. phonebook you select cannot
Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the already have a PIN icon. The
‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. The display will change as shown
display will change as shown above. above.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 301

®
To change a PIN number
2. Enter your current PIN number. 3. Enter your new 4-digit PIN
number. You will be asked to re-
1. Select the phonebook that you
enter the PIN to verify.
wish to change the PIN number
for. The display will change as
shown above.
302 2009 MDX

Clearing the System 3. Press and release the Talk button. 4. Press and release the Talk button.
This operation clears the HFL of After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The After the beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to
your passcode, your paired phones, HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to proceed, or say ‘‘Go back’’ or
all names in the HFL phonebook, clear all paired phones, all ‘‘Cancel.’’
and all imported phonebooks. phonebook entries, the passcode,
5. If you said ‘‘OK,’’ the HFL
Clearing is recommended before you and restore the defaults in the
response is, ‘‘Please wait while the
sell your vehicle. system setup. Say OK to proceed,
system is cleared.’’ This may take
otherwise say go back or cancel.’’
To clear the system, do this: up to 2 minutes to complete, then
Features
the HFL response is, ‘‘The system
has been cleared. Returning to the
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
main menu.’’
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘This process
will clear all paired phones, clear
all entries in the phonebook, clear
the passcode, and restore the
defaults in the system setup. Is
this what you would like to do?’’
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 303

®
Changing Language 3. Press and release the Talk button. 4. The HFL response is, for example,
Canadian models only After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’ ‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour
To change from English to French, do If there are no paired phones ＜Paul's phone＞?’’ Press and
this: without French name tags, the release the Talk button. After the
1. Press and release the Talk button. HFL response is ‘‘Venillez attendre beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’
After the beep, say ‘‘Change que le systeme change de langue. The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le
language.’’ The HFL response is Please wait while the language is nom Français pour
‘‘English or French?’’ changed.’’ ‘‘La langue a ete ＜Pat's phone＞?’’ Press and
changee. Retour au menu release the Talk button. Say
2. Press and release the Talk button. principal.’’ ‘‘Téléphone de Pat.’’ After all
After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ The paired phones missing a French
HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez NOTE: If there are paired phones
name tag are re-recorded, the HFL
selectionne Français. Les noms without French name tags, the
will prompt, ‘‘Retour au menu
enregistres en mode Anglais ne following prompts will continue.
principal.’’
seront pas accessible en mode If there are paired phones without
Français. Voulez-vous continuer? French name tags, the HFL response
You have selected French. Name is ‘‘Pour que le système identifie les
tags that were stored while in téléphones qui ont été jumelés dans
English mode will not be une autre langue, les noms des
accessible in French mode. Would téléphones doivent être ré-
you like to continue? ’’ enregistrés.’’
304 2009 MDX

To change from French to English, do 3. Press and release the Talk button. 4. The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What
this: After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’ is the English name for
1. Press and release the Talk button. If there are no paired phones ＜Téléphone de Paul＞?’’ Press
After the beep, say ‘‘Changer without English name tags, the and release the Talk button. After
Langue.’’ The HFL response is, HFL response is ‘‘Please wait while the beep, say ‘‘Paul's phone. ’’ The
‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’ the language is changed. Venillez HFL response is ‘‘What is the
attendre que le systeme change de English name for ＜Téléphone de
2. Press and release the Talk button. langue.’’ ‘‘The language has been Pat＞?’’ Press and release the Talk
Features
After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’ The changed. Returning to the main button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat's
HFL response is, ‘‘You have menu.’’ phone.’’ After all paired phones
selected English. Name tags that missing an English name tag are
were stored while in French mode NOTE: If there are paired phones
re-recorded, the HFL will say
without English name tags, the
will not be accessible in English ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
mode. Would you like to continue? following prompts will continue.
Vous avez selectionne Anglais. Les HFL Limitations
If there are paired phones without
noms enregistres en mode In addition, you cannot use the HFL
English name tags, the HFL
while using AcuraLink.
Français ne seront pas accessible response is ‘‘The language has been
en mode Anglais. Voulez-vous changed. For the system to identify
contnuez?’’ phones that were paired while in
another language, the phone names
need to be re-recorded.’’
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 305

®
As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
306 2009 MDX

AcuraLink® (U.S. models only)
U.S. Technology and Sport Packages Interface Dial The selector can be pushed left,
AcuraLink enhances your ownership Most AcuraLink functions are right, up, down, and in. Use the
experience by providing a direct controlled by the interface dial. The selector to scroll through lists, to
communication link between your interface dial has two parts, a knob select menus, and to highlight menu
vehicle and the Acura Server. and a selector. items. When you make a selection,
Working through the XM radio push the center of the selector
satellite, AcuraLink works in KNOB ENTER (ENTER) to go to that selection.
conjunction with the navigation
Features
system, Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
(HFL), and audio system in your
vehicle. It displays and receives
several kinds of messages, including:
●
Operating tips and information on
your vehicle's features.
●
Important recall and safety
information. SELECTOR
● Maintenance information to keep The knob turns left and right. Use it
your vehicle in top condition. to make selections or adjustments to
●
Diagnostic information to provide a list or menu on the screen.
information about any problems
with your vehicle.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 307

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

®
Reading Messages To view previously read messages:

If you have new messages, an
envelope icon appears in the top
right corner of the navigation screen.
A list of all messages will be shown.

New Messages will be at the top.
Press the INFO button. The
Select the message you want to read
information screen will be shown.
by pressing ENTER.
To open a message:
Press ENTER on the interface
selector, then select New Message
from the navigation system map
menu.
308 2009 MDX

Unread messages have a closed Message Options

envelope icon next to them. The icon
disappears when it has already been
read.
NOTE: Only Diagnostic Info
messages overlay the navigation
screen while driving. They indicate if
your vehicle has a problem that may
Features
need immediate attention (see page
314).
After purchasing your vehicle,
Select ‘‘Messages’’, then select a messages may not appear
message category by pressing immediately.
Your dealer has to register the When you open a message, you can
ENTER. Select the message you
vehicle identification before you can read a summary of it, and then
want to read and press ENTER.
receive messages. This can take choose one of several options. If an
several days to process. option is not available for a message,
that button will not be highlighted.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 309


®
Delete － Select this button to delete Find Nearest Acura Dealer － Diagnostic Info － Select this
the current message. Select this button to find the nearest button to get more information about
Acura dealer using the navigation the current diagnostic message. To
Voice － Select this button to hear a
system. use this option, your cellphone must
voice read the entire message. This
be paired with the HFL. In addition,
gives you more information than the Call Your Acura Dealer － Select
the paired phone must have a
screen can display at one time. When this button to call the Acura dealer
compatible data service and be set up
you select the Voice button, it you purchased your vehicle from.
with the AcuraLink system to make a
changes to a Stop Reading button. AcuraLink also directs you to this
data connection. Access the
Select the button again to stop the dealer so you can schedule a
handsfreelink.com website to find
voice. maintenance appointment or receive
out which data services are currently
information about a message. If your
Call － Select this button to call a compatible with AcuraLink.
assigned servicing dealer changes,
phone number embedded in the
AcuraLink will reset to call that Message Preferences
message. When you select Call, the
dealer. To set your AcuraLink preferences
Bluetooth®HandsFreeLink®(HFL)
(the types of messages you want to
dials the number for you. receive, if any), visit the My Acura
To make a call, your website at www.owners.acura.com, and
Bluetooth®compatible phone must be choose what you would like to
paired to the vehicle's receive. If you do not have internet
HandsFreeLink system, powered on, access, call Acura Client Services at
and located within the vehicle (see (800) 382-2238; they can set your
page 278). message preferences for you.
310 2009 MDX

Deleting Messages To delete all messages: ●

Use the interface knob to scroll to
NOTE: Diagnostic info and recall/ the AcuraLink/Messages button,
NOTE: The Delete All Messages
campaign messages can only be and select it by pressing ENTER
command does not apply to
deleted by your dealer. on the interface selector.
Diagnostic Info and Recall messages.
To delete a single message:
They can only be deleted by your ●
Scroll to the Delete Messages
●
Press the INFO button to bring up dealer. option, and select it by pressing
the Information screen. ENTER on the interface selector.
●
Press the SETUP button to view
Features
●
Scroll to the Messages option, the setup screen. ●
Scroll to the category with the
then select it by pressing ENTER messages you want to delete, and
● Select MORE by pushing the
on the interface selector. select the category by pressing
interface selector to the right.
●
Select the message category that
contains the message you want to
delete.
●
Use the interface knob to scroll up
or down to the message title you
want to delete, and select it by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector.
●
Scroll to Delete with the interface
knob, and select it by pressing
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 311


®
Message Categories Quick Tips Feature Guide

There are six message categories in
AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature
Guides, Maintenance Minders,
Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,
and Dealer Appointment Reminders.
The system can store up to 256
messages.
Message categories can be added,
revised, or deleted through
broadcast messages from Acura.
These messages, based on updated During the first 90 days of

vehicle information and comments ownership, one of up to 32 different
from other MDX owners, supplement messages appears each day. These
your Owner's Manual and Quick messages help you to use and
Start Guide. They provide you with understand the features of your
relevant information for a safe and vehicle.
enjoyable ownership experience. For
additional information, call Acura
Client Services directly through the
HFL.
312 2009 MDX

Maintenance Minder You can then use the message Recall/Campaigns

options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the nearest
dealer.
Features
These messages provide detailed If your vehicle is affected by a recall
information about the service needed or other important safety
for your vehicle. When a information, a letter will be mailed to
maintenance message appears on the you about the issue and how to fix it.
multi-information display, a list of If you don't get your vehicle fixed,
needed maintenance items is you will also receive a reminder
provided through an AcuraLink message through AcuraLink. You
message. These messages tell you can then use the message options to
the exact maintenance needed, call your dealer for an appointment
helping you to avoid unnecessary or to find the nearest dealer.
maintenance costs.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 313


®
Diagnostic Info Depending on the severity of the

When an indicator comes on or a problem, the message will let you
message is displayed on the Multi- know if you should see your dealer
Information Display (MID), immediately or if you can wait until a
AcuraLink can provide information later date.
about the cause of the indicator or
message and the recommended
action to address it. This helps you
handle the problem as it occurs,
preventing or limiting costly repairs.
The AcuraLink system cannot
determine some mechanical
problems (such as squeaks or When an indicator comes on or a
rattles) that are not triggered by the message is displayed on the MID,
diagnostic indicator monitors. AcuraLink immediately notifies you
with the message, ‘‘An indicator is
For more information on the on. AcuraLink can help you decide
instrument panel indicators, see page what to do.’’ If you do not want the
64. information right away, select the
Check Later option. If you want the
information now, select the Check
Now option. (If the navigation screen
is not active, you must select OK
from the navigation disclaimer
screen before you can check the
information.)
314 2009 MDX

When viewing a diagnostic info Dealer Appointment Reminder

message through the INFO menu,
you can use the Diagnostic Info
button to connect to the Acura server
and retrieve the latest information
regarding the problem.
NOTE: There may not be any
additional information, depending on
Features
the time elapsed since the previous
time you retrieved the information
from the Acura server.
You can then use the message
options to call your dealer for an
When you make an appointment
appointment or to find the nearest
through the My Acura Online
dealer.
Scheduling Service, you can be
reminded in advance about that
appointment through AcuraLink. If
you need to reschedule, you can call
your dealer directly with the HFL.
The timing of your reminder is based
on your reminder preference
established on Owner Link.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 315


®
AcuraLink/Message Screen To access the following functions, New Message Notification －

press the SETUP button, push the Select ON if you want to be notified
interface selector to the right to of new messages (envelope icon
select MORE, then rotate the appears on the navigation screen).
interface knob to select AcuraLink/ Select OFF if you do not want to be
Messages. notified of new messages (envelope
icon does not appear on the screen).
Delete Messages － Select this
Messages can still be accessed using
button to delete all stored messages
the INFO menu. If you would like to
within a category, except for
stop receiving messages, visit the My
diagnostic info and recall campaign
Acura website at www.owners.acura.
messages. These messages can only
com to change your messaging
be deleted by a certified technician
preferences.
after the recall is done or the
problem is corrected, or through a Auto Reading － Select ON to have
broadcast message from Acura. the system automatically read each
message to you. Select OFF to
manually select the Voice button
when you want a message read to
you.
316 2009 MDX

Phone-Data Connection － Select To find more information on

this button to begin the process Bluetooth® compatible and enabled
required to connect to Acura. This is cell phones, visit
used to access the most recent www.acura.com/handsfreelink or call
diagnostic information when a the Hands Free Link® consumer
problem occurs. support at (888) 528-7876. In Canada,
visit www.acura.ca, or call
(888) 9-ACURA-9.
Features
NOTE: For the Phone Data
Connection button to be active, you
need a Bluetooth® compatible and
enabled cell phone paired to the
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL).
To complete the data connection
setup, the paired phone must have a
compatible data service.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 317


®
Connect to the Acura Server － As required by the FCC:

The default setting is prompt. When This device complies with Part 15 of the
a diagnostic info message appears, FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
and you select the Check Now following two conditions: (1) This device
button, the system will prompt you may not cause harmful interference, and
before connecting to the Acura interference received, including
server. If you do not wish to connect interference that may cause undesired
at that time, select No at the prompt, operation.
and you will see the information from
the onboard database. The ‘‘Auto’’ Changes or modifications not expressly
setting will remove the prompt when approved by the party responsible for
you select the Check Now button compliance could void the user's
and will automatically connect to the
Acura server. This setting only This device complies with Industry
applies when you have a Bluetooth® Canada Standard RSS-210.
enabled phone that is paired with the Operation is subject to the following two
HFL and you have completed the conditions: (1) this device may not cause
Phone-Data Connection setup. interference, and (2) this device must
318 2009 MDX

Rearview Camera and Monitor
On models with navigation system Since the rearview camera display

area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
Features
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rearview is shown
on the navigation system screen.
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean
it, use a moist, soft cloth.
2009 MDX 319

320 2009 MDX

Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period ........................... 322

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation ................ 322
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures ......... 323
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling................................. 323
need to know how to properly store Tighten Fuel Cap Message ..... 324
luggage or packages. The Opening and Closing the
information in this section will help Hood ................................... 325
you. If you plan to add any Oil Check ................................ 326
accessories to your vehicle, please Engine Coolant Check ............ 326
Bef ore Driving

read the information in this section Fuel Economy ............................. 327
first. Accessories and
Modifications .......................... 330
Carrying Cargo ........................... 332
2009 MDX 321

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Use of gasoline with these additives

Help assure your vehicle's future Your vehicle is designed to operate may adversely affect performance,
reliability and performance by paying on premium unleaded gasoline with and cause the malfunction indicator
extra attention to how you drive a pump octane of 91 or higher. If this lamp on your instrument panel to
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). octane grade is unavailable, regular come on. If this happens, contact
During this period: unleaded gasoline with a pump your dealer for service.
octane of 87 or higher may be used
●
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid Some gasoline today is blended with
temporarily. The use of regular
acceleration. oxygenates such as ethanol or
unleaded gasoline can cause metallic
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
● Avoid hard braking for the first 200 knocking noises in the engine and
operate on oxygenated gasoline
miles (300 km). will result in decreased engine
containing up to 10% ethanol by
performance. The long-term use of
●
Do not change the oil until the volume and up to 15% MTBE by
multi-information display indicates regular-grade gasoline can lead to
volume. Do not use gasoline
it is needed. engine damage.
containing methanol.
Do not tow a trailer. We recommend quality gasolines
●
If you notice any undesirable
containing detergent additives that
operating symptoms, try another
You should also follow these help prevent fuel system and engine
service station or switch to another
recommendations with an deposits.
brand of gasoline.
overhauled or exchanged engine, or In addition, in order to maintain good
when the brakes are replaced. performance, fuel economy, and For further important fuel-related
emissions control, we strongly information, please refer to your
recommend, in areas where it is Quick Start Guide.
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
322 2009 MDX

Service Station Procedures
Refueling If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even

FUEL FILL CAP though the tank is not full, there may
TETHER
be a problem with your vehicle's fuel
vapor recovery system. The system
helps keep fuel vapor from going into
the atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
Push problem, consult your dealer.
Bef ore Driving

HOLDER
Gasoline is highly flammable
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. and explosive. You can be
You may hear a hissing sound as burned or seriously injured
1. Park with the driver's side closest
pressure inside the tank escapes. when handling fuel.
to the service station pump.
Place the cap in the holder on the
2. Open the fuel fill door by pressing fuel fill door.
●
Stop the engine, and keep
the button in the driver's door. (To heat, sparks, and flame
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel away.
open the fuel fill door manually,
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
see page 446.) Handle fuel only outdoors.
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
●
some room for the fuel to expand ● Wipe up spills immediately.

with temperature changes.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 323

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on until Tighten Fuel Cap Message If the system still detects a leak in
it clicks at least once. If you do not the vehicle's evaporative emissions
properly tighten the cap, you will system, the malfunction indicator
see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
message on the multi-information cap was not already tightened, turn
display (see right column on this the engine off, and check or
page), and the malfunction retighten the fuel fill cap until it
indicator lamp may also come on clicks at least once. The MIL should
(see page 437). go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
it latches.
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
Your vehicle's on board diagnostic system page 437.
will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap as
an evaporative system leak. The first time a
leak is detected a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message appears on the multi-information
display. Turn the engine off, and confirm
the fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen it,
then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
The message should go off after several
days of normal driving once you tighten or
replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
message, press the INFO button. The
‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message will
appear each time you restart the engine
until the system turns the message off.
324 2009 MDX

Opening and Closing the Hood 3. Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE up the rest of the way and hold it
up.
To close the hood, lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then press down firmly with
your hands. Make sure it is securely
latched.
Bef ore Driving

LATCH
2. Put your fingers under the front

edge of the hood near the center.
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
Slide your hand to your left until
parking brake. Pull the hood
you feel the hood latch handle.
release handle located under the
Push this handle up until it
lower left corner of the dashboard.
releases the hood. Lift up the
The hood will pop up slightly.
hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
2009 MDX 325

Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

DIPSTICK
RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MIN
MAX
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
Wait a few minutes after turning the Look at the coolant level in the
between the upper and lower
engine off before you check the oil. radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
marks.
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). If it is near or below the lower mark, it is below the MIN line, see Adding
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean see Adding Engine Oil on page 393. Engine Coolant on page 396 for
cloth or paper towel. information on adding the proper
coolant.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole. Refer to Owner's Maintenance
Checks on page 389 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
326 2009 MDX

Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison. City MPG Highway MPG
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
Combined Fuel
all environments. Economy
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
Bef ore Driving

The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right are (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
a useful tool for comparison when
buying a vehicle. EPA estimates Combined Fuel Economy － Estimated Annual Fuel Cost －
include: Represents a combination of city and Provides an estimated annual fuel
City MPG － Represents urban highway driving. The scale cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A represents the range of combined km) per year multiplied by the cost
range of miles per gallon achieved is fuel economy for other vehicles in per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
also provided. the class. data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
Highway MPG － Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate For more information on fuel
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, economy ratings and factors that
typical of longer trips in free-flowing affect fuel economy, visit www.
traffic. A range of miles per gallon fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit
achieved is also provided. www.vehicles.gc.ca)
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 327

Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors ● Use the recommended viscosity ●

Observe the speed limit －
The following factors can lower your motor oil, displaying the API Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
vehicle's fuel economy: Certification Seal (see page 393). on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
Maintain proper tire inflation － mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
●
Aggressive driving (hard ●
An under-inflated tire increases speed and you reduce the drag.

acceleration and braking)
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces Trailers, car top carriers, roof
●
Excessive idling, accelerating and fuel economy. racks and bike racks are also big
braking in stop-and-go traffic contributors to increased drag.
●
Avoid carrying excess weight in
● Cold engine operation (engines your vehicle － It puts a heavier ●
Avoid excessive idling － Idling
are more efficient when warmed load on the engine, increasing fuel results in 0 miles per gallon.
up) consumption.
●
Driving with a heavy load or the air ●
Keep your vehicle clean － In
conditioner running particular, a build-up of snow or mud
on your vehicle's underside adds
●
Improperly inflated tires weight and rolling resistance.
Improving Fuel Economy Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
Vehicle Maintenance
A properly maintained vehicle Drive Efficiently
maximizes fuel economy. Poor ●
Drive moderately － Rapid
maintenance can significantly reduce acceleration, abrupt cornering, and
fuel economy. Always maintain your hard braking increase fuel
vehicle according to the maintenance consumption.
messages displayed on the information
display (see Owner's Maintenance
Checks on page 389). For example:
328 2009 MDX

Fuel Economy
●
Minimize the use of the air Checking Your Fuel Economy
conditioning system － The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible. Gallons of Miles per
Miles driven
●
Plan and combine trips － fuel Gallon
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
Bef ore Driving

fuel efficient than a cold one. 100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy. 1)Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 2)Reset trip counter to zero.
fuel gauge readings are NOT 3)Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
accurate measures of fuel economy. 4)Follow one of the simple calculations above.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
2009 MDX 329

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Acura accessories, can ● Make sure the accessory does not
make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
you make any modifications or add
vehicle's handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
any accessories, be sure to read the performance.
following information. performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt ●
Be sure electronic accessories do
Accessories or killed. not overload electrical circuits (see
Your dealer has Acura accessories
page 440) or interfere with proper
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this operation of your vehicle.
vehicle. These accessories have been owner's manual regarding
designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. ● Do not install accessories on the
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
Although non-Acura accessories may When properly installed, cellular these areas may interfere with
fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and proper operation of the side
meet factory specifications, and could low-powered audio systems should curtain airbags.
adversely affect your vehicle's not interfere with your vehicle's
handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such
● Before installing any electronic
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and accessory, have the installer
tire pressure monitoring system. contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
330 2009 MDX

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle ●

Larger or smaller wheels and tires
Removing parts from your vehicle, or can interfere with the operation of
replacing components with your vehicle's anti-lock brakes and
aftermarket components could other systems.
seriously affect your vehicle's
Modifying your steering wheel or
handling, stability, and reliability.
any other part of your vehicle's safety
Some examples are: features can make the systems
ineffective.
●
Lowering your vehicle with a non-
Acura suspension kit that If you plan to modify your vehicle,
Bef ore Driving

significantly reduces ground consult your dealer.
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
●
Raising your vehicle with a non-
Acura suspension kit can affect the
handling and stability.
● Non-Acura wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 331

Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT storage areas:
● Glove box
GLOVE BOX DOOR POCKETS
●
Door and seat-back pockets
REAR COMPARTMENT
●
Rear cargo area, including the
second and third row seats when
folded flat
● Console compartment
● Storage compartment
●
Rear compartment
●
Roof-rack (if equipped)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle's handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
STORAGE COMPARTMENT SEAT-BACK POCKETS
following pages.
CARGO AREA
332 2009 MDX

Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (4) The resulting figure equals the

The maximum load for your vehicle available amount of cargo and
is 1,158 lbs (525 kg). Overloading or improper luggage load capacity. For
loading can affect handling and example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
See Tire And Loading Information stability and cause a crash in equals 1,400 lbs. and there will
label attached to the driver's which you can be hurt or killed. be five 150 lb. passengers in your
doorjamb.
vehicle, the amount of available
Label Example Follow all load limits and other cargo and luggage load capacity
loading guidelines in this is 650 lbs.
manual. (1,400 － 750 (5 ╳ 150) = 650
Bef ore Driving

lbs.)
Steps for Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight
Limit － of luggage and cargo being
(1) Locate the statement ‘‘The loaded on the vehicle. That
combined weight of occupants weight may not safely exceed the
and cargo should never exceed available cargo and luggage load
This figure includes the total weight capacity calculated in Step 4.
of all occupants, cargo, and XXX kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your
vehicle's placard. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a
accessories, and the tongue load if trailer, load from your trailer will
you are towing a trailer. (2) Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that be transferred to your vehicle.
will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
(3) Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 333

Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
Example 1 not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Max Load (1,158 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs) (858 lbs) Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on
a label on the driver's doorjamb.
Example 2
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs) (558 lbs)
Example 3
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs) (408 lbs)
334 2009 MDX

Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area ●

If you carry large items that
Compartment or on a Roof Rack prevent you from closing the
● Store or secure all items that could ●Distribute cargo evenly on the tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
be thrown around and hurt floor of the cargo area, placing the passenger area. To avoid the
someone during a crash. heaviest items on the bottom and possibility of carbon monoxide
as far forward as possible. Tie poisoning, follow the instructions
●
Be sure items placed on the floor
down items that could be thrown on page 58.
behind the front seats cannot roll
about the vehicle during a crash or
underneath and interfere with the ●
If you carry any items on a roof
sudden stop.
proper operation of the seats, the rack, be sure the total weight of
Bef ore Driving

sensors under the seats, or the ● If you fold down the second or the rack and the items does not
driver's ability to operate the third row seats, tie down items that exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
pedals. could be thrown about the vehicle
If you use an accessory roof rack,
during a crash or sudden stop.
Also, keep all cargo below the the roof rack weight limit may be
bottom of the windows. If it is lower. Refer to the information that
higher, it could interfere with the came with your roof rack.
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
● Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 335

Carrying Cargo
Optional Separation Net Cargo Hooks

GROCERY HOOKS
The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy items
should be tied down, as the net may
not prevent them from being thrown
about the vehicle in a crash or a
sudden stop.
Optional Cargo Cover
The cargo cover can be used to cover
the cargo area behind the third row CARGO
seats. When the third row seats are HOOKS
folded down, the cargo cover can be Your vehicle also has a grocery hook
extended over the larger area. Do not on each side panel in the cargo area.
The four hooks on the side panels
install the cover over the larger area They are designed to hold light
can be used to install a net for
if the third row seats are not folded items. Heavy objects may damage
securing items. Each hook is
down. the hook. Make sure any items put
designed to hold up to 50 lbs (23 kg)
on each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs
of weight.
(3 kg).
336 2009 MDX

Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ...................... 338

starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ...................... 338
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine ..................... 339
automatic transmission. It also Check Starting System
includes important information on Message ............................. 340
parking your vehicle, the braking Automatic Transmission ............. 341
system, the Super Handling-All Super Handling-All Wheel
Wheel Drive™ (SH-AWD®) system, Drive™ (SH-AWD®)
the vehicle stability assist (VSA®) System ................................ 348
system, active damper system, the Parking ....................................... 350
tire pressure monitoring system Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Driving
(TPMS), and facts you need if you (TPMS) ................................... 351
are planning to tow a trailer or drive Braking System .......................... 356
off-high way. Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ............... 357
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®),
aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System ..................... 359
Active Damper System ................ 361
Towing a Trailer.......................... 363
Trailer Stability Assist ................. 376
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines............................... 378
2009 MDX 337

Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive
Driving Guidelines ●
Do not modify your vehicle in any Preparing to Drive
Your vehicle has higher ground way that would raise the center of You should do the following checks
clearance that allows you to travel gravity. and adjustments before you drive
over bumps, obstacles, and rough your vehicle.
●
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
terrain. It also provides good 1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
roof.
visibility so you can anticipate
and outside lights are clean and
problems earlier. See page 378 for off-highway driving
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
guidelines.
Because your vehicle rides higher off or ice.
the ground, it has a high center of 2. Check that the hood is fully
gravity that can cause it to roll over if
closed.
you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher 3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
roll over rate than other types of looks low, use a gauge to check its
vehicles. pressure.
To prevent rollovers or loss of 4. Check that any items you may be
control: carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
● Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger 5. Check the seat adjustment (see
vehicle. page 140).
●
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
338 2009 MDX

Preparing to Drive, Starting the Engine
6. Check the adjustment of the inside Starting the Engine If you hold the ignition switch in
and outside mirrors (see page Your vehicle's starting system has an the START (III) position for more
154). auto control mode. When you turn than 7 seconds, the starter motor,
the ignition switch to the START (III) depending on the outside
7. Check the steering wheel
position, this feature keeps the temperature, runs for about 10 to
adjustment (see page 124).
engine's starter motor running until 25 seconds until the engine starts.
8. Make sure the doors and tailgate the engine starts. Follow these
If the engine does not start, wait at
are securely closed and locked. instructions to start the engine:
least 10 seconds before trying
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that 1. Apply the parking brake. again.
your passengers have fastened
2. In cold weather, turn off all
their seat belts (see page 15).
electrical accessories to reduce the
Driving
10. When you start the engine, check drain on the battery.
the gauges and indicators in the The immobilizer system protects your
3. Make sure the shift lever is in vehicle from theft. If an improperly-
instrument panel, and the
Park. Press on the brake pedal. coded key (or other device) is used, the
messages on the multi-information
display (see pages 63, 72 and 81). 4. Without touching the accelerator engine's fuel system is disabled. For
pedal, turn the ignition switch to more information, see page 128.
the START (III) position, then
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. Depending on
the outside temperature, the
starter motor runs for about 6 to 9
seconds until the engine starts.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 339

Starting the Engine
5. If the engine does not start within Check Starting System Message If this message is on, the ignition
15 seconds, or starts but stalls switch has to be held in the START
right away, repeat step 4 with the (III) position manually until the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway engine starts. The ignition switch can
down. If the engine starts, release be held in that position up to 15
pressure on the accelerator pedal seconds.
so the engine does not race.
Even though you may be able to start
6. If the engine fails to start, press the engine manually without the auto
the accelerator pedal all the way control mode of the starting system,
down, and hold it there while have your dealer inspect your
starting to clear flooding. If the vehicle.
engine still does not start, return to
step 5.
If there is a problem with the starting
system, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
STARTING SYSTEM’’ message on
The engine is harder to start in cold the multi-information display when
weather. Also, the thinner air found at the ignition switch is turned to the
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 ON (II) position. You will also see
meters) adds to this problem. this message when the auto control
mode of the starting system has a
problem.
340 2009 MDX

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a few Shifting
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
Driving
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a To shift from Park to any position,
panel show which position the shift possible problem with the press firmly on the brake pedal, and
lever is in. In the Sequential transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK press the release button on the front
SportShift Mode, the ‘‘M’’ indicator TRANSMISSION’’ message on the of the shift lever, then move the
next to the ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on, multi-information display (see page lever. You cannot shift out of Park
and the illuminated number under 82). when the ignition switch is in the
the charging system indicator shows LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
you the gear you have selected. position.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 341

To shift from: Do this: To avoid transmission damage, come Drive (D) － Use this position for
Press the brake pedal, and to a complete stop before shifting your normal driving. The
P to R press the shift lever release
button. into Park. The shift lever must be in transmission automatically selects a
R to P Press the shift lever release Park before you can remove the key suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
N to R button. from the ignition switch. speed and acceleration. You may
D to D3
notice the transmission shifting up at
D3 to D Reverse (R) － Press the brake
D to N higher engine speeds when the
Move the shift lever. pedal and press the release button on
N to D engine is cold. This helps the engine
R to N the front of the shift lever to shift
warm up faster.
from Park to reverse. To shift from
Park (P) － This position reverse to neutral, come to a
mechanically locks the transmission. complete stop, and then shift. Press
Use Park whenever you are turning the release button before shifting
off or starting the engine. To shift out into reverse from neutral.
of Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and press the release button on Neutral (N) － Use neutral if you
the shift lever. Make sure your foot is need to restart a stalled engine, or if
off the accelerator pedal. it is necessary to stop briefly with the
engine idling. Shift to the Park
If you have done all of the above and position if you need to leave your
still cannot move the lever out of vehicle for any reason. Press on the
Park, see Shift Lock Release on brake pedal when you are moving
page 346. the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
342 2009 MDX

Sequential SportShift Mode (ꬽ) UP SHIFT When you accelerate away from a
stop, the transmission starts in first
gear. You have to manually upshift
between first and fifth gears. Make
sure you upshift before the engine
speed reaches the tachometer's red
zone.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There
is no automatic downshift when you
(ꭥ) DOWN SHIFT push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.
Driving
SELECTED GEAR To enter the Sequential SportShift
mode, move the shift lever further to
With the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position,
the driver's side. To return to ‘‘D,’’
you can select the Sequential
move the shift lever to the
SportShift mode to shift gears much
passenger's side.
like a manual transmission, but
In Sequential SportShift mode, each
without a clutch pedal.
time you push forward on the shift
When you move the shift lever from lever, the transmission shifts to a
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the display higher gear. Pull back on the lever to
shows the selected gear. downshift. The number of the gear
selected is displayed on the
instrument panel.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 343

The transmission may automatically Downshifting gives you more power If you try to manually downshift at a
downshift from the higher gear to when climbing, and provides engine speed that would cause the engine to
the lower gear under these braking when going down a steep exceed the redline in a lower gear,
conditions: hill. the transmission does not downshift.
The gear indicator will flash the
Driving on level roads and downhill The transmission also shifts
number of the lower gear several
automatically as the vehicle comes to
To shift from Speed range times, then return to the higher gear.
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
gear when the vehicle speed is under If the vehicle speed slows to below
4→3 under 19 mph 10 mph (16 km/h). the redline of the selected lower gear
(31 km/h) position while the indicator is
flashing, the transmission
5→4 under 38 mph downshifts, and the display shows
(60 km/h) the selected lower gear.
Driving uphill
To shift from Speed range
4→3 under 34 mph

(55 km/h)
5→4 under 47 mph

(75 km/h)
344 2009 MDX

The table shows the speed ranges for Starting in Second Gear
To shift from Speed range When you are in Sequential
upshifting and downshifting.
SportShift mode, and the vehicle is
To shift from Speed range 3→2 under 60 mph stopped, push forward on the shift
(96 km/h) lever to shift to second gear. You will
1→2 over 0 mph see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out in
(0 km/h) 4→3 under 93 mph second gear will help to reduce
(150 km/h) wheelspin in deep snow or on a
2→3 over 10 mph slippery surface.
(16 km/h) 5→4 under 118 mph If you start out in second gear, the
(190 km/h) transmission will be fixed in that
3→4
Driving
over 19 mph gear.
(31 km/h)
The transmission will not
automatically downshift to first gear
4→5 over 37 mph even when the vehicle speed is
(60 km/h) under 10 mph (16 km/h). You need
to shift down to first gear manually.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 345

Drive (D3) － This position is similar Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release
to D, except only the first three gears If you exceed the maximum speed This allows you to move the shift
are selected. Use D3 when towing a for the gear you are in, the engine lever out of Park if the normal
trailer in hilly terrain, or to provide speed will enter into the method of pushing on the brake
engine braking when going down a tachometer's red zone. If this occurs, pedal and pressing the release button
steep hill. D3 can also keep the you may feel the engine cut in and does not work.
transmission from cycling between out. This is caused by a limiter in the 1. Set the parking brake.
third, fourth, and fifth gears in stop- engine's computer controls. The
and-go driving. engine will run normally when you 2. Remove the key from the ignition
reduce the rpm below the red zone. switch.
For faster acceleration when in D3 or
D, you can get the transmission to Before downshifting, make sure the
automatically downshift by pushing engine will not go into the
the accelerator pedal to the floor. tachometer's red zone.
The transmission will shift down one,
two, or three gears, depending on
your speed.
346 2009 MDX

6. Remove the key from the shift lock

RELEASE release slot, then reinstall the
BUTTON cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the driver's side. Press
the brake pedal, and restart the
engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Driving
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift 4. Insert a key into the shift lock
lock release slot cover. Use a small release slot.
flat-tipped screwdriver or metal
5. Push down on the key while you
fingernail file to carefully pry up
press the release button on the
the edge of the cover and remove
front of the shift lever and move
it from the slot.
the shift lever out of Park to
neutral.
2009 MDX 347

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive™ (SH-AWD®) System
The super handling-all wheel drive SH-AWD Torque Distribution Each torque indicator is displayed as
(SH-AWD) system is a full time all- Monitor a bar graph divided into 5 segments.
wheel-drive system that The number of segments represents
automatically controls and transfers TORQUE INDICATOR the amount of torque distributed to
varying amounts of engine torque to each wheel.
all wheels independently, according
When there is only a slight change in
to the driving conditions.
torque distribution while driving,
While the SH-AWD system helps to such as cruising on level roads at the
enhance the vehicle's driving same speed, the torque distribution
stability in all situations, it is still monitor may stop displaying the
your responsibility to drive and amount of torque. This is not a
corner at reasonable speeds and to system problem. The monitor will
leave a sufficient margin of safety. TORQUE INDICATOR show the amount if the system
senses any change in torque
The SH-AWD torque distribution distribution.
monitor on the multi-information
display shows you the amount of
torque being sent to the wheels.
Each wheel: right front (RF), left
front (LF), right rear (RR), and left
rear (LR), has its own torque
indicator.
348 2009 MDX

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive™ (SH-AWD®) System
Your vehicle still has normal front-

wheel drive with vehicle stability
assist (VSA), but does not have the
advantages of SH-AWD. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon
as possible.
Driving
If the SH-AWD indicator blinks while If the SH-AWD indicator on the
driving, it indicates the differential instrument panel stays on, and the
temperature is too high. You will also ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. message also appears on the multi-
HIGH’’ message on the multi- information display, there is problem
information display. If this happens, with the SH-AWD system.
pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out. If
the indicator does not go out, take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked.
2009 MDX 349

Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips ●

Never park over dry leaves, tall
you park your vehicle. Make sure the ●Make sure the moonroof and the grass, or other flammable
parking brake is set firmly, or your windows are closed. materials. The hot three way
vehicle may roll if it is parked on an catalytic converter could cause
●
Turn off the lights.
incline. these materials to catch on fire.
●
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
Set the parking brake before you put ●
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
in the cargo area or take them with
the transmission in Park. This keeps the front wheels away from the
you.
the vehicle from moving and putting curb.
pressure on the parking mechanism ● Lock the doors and the tailgate. ● If the vehicle is facing downhill,
in the transmission.
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
●
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
●
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
350 2009 MDX

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Low Tire Pressure/ If you think you can safely drive a
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) TPMS Indicator short distance to a service station,
that turns on every time you start the When the low tire pressure/TPMS proceed slowly to the station, then
engine and monitors the pressure in indicator is on, one or more of your inflate the tire to the recommended
your tires while driving. tires is significantly underinflated. pressure.
Each tire has its own pressure You should stop and check your tires If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire as soon as possible, and inflate them is too low to continue driving, replace
becomes significantly low, the sensor to the proper pressure as indicated the tire with the compact spare tire
in that tire immediately sends a on the vehicle's tire information (see page 425).
signal that causes the low tire placard.
Driving on a significantly under-
pressure/TPMS indicator in the It is possible that the pressures inflated tire causes the tire to
Driving
instrument panel to come on. If this shown on the multi-information overheat and can lead to tire failure.
happens, you will see which tire is display and the pressures you Under-inflation also reduces fuel
losing pressure on the multi- manually measure are slightly efficiency and tire tread life, and may
information display along with a different. affect the vehicle's handling and
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’ If the difference is significant or you stopping ability.
message. cannot make the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator and message on the Because tire pressure varies by
multi-information display go out after temperature and other conditions,
inflating the tires to the specified the low tire pressure/TPMS
values, have your dealer check the indicator may come on unexpectedly.
system as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 351

For example, if you check and fill Although your tire pressure is Tire Pressure Monitor
your tires in a warm area, then drive monitored, you must manually check
in extremely cold weather, the tire the tire pressures monthly.
pressure will be lower than
Each tire, including the spare, should
measured and could be underinflated
be checked monthly when the
and cause the low tire pressure/
vehicle is cold, and set to the
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
recommended inflation pressure as
you check and adjust your tire
specified on the vehicle placard and
pressure in cooler conditions, and
in the owner's manual (see page
drive into extremely hot conditions,
416).
the tire may become overinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
To select the tire pressure monitor,
Refer to page 415 for tire inflation press the INFO button several times
guidelines. with the ignition switch in the ON
If there is a problem with the TPMS, (II) position.
this indicator begins to flash. It stops You will see the above display on the
flashing after approximately 1 multi-information display when all
minute, then stays on. You will also tire pressures are normal.
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 82).
352 2009 MDX

Canadian model This shows that front left tire

U.S. model is losing pressure.
Driving
To see the inflation pressures of all Each tire pressure is shown in PSI Each tire has its own pressure
four tires, press the SEL/RESET (U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
button. The display changes as models). becomes significantly low, the sensor
shown above. in that tire immediately sends a
signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrument panel to come on. If this
happens, you will see which tire is
losing pressure on the multi-
information display along with a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 353

TPMS System Failure
If any of the tires has low pressure, If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the tire pressure monitor also shows the tire pressure monitor shows a
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the above message to warn you ‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’
you will see the above message on
about the low tire pressure when you message and the tire pressure
the multi-information display.
select the display by pressing the readings are not displayed. If this
INFO button several times. happens, you will first see a system If you see this message, the system
Following this display, press the warning message ‘‘CHECK TPMS is off and is not monitoring the tire
SEL/RESET button to see each tire SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information pressures. Have the system checked
pressure. display. by your dealer as soon as possible.
When you continue driving after
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
installing the spare tire, you will also
indicator begins to flash, then stays
see this message on the multi-
on (see page 352).
information display.
354 2009 MDX

If the low tire pressure/TPMS After the flat tire is replaced with the This indicator and the warning
indicator comes on, or the multi- spare tire, the low tire pressure/ message on the multi-information
information display shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS indicator stays on while display will go off, after several miles
TPMS SYSTEM’’ message, the VSA driving. After several miles (kilometers) driving, when the spare
system automatically turns on even (kilometers) driving, this indicator tire is replaced with the specified
when the VSA system is turned off begins to flash, then stays on again. regular tire equipped with the tire
by pressing the VSA OFF switch You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS pressure monitor sensor.
(see page 360). If this happens, you SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- Each wheel is equipped with a tire
cannot turn the VSA system off by information display. This is normal; pressure sensor mounted inside the
pressing the VSA OFF switch again. the system cannot monitor the spare tire behind the valve stem. You must
tire pressure. Manually check the use TPMS specific wheels. It is
When you restart the vehicle with
spare tire pressure to be sure it is recommended that you always have
Driving
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
correct. your tires serviced by your dealer or
system message will also be
a qualified technician.
displayed on the multi-information
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
display after several miles
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
(kilometers) driving.
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Changing a Tire with TPMS Have the flat tire repaired by your
If you have a flat tire, the low tire dealer as soon as possible.
pressure/TPMS and tire monitor
indicators will come on. Replace the
indicated flat tire with the compact
spare tire (see page 425).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 355

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Braking System
As required by the FCC: Braking System Constant application of the brakes

This device complies with Part 15 of the Your vehicle is equipped with disc when going down a long hill builds
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the brakes at all four wheels. A power up heat and reduces their
following two conditions: (1) This device assist helps reduce the effort needed effectiveness. Use the engine to
may not cause harmful interference, and on the brake pedal. The emergency assist the brakes by taking your foot
(2) this device must accept any off the accelerator and downshifting
interference received, including brake assist system increases the
interference that may cause undesired stopping force when you depress the to a lower gear.
operation. brake pedal hard in an emergency
Check the brakes after driving
Changes or modifications not expressly situation. The anti-lock brake system
through deep water. Apply the
approved by the party responsible for (ABS) helps you retain steering
brakes moderately to see if they feel
compliance could void the user's control when braking very hard.
authority to operate the equipment. normal. If not, apply them gently and
This device complies with Industry Resting your foot on the pedal keeps frequently until they do. Be extra
Canada Standard RSS-210. the brakes applied lightly, builds up cautious in your driving.
Operation is subject to the following two heat, and reduces their effectiveness
conditions: (1) this device may not cause and reduces brake pad life. In
interference, and (2) this device must addition, fuel economy can be
accept any interference that may cause reduced. It also keeps your brake
undesired operation of the device. lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.
356 2009 MDX

Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Braking System Design Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake
The hydraulic system that operates The anti-lock brake system (ABS) pedal when the ABS activates, and
the brakes has two separate circuits. helps prevent the wheels from may hear some noise. This is normal:
Each circuit works diagonally across locking up, and helps you retain it is the ABS rapidly pumping the
the vehicle (the left-front brake is steering control by pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will
connected with the right-rear brake, brakes rapidly, much faster than a need to press on the brake pedal
etc.). If one circuit should develop a person can do it. very hard before the ABS activates.
problem, you will still have braking However, you may feel the ABS
The electronic brake distribution
at two wheels. activate immediately if you are trying
(EBD) system, which is part of the
to stop on snow or ice.
Brake Wear Indicators ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
All four brakes have audible brake braking distribution according to
Driving
wear indicators. vehicle loading.
If the brake pads need replacing, you You should never pump the brake pedal.
will hear a distinctive, metallic Let the ABS work for you by always
screeching sound when you apply keeping firm, steady pressure on the
the brake pedal. If you do not have brake pedal. This is sometimes
the brake pads replaced, they will referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 357

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders
system indicator come on together, ABS does not reduce the time or
If this indicator comes on, the anti- and the parking brake is fully distance it takes to stop the
lock function of the braking system released, the EBD system may also vehicle. It only helps with steering
has shut down. The brakes still work be shut down. control during braking.
like a conventional system, but Test your brakes as instructed on ABS will not prevent a skid that
without anti-lock. You should have page 438. If the brakes feel normal, results from changing direction
your dealer inspect your vehicle as drive slowly and have your vehicle abruptly, such as trying to take a
soon as possible. repaired by your dealer as soon as corner too fast or making a sudden
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS possible. Avoid sudden hard braking lane change. Always drive at a safe
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- which could cause the rear wheels to speed for the road and weather
information display (see page 81). lock up and possibly lead to a loss of conditions.
control.
If the indicator comes on while ABS cannot prevent a loss of
driving, test the brakes as instructed The VSA indicator will come on stability. Always steer moderately
on page 438. along with the ABS indicator. when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
358 2009 MDX

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator If the indicator does not come on
system helps to stabilize the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned to
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the the ON (II) position, there may be a
more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink. problem with the VSA system. Have
assists you in maintaining traction your dealer inspect your vehicle as
while accelerating on loose or Vehicle Stability Assist soon as possible.
slippery road surfaces. It does this by (VSA) System Indicator
regulating the engine's output and by
selectively applying the brakes. If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
When VSA activates, you may notice when it is safe, and turn off the
that the engine does not respond to engine. Reset the system by
Driving
the accelerator in the same way it restarting the engine. If the VSA
does at other times. There may also system indicator stays on or comes
be some noise from the VSA back on while driving, have the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see system inspected by your dealer.
the VSA activation indicator blink.
NOTE:The main function of the VSA
The VSA system cannot enhance the system is generally known as
vehicle's driving stability in all Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
situations and does not control your The system also includes a traction
vehicle's entire braking system. It is control function.
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 359

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA VSA Off Switch VSA is turned on every time you start
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- the engine, even if you turned it off
information display if there is a the last time you drove the vehicle.
problem with the VSA system.
In certain unusual conditions when
If the low tire pressure/TPMS your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
indicator comes on, or the multi- mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
information display shows a ‘‘CHECK to free it with the VSA temporarily
TPMS SYSTEM’’ message, the VSA switched off. When the VSA system
system automatically turns on even is off, the traction control system is
when the VSA system is turned off also off. You should only attempt to
by pressing the VSA OFF switch free your vehicle with the VSA off if
(see page 360). If this happens, you you are not able to free it when the
cannot turn the VSA system off by VSA is on.
pressing the VSA OFF switch again. This switch is under the driver's side Immediately after freeing your
Without VSA, your vehicle will have vent. To turn the VSA system on and vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
normal braking and cornering ability, off, press and hold it until you hear a again. We do not recommend driving
but it will not have VSA traction and beep. your vehicle with the VSA and
stability enhancement. When VSA is off, the VSA activation traction control systems switched off.
indicator comes on as a reminder.
With the VSA off, the trailer stability
assist function is also turned off (see
page 376).
360 2009 MDX


Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System, Active Damper System
VSA and Tire Sizes U.S. Sport Packages and Canadian Elite The system provides two selectable
Driving with varying tire or wheel models modes.
sizes may cause the VSA to The active damper system is always
on, constantly adjusting your Sport mode: The system prioritizes
malfunction. When replacing tires,
vehicle's dampers to the best settings handling response, vehicle body
make sure they are of the same size
for current road conditions along control and tire-to-road adhesion to
and type as your original tires (see
with vehicle speed and handling allow for higher performance
page 419).
inputs. handling.
If you install winter tires, make sure
The system uses electrically Comfort mode: The system
they are the same size as those that
controlled dampers to enhance prioritizes road isolation to allow for a
were originally supplied with your
handling precision, vehicle more comfortable ride.
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
Driving
during winter driving as you would if composure, tire to road adhesion and Either mode can be used in any type
your vehicle was not equipped with rough road ride comfort isolation. of operating conditions.
VSA. The system reacts to inputs from
various electronic sensors to give
exactly the right amount of
suspension damping to provide
optimal ride comfort and handling.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 361

Active Damper System
To switch between comfort and sport When comfort mode is selected, the When sport mode is selected, the
mode, press and release the active green indicator in the button comes green indicator in the button goes
damper system button located on the ON, and the message ‘‘COMFORT’’ off, and the message ‘‘SPORT’’ will
center console to choose the desired will appear on the multi-information appear on the multi-information
mode. display for five seconds. display for five seconds.
362 2009 MDX

Active Damper System, Towing a Trailer
Active Damper System If you see this warning indicator and Towing a Trailer
Indicator message, have your vehicle checked Your vehicle has been designed
If there is a problem with the active at your dealer as soon as possible. primarily to carry passengers and
damper system, the active damper their cargo. You can also use it to tow
In this case, your vehicle still has the
system shuts down and the active a trailer if you carefully observe the
normal damper function, but it will
damper system indicator on the load limits, use the proper
not have the active damper function.
instrument panel comes on. equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Break-In Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle's first 600 miles (1,000 km)
Driving
(see page 322).
Be sure to read the Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines section on page
378 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
trailer stability assist to help stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by
You will also see the ‘‘CHECK ADS reducing the vehicle speed. For more
SYSTEM’’ message appear on the information, see page 376.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 363

Towing a Trailer
Load Limit
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your

vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
Tongue Load
The weight that the tongue of a fully
Total Trailer Weight
loaded trailer puts on the hitch
The maximum allowable weight of
should be 5 to 10 percent of the total
the trailer and everything in or on it
trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8
depends on the number of occupants
to 15 percent of total trailer weight
in your vehicle and the type of trailer
for all other trailers. (See page 366
being towed (see page 366).
for limits for your towing situation).
Towing a trailer that is too heavy can Too much tongue load reduces front-
seriously affect your vehicle's tire traction and steering control. Too
handling and performance. It can little tongue load can make the trailer
also damage the engine and unstable and cause it to sway.
drivetrain.
364 2009 MDX

Towing a Trailer
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Estimating Loads To Estimate the Tongue Load
(GVWR) － The maximum allowable The best way to confirm that all loads 1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, are within limits is to check them at a 2. Measure and record the distance
all accessories, all cargo and the public scale. For public scales in your from the ground to the bottom of
tongue load is 5,952 lbs (2,700 kg). area, check your local phone book, the trailer hitch.
or contact your trailer dealer or
Gross Axle Weight Ratings 3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to
rental agency for assistance.
(GAWR) － The maximum allowable the hitch.
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
all accessories, all cargo, and the or if you cannot get to a public scale, 4. Measure again from the ground to
tongue load must not exceed 2,888 we recommend that you estimate the same spot on the bottom of the
lbs (1,310 kg) on the front axle, and your total trailer weight and tongue hitch.
Driving
3,175 lbs (1,440 kg) on the rear axle. load as described. 5. Subtract the second measurement
Gross Combined Weight Rating To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight from the first measurement, then
(GCWR) － The maximum allowable Add the weight of your trailer (as refer to the following table.
weight of the fully loaded vehicle and quoted by the manufacturer) with
trailer is 10,053 lbs (4,560 kg) with everything in or on the trailer. Then
the proper hitch. The GCWR must be check the tables on page 366 to make
reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 sure you do not exceed the limit for
feet (305 meters) of elevation. your conditions.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 365

Towing a Trailer
MDX and Technology Packages models U.S. Sport Packages and Canadian Elite
models
If the Estimated
difference is: tongue load is: If the Estimated
difference is: tongue load is:
13/32’’ 150 lbs (68 kg)
11/16’’ 250 lbs (114 kg) 1/2’’ 150 lbs (68 kg)
31/32’’ 350 lbs (159 kg) 27/32’’ 250 lbs (114 kg)
1 1/4’’ 450 lbs (205 kg) 1 5/32’’ 350 lbs (159 kg)
1 1/2’’ 450 lbs (205 kg)
If the difference is more than 1 ꀨ

inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
remove cargo as needed.
366 2009 MDX

Towing a Trailer
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:

Number of Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load
Occupantsꭧ
2 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) 500 lbs (227 kg)
3 4,751 lbs (2,155 kg) 470 lbs (213 kg)
4 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 370 lbs (168 kg)
5 4,250 lbs (1,928 kg) 276 lbs (125 kg)
6 3,999 lbs (1,814 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
7 Towing is Not Recommended
ꭧ
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs
(70 kg), and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the
Driving
maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page 364).
ꭧꭧ
Recommended tongue load should be 5 － 15% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8 － 15% of the total trailer weight for
all other trailers.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 367

Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
To accurately check your loads at the
public scale, the vehicle and trailer
should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
2. Check the gross vehicle weight. 5. Check the gross combined weight.
Limit: 5,952 lbs (2,700 kg) Limit: 10,053 lbs (4,560 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
3. Check the rear gross axle weight.
combined weight should be
Limit: 3,175 lbs (1,440 kg)
decreased 2% for every 1,000 feet
4. If you cannot weigh the rear axle (305 meters) of elevation.
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
1. Check the front gross axle weight.
the weight in step 1 from the
Limit: 2,888 lbs (1,310 kg)
weight in step 2.
Limit: 3,064 lbs (1,390 kg)
368 2009 MDX

Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and

Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase Acura
equipment whenever possible.
Your dealer offers a trailer package
6. Check the weight of the hitched 7. Check the weight of the unhitched that includes a hitch, a ball mount,
trailer. Write this number down. trailer. Limit: See page 366. and a wiring harness.
8. Calculate the tongue load. Subtract Discuss any additional needs with
Driving
the weight in step 6 from the your trailer sales or rental agency,
weight in step 7. and make sure all equipment is
Limit: See page 366. properly installed, maintained, and
Recommended: see page 364. also meets state, federal, province,
Range: 5-10% for boat trailers and local regulations.
8-15% for other trailers
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 369

Towing a Trailer
Hitch Trailer Brakes A 4-pin gray connector is available as

We strongly recommend that you Acura recommends that any trailer an option at your dealer. This
have your dealer install a class 3 with a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs connector has all of the circuits
hitch. Using non-Acura equipment (450 kg) or more has its own brakes. required to install most electric
may result in serious damage to your trailer brake controllers. A jumper
There are two common types of
vehicle. harness to adapt your electric trailer
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Read the trailer manufacturer's Surge brakes are common for boat brake controller to the vehicle is
instructions, and select the trailers, since the brakes will get wet. included with the optional Acura
appropriate draw bar for the height of Genuine trailer hitch kit. To obtain a
If you choose electric brakes, be sure connector and a trailer hitch kit, see
the trailer you will be towing.
they are electronically actuated. Do your dealer.
Weight Distributing Hitch not attempt to tap into your vehicle's
A weight distributing hitch is not hydraulic system. No matter how Have a qualified mechanic install
recommended for use with your successful it may seem, any attempt your trailer brake controller
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted to attach trailer brakes to your following the trailer brake controller
weight distributing hitch may reduce vehicle's hydraulic system will lower manufacturer's instructions. Failure
handling, stability, and braking braking effectiveness and create a to properly install the trailer brake
performance. potential hazard. controller may increase the distance
it takes for you to stop your vehicle
See your trailer manufacturer for when towing a trailer.
more information on installing
electric brakes.
370 2009 MDX

Towing a Trailer
Use this illustration to identify each Safety Chains Spare Tires

terminal in the trailer brake Always use safety chains when you When towing a trailer, we
controller connector. tow a trailer. Make sure the chains recommend that you carry a full-size
are secured to the trailer and hitch, spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
ELECTRIC BRAKE BRAKE and that they cross under the tongue and trailer. See page 419 for proper
(YELLOW) (20A) and can catch the trailer if it becomes tire size, page 425 for how to store a
(BLUE)
unhitched. Leave enough slack to full size wheel and tire, and page 425
allow the trailer to turn corners for information on changing a flat
easily, but do not let the chains drag tire.
on the ground.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
Sway Control before changing a flat. Ask your
Driving
This device is recommended if your trailer sales or rental agency where
GROUND STOP
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer and how to store the trailer's spare
(BLACK) (LIGHT GREEN) maker can tell you what kind of sway tire.
control you need and how to install it.
Trailer Mirrors
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don't, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 371

Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights If you use a non-Acura trailer lighting

harness and converter, you can get
ACCESSORY OPTION TRAILER BACK-UP LIGHT the mating connector and pins that
BACK-UP LIGHT (ꭥ) mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your dealer.
ILLUMINATION BRAKE
LIGHTS DIAGNOSTIC Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
RIGHT TURN ELECTRIC BRAKE also have a qualified mechanic install
SIGNAL
a suitable connector between the
TRAILER HAZARD vehicle and the trailer.
LEFT TURN LIGHT
SIGNAL ꬽB CHARGE TAILLIGHTS
Trailer lights and equipment must Refer to the above illustration for
comply with federal, state, province, wiring information.
and local regulations. Check trailer
We recommend that you have your
light requirements for the areas
dealer install an Acura wiring
where you plan to tow, and use only
harness and converter. This harness
equipment designed for your vehicle.
has been designed for your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle. You can get this
optional connector from your dealer.
372 2009 MDX

Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist ●
The lights and brakes on your Driving Safely With a Trailer
When preparing to tow, and before vehicle and the trailer are working The added weight, length, and
driving away, be sure to check the properly. height of a trailer will affect your
following: vehicle's handling and performance,
●
Your vehicle tires and spare are in
so driving with a trailer requires
●
The vehicle has been properly good condition and properly
some special driving skills and
serviced, and the suspension and inflated.
techniques.
the cooling system are in good ●
The trailer tires and spare are in
operating condition. For your safety and the safety of
good condition and inflated as
others, take time to practice driving
● The trailer has been properly recommended by the trailer
maneuvers before heading for the
serviced and is in good condition. maker.
open road, and follow the guidelines
Driving
●
All weights and loads are within in this section.
limits.
●
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
●
All items on and in the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 373

Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears When driving uphill and downhill, If the automatic transmission fluid
Drive slower than normal in all use the Sequential SportShift mode temperature increases and exceeds
driving situations, and obey posted to provide the proper engine power the specified limit, the A/T
speed limits for vehicles with trailers. and engine braking on each gear. temperature indicator comes on (see
Use the D position when towing a Select fourth, third, second, or first page 68). You will also see a ‘‘A/T
trailer on level roads. D3 is the proper gear, depending on the vehicle TEMP HIGH’’ message on the multi-
shift lever position to use when speeds and road condition. Do not information display.
towing a trailer in hilly terrain. (See use fifth gear. The recommended Making Turns and Braking
‘‘Driving on Hills’’ on the next page speed range for each gear position is Make turns more slowly and wider
for additional gear information.) shown in the table. than normal. The trailer tracks a
When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e. Gear position Speed range smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph can hit or run over something the
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the vehicle misses.
trailer may sway or affect vehicle 1 0 － 19 mph
handling. (0 － 30 km/h) Allow more time and distance for
braking. Do not brake or turn
2 19 － 31 mph suddenly as this could cause the
(30 － 50 km/h) trailer to jackknife or turn over.
3 31 － 41 mph
(50 － 65 km/h)
4 over 41 mph
(over 65 km/h)
374 2009 MDX

Towing a Trailer
Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting Retrieving a Boat

When climbing hills, closely watch Crosswinds and air turbulence If the vehicle tires slip when
your temperature gauge. If it nears caused by passing trucks can disrupt retrieving a boat from the water,
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air your steering and cause the trailer to keep the transmission in the D
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if sway. When being passed by a large position and do not use the
necessary, pull to the side of the road vehicle, keep a constant speed, and sequential sport shift mode. This
to let the engine cool. steer straight ahead. Do not try to prevents the transmission damage.
make quick steering or braking
If the transmission shifts frequently Towing Your Vehicle
corrections.
while going up a hill, shift to D3. Your vehicle is not designed to be
Backing Up towed behind a motor home. If your
If you must stop when facing uphill, Always drive slowly and have vehicle needs to be towed in an
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Driving
someone guide you when backing emergency, see page 446.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in place up. Grip the bottom of the steering
by pressing on the accelerator, as wheel, then turn the wheel to the left
this can cause the automatic to get the trailer to move to the left.
transmission to overheat. Turn the wheel to the right to move
When driving down hills, reduce the trailer to the right.
your speed and shift down to D3. Do Parking
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes. Remember, it Follow all normal precautions when
takes longer to slow down and parking, including putting the
stop when towing a trailer. transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer's
tires.
2009 MDX 375

Trailer Stability Assist
Your vehicle is equipped with trailer Under these conditions, trailer Trailer stability assist cannot prevent
stability assist function. This function stability assist begins to stabilize the a loss of control. Always reduce the
works on the same sensors as the vehicle/trailer combination by vehicle speed and steer firmly. Do
vehicle stability assist (VSA) system. reducing the vehicle speed. The not brake suddenly or make quick
This function helps to stabilize the control unit sends signals to steering motion. It could cause the
vehicle/trailer combination when the selectively apply the brakes and trailer to jackknife or turn over and
trailer severely sways or oscillates. regulate the engine output. The the system becomes ineffective.
For more information on the VSA brake lights of your vehicle will be
Trailer stability assist cannot prevent
system, see page 359. turned on automatically by the
swaying that can occur in crosswinds
system even if you do not keep the
If the function detects vehicle/trailer and in normal and emergency
pressure on the brake pedal.
instability, it checks if the swaying is driving maneuvers. It helps only to
caused by the trailer, and if the When the brakes are applied, the stabilize the vehicle/trailer
trailer swaying or oscillation is trailer's brake lights come on along combination in these conditions,
increasing. with the vehicle brake lights. after the oscillation becomes severe.
The vehicle/trailer combination is When the trailer stability assist Trailer stability assist will also be
more affected by crosswinds, activates, you will see the VSA ineffective while driving at high
buffeting, and improper tongue load. activation indicator blink. There may speed or towing a trailer with a high
These conditions can make the also be some noise from the VSA center of gravity.
trailer unstable, and cause it to sway. hydraulic system.
Always obey the recommended
speed limits for towing a trailer, see
page 374.
376 2009 MDX

Trailer Stability Assist
Trailer Stability Assist Failure In this case, your vehicle still has the If you turn off the VSA, the trailer
VSA traction and stability stability assist function also shuts off.
enhancement, but it will not have the Press and hold the VSA off switch
trailer stability assist function. until you hear a beep (see page 360).
The VSA activation indicator comes
If there is a problem with the VSA
on as a reminder. Press and hold the
system, the system and trailer
switch again to turn the system on.
stability assist shuts off. The VSA
system and VSA activation indicators The function turns on every time you
also come on (see page 359). start the engine along with the VSA,
even if you turned it off the last time
The ABS indicator and the brake
you drove the vehicle.
system indicator may also come on
Driving
along with the VSA system indicator.
The control unit monitors the VSA If you see these warning indicators,
circuitry and the braking system. If have your vehicle checked at your
there is a problem with the brake dealer as soon as possible.
lighting system, the trailer stability
assist function shuts down and the
‘‘CHECK TRAILER STABILITY
ASSIST’’ message appears on the
If you see this message, have your
vehicle checked at your dealer as
soon as possible.
2009 MDX 377

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information Important Safety Precautions

Your vehicle has been designed To avoid loss of control or rollover,
primarily for use on pavement. But Improperly operating this be sure to follow all precautions and
its higher ground clearance and vehicle on or off-pavement can recommendations.
super handling-all wheel drive cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers ●
Be sure to store cargo properly
(SH-AWD) system allow you to
could be seriously injured or and do not exceed your cargo load
occasionally travel on unpaved roads,
killed. limits (see page 333 and 364).
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and
similar locations. It is not designed ●
Follow all instructions and ●
Whenever you drive, make sure
for trailblazing, mountain climbing, guidelines in this owner's you and your passengers always
or other challenging off-road manual. wear seat belts.
activities.
●
Keep your speed low, and ●
Keep your speed low, and never go
If you decide to drive on unpaved don't drive faster than faster than the conditions allow.
roads, you will find that it requires conditions permit. ●
It's up to you to continually assess
somewhat different driving skills. the situation and drive within the
Your vehicle will also handle limits.
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
378 2009 MDX

Check Out Your Vehicle Accelerating and Braking Driving on Slopes

Before you leave the pavement, be For better traction on all surfaces, If you can't clearly see all conditions
sure to do all scheduled maintenance accelerate slowly and gradually build or obstacles on a slope, walk the
and service, and inspect your vehicle up speed. If you try to start too fast slope before you drive on it. If you
for any problems. Pay special on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you have any doubt whether or not you
attention to the condition of the tires, might not have enough traction to can safely drive on the slope, don't
and check the tire pressures. get underway, and you may dig do it. Find another route.
yourself a hole. Starting with the shift If you are driving up a hill and find
After you return to the pavement,
lever in the D position will help you that you cannot continue, do not try to
carefully inspect your vehicle to
have a smoother start on snow or ice. turn around. Your vehicle could roll
make sure there is no damage that
over. Slowly back down the hill,
could make driving it unsafe. Keep in mind that you will usually
following the same route you took up
Driving
Recheck the condition of the tires need more time and distance to
the hill.
and the tire pressures. brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’ Crossing a Stream
Remember
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking Before driving through water, stop,
The route presents limits (too steep
system pump them for you. get out if necessary, and make sure
or bumpy roads). You have limits
that:
(driving skill and comfort). And your Avoiding Obstacles
vehicle has limits (traction, stability, Debris in the road can damage your ●
The water is not deep enough to
and power). suspension or other components. cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
Because your vehicle has a high exhaust pipe. You could stall and
Driving off-highway can be
center of gravity, driving over a large not be able to restart your engine.
hazardous if you fail to recognize
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop The water can also damage
limits and take the proper
into a deep hole can cause your important vehicle components.
precautions.
vehicle to tip or roll over.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 379

●
The banks are sloped so you can If the water is deeper than the wheel You should never use a jack to try to
drive out. hubs, some additional service may be get unstuck. Your vehicle could
required. This service is not covered easily slip off the jack and hurt you or
● The water is not flowing too fast.
by your warranties. someone else.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow If You Get Stuck Towing a Trailer Off-Road
rushing water can wash the If you get stuck, carefully try to go in You may be able to safely tow a
ground from under your tires and the direction (forward or reverse) lightweight trailer (such as a
cause you to lose traction and that you think will get you unstuck. motorcycle or small tent trailer) off-
possibly roll over. Do not spin the tires at high speeds. road if you follow these guidelines:
It will not help you get out and may
● The banks and surface under the ● Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
cause damage to the transmission or
water provide good traction. The or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
SH-AWD system.
water may hide hazards such as kg).
rocks, holes, or mud. If you are still unable to free yourself, ●
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
your vehicle is equipped with front
If you decide it is safe to drive and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
and rear tow hooks designed for this
through water, choose a suitable purpose. ●
Allow extra room for starting,
speed, and proceed without shifting, stopping, and turning.
changing speeds, stopping, or Use a nylon strap to attach the MDX
shutting off the engine. to the recovery vehicle and carefully ● Slow down if you encounter bumps
take out the slack in the strap. Once or other obstacles.
After driving through water, test your the strap is tight, the recovery
brakes. If they got wet, gently vehicle should apply force.
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly Remember that the recovery vehicle
until they operate normally. needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too.
380 2009 MDX

Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ..................... 382

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder .................. 383
maintained and how to follow basic Fluid Locations ........................... 391
maintenance safety precautions. Engine Compartment Cover........ 392
Adding Engine Oil ...................... 393
This section also includes
Changing the Engine Oil and
instructions on how to read the
Filter ....................................... 394
maintenance minder messages on
Engine Coolant ........................... 396
the multi-information display, and
Windshield Washers ................... 398
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
Fluid ....................................... 399
yourself.
Brake Fluid ................................. 401
If you have the skills and tools to Power Steering Fluid .................. 402
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Timing Belt ................................. 402
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Lights.......................................... 403
to purchase the service manual. See Dust and Pollen Filter ................. 409
page 469 for information on how to Cleaning the Seat Belts ............... 409
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Floor Mats .................................. 410
Wiper Blades .............................. 411
Tires ........................................... 415
Checking the Battery .................. 421
Vehicle Storage ........................... 422
2009 MDX 381

Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this ●

Wear eye protection and protective ●
Burns from hot parts. Let the
section should be performed by a clothing when working with the engine and exhaust system cool
certified technician or other qualified battery or compressed air. down before touching any parts.
mechanic. ●
Injury from moving parts. Do
Important Safety Precautions not run the engine unless
To eliminate potential hazards, read instructed to do so.
the instructions before you begin, Improperly maintaining this
and make sure you have the tools vehicle, or failing to correct a
and skills required. problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
● Make sure your vehicle is parked Failure to properly follow
be seriously hurt or killed.
on level ground, the parking brake maintenance instructions and
is set, and the engine is off. precautions can cause you to
Always follow the inspection
be seriously hurt or killed.
●
To clean parts, use a commercially and maintenance
available degreaser or parts recommendations and
Always follow the procedures
cleaner, not gasoline. schedules in this owner's
and precautions in this owner's
manual.
● To reduce the possibility of fire or manual.
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery Potential Vehicle Hazards
Some of the most important safety
and all fuel-related parts. ●
Carbon Monoxide poison from
precautions are given here. However,
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
we cannot warn you of every
adequate ventilation whenever you
conceivable hazard that can arise in
operate the engine.
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
382 2009 MDX

Maintenance Minder
One of the most convenient and Engine Oil Life Displayed

important features of the multi- Calculated Engine
Engine Oil Life
information display on your vehicle is Oil Life (%)
(%)
the maintenance minder. REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE 100% － 91% 100%
Based on engine operating 90% － 81% 90%
conditions and accumulated engine 80% － 71% 80%
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining 70% － 61% 70%
engine oil life. 60% － 51% 60%
The system also displays the code for 50% － 41% 50%
other scheduled maintenance items 40% － 31% 40%
needing service. 30% － 21% 30%
20% － 16%
Maintenance
To see the remaining engine oil life 20%
displayed on the multi-information 15% － 11% 15%
display as a percentage, turn the 10% － 6% 10%
ignition switch to the ON (II) 5% － 1% 5%
position. Make sure the display 0% 0%
shows blank, SH-AWD and tire
pressure, and then press the SEL/
RESET button on the steering wheel
repeatedly until the engine oil life
appears (see page 73).
The remaining engine oil life is
displayed according to the table
shown below.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 383

Maintenance Minder
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS
When the remaining engine oil life is When the remaining oil life is 1 to 5 Press the SEL/RESET button on the
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information percent, the multi-information display steering wheel repeatedly to select
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ the engine oil life. The message
SOON’’ message along with the message with the same maintenance ‘‘SERVICE’’, along with ‘‘5%’’, and the
maintenance schedule code items ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ was maintenance item code are displayed
indicating the main and sub items displayed with. When you see this on the lower part of the multi-
required at the time of the oil message have the indicated information display when the
change. Refer to page 390 for a maintenance performed as soon as calculated engine oil life is 1－5
complete list of the maintenance possible. percent (see page 383).
main items and sub items.
384 2009 MDX

Maintenance Minder
These messages will come on every

time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the oil life minder as previously
described.
The message will be canceled if the
▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again.
If the indicated maintenance service Press the SEL/RESET button on the
is not done and the remaining engine steering wheel repeatedly to select
Maintenance
oil life reaches 0%, the multi- the engine oil life. The message
information display will show the ‘‘SERVICE’’, along with ‘‘0%’’, and the
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ and maintenance item code are displayed
the maintenance item code(s). This on the lower part of the multi-
message is displayed when the total information display when the
mileage is less than 10 miles (for calculated engine oil life is 0－1%.
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after the engine oil life
became 0%.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 385

Maintenance Minder
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE This message is displayed when you

U.S.
U.S. drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)
or 10 km (for Canadian models) after
seeing the 0% message.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset CANADA
MAINTENANCE CODE the display as previously described.
CANADA TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
The message will be canceled if the
▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again.
If the indicated required service is When you press the SEL/RESET
not done and the remaining engine button to select the engine oil life,
oil life becomes 0%, the multi- the message ‘‘SERVICE’’, along with
information display will show a the maintenance item code and the
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message, the total negative mileage after the oil life
total mileage after the remaining oil became 0%, will be displayed on the
life became 0%, and the maintenance lower part of the multi-information
item code(s). display.
386 2009 MDX

Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Items Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE next time you turn the ignition
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS switch to the ON (II) position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE
follows: 4. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the INFO
MAIN ITEM SUB ITEMS 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) (▲/▼) button, then press the SEL/
Maintenance
position. RESET button to reset the engine oil
All the maintenance items displayed life display. The maintenance item
in the multi-information display are in 2. If the engine oil life is not displayed, code(s) will disappear, and the engine
press the SEL/RESET button on the oil life will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
code. steering wheel repeatedly the multi- cancel the oil life reset mode, select
For an explanation of the information display shows blank, ‘‘CANCEL.’’
maintenance codes, see page 390. SH-AWD and tire pressure.
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button
on the steering wheel for more than 10
seconds. The remaining engine oil life
reset mode will be shown on the multi-
information display.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 387

Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance Your authorized dealer knows your We recommend using Acura parts
Precautions vehicle best and can provide and fluids whenever you have
If you have the required service done competent, efficient service. maintenance done. These are
but do not reset the display, or reset However, service at a dealer is not manufactured to the same high-
the display without doing the service, mandatory to keep your warranties in quality standards as the original
the system will not show the proper effect. Maintenance may be done by components, so you can be confident
maintenance intervals. This can lead any qualified service facility or of their performance and durability.
to serious mechanical problems person who is skilled in this type of
because you will no longer have an automotive service. Keep all receipts
accurate record of when as proof of completion, and have the
maintenance is needed. person who does the work fill out
your Maintenance Journal or
Canadian Maintenance Log. Check
your warranty booklet for more
information.
388 2009 MDX

Maintenance Minder
U.S. Vehicles: Owner's Maintenance Checks ●

Lights － Check the operation of
Maintenance, replacement, or You should check the following the headlights, parking lights,
repair of emissions control items at the specified intervals. If you taillights, high-mount brake light,
devices and systems may be done are unsure of how to perform any and license plate lights monthly.
by any automotive repair check, turn to the appropriate page See page 403.
establishment or individual using listed.
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA ●
Engine oil level － Check every
standards.
time you fill the fuel tank. See page
According to state and federal 326.
regulations, failure to perform ● Engine coolant level － Check the
maintenance on the items marked
radiator reserve tank every time
with ＃ will not void your emissions
you fill the fuel tank. See page 326.
warranties. However, Acura
Maintenance
recommends that all maintenance ●
Automatic transmission － Check
services be performed in accordance the fluid level monthly. See page
with the intervals indicated by the 399.
multi-information display. ● Brakes － Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 401.
● Tires － Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
416.
2009 MDX 389

Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

● ●
A Replace engine oil1 1 Rotate tires
● ●
B Replace engine oil1and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
●
Inspect front and rear brakes If you dirve in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
● Check parking brake adjustment miles (24,000 km).
●
●
Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
● Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you dirve primarily in urban areas that have high
●
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
Suspension components
Maintenance Minder
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles

● Driveshaft boots
(24,000 km).
●
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) ● Inspect drive belt
●
All fluid levels and condition of fluids 3 ●
Replace transmission and transfer fluid
●
Exhasut system＃ 4 ●
Replace spark plugs
●
Fuel lines and connections＃ ●
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
1:If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under －20°F, －
year. 29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles (U.
＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
●
first column on page 388. Inspect valve clearance
NOTE: ● Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi- 5 ● Replace engine coolant
●
information display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. 6 Replace rear differential fluid
●
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
●
speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are
mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires
noisy.
differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the maintenance minder. If you
regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000
km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
390 2009 MDX

Fluid Locations
BRAKE FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID (Black cap)
(Red cap)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
AUTOMATIC
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK TRANSMISSION
(Orange loop) FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
RADIATOR CAP
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 391

Engine Compartment Cover
The component parts in the engine

compartment are protected by the FRONT BULKHEAD COVER
cover. You may need to remove the
cover when you perform some HOLDING CLIP
simple maintenance work.
Cover is secured by holding clips.
To remove the front bulkhead cover,
remove the holding clips with a flat-
tip screwdriver.
392 2009 MDX

Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil The oil viscosity or weight is
Oil is a major contributor to your provided on the container's label.
engine's performance and longevity. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 round protection of your vehicle to
detergent oil displaying the API improve cold weather starting and
Certification Seal. This seal indicates fuel economy.
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute's latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Acura motor oil in your vehicle.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
Unscrew and remove the engine oil says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
fill cap on top of the valve cover. Pour
Maintenance
in the oil slowly and carefully so you
do not spill. Clean up any spills
Ambient Temperature
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine. API CERTIFICATION SEAL
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 393

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and

You may use a synthetic motor oil if Filter
it meets the same requirements Always change the oil and filter
given for a conventional motor oil: it according to the maintenance
displays the API Certification Seal messages shown on the multi-
and it is the proper weight. You must information display. The oil and filter
follow the oil and filter change collect contaminants that can
intervals shown on the multi- damage your engine if they are not
information display. removed regularly.
Engine Oil Additives Changing the oil and filter requires
Your vehicle does not require any oil special tools and access from WASHER DRAIN BOLT
additives. Additives may adversely underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
affect the engine or transmission should be raised on a service station- 2. Open the hood, and remove the
performance and durability. type hydraulic lift for this service. engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
Unless you have the knowledge and drain bolt and washer from the
proper equipment, you should have bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
this maintenance done by a skilled into an appropriate container.
mechanic.
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
394 2009 MDX

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 4. Install a new oil filter according to 7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
the instructions that come with it. Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
Make sure to clean off any dirt and
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
dust on the connecting surface of a
engine, and check your work.
new oil filter.
8. Let the engine run for several
5. Put a new washer on the drain
minutes, then check the drain bolt
bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.
and oil filter for leaks.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m, 4.0 kgf·m) 9. Turn off the engine and let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
6. Refill the engine with the
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
recommended oil.
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the add more oil.
remaining oil drain. A special
Maintenance
Engine oil change capacity
wrench (available from your (including filter):
dealer) is required. 4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
Make sure the oil filter gasket is Improper disposal of engine oil can be
not stuck to the engine block. If it harmful to the environment. If you
is, remove it before installing a change your own oil, please dispose of
new oil filter. the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
2009 MDX 395

Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti- If the reserve tank is completely
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant empty, you should also check the
is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or plain
water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not Removing the radiator cap
available, you may use another while the engine is hot can
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a cause the coolant to spray out,
temporary replacement. Make sure it seriously scalding you.
MAX is a high-quality coolant
MIN recommended for aluminum Always let the engine and
engines. Continued use of any non- radiator cool down before
If the coolant level in the reserve Honda coolant can result in removing the radiator cap.
tank is at or below the MIN line, add corrosion, causing the cooling
coolant to bring it up to the MAX system to malfunction or fail. Have
line. Inspect the cooling system for the cooling system flushed and
leaks. refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
396 2009 MDX

Engine Coolant
RADIATOR CAP COVER RADIATOR CAP 4. The coolant level should be up to

the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator 3. Remove the radiator cap by
are cool. pushing down and turning
Maintenance
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the radiator cap cover.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 397

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
Windshield Washers
MAX Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least Do not use engine antifreeze or a
monthly during normal use. vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
If the washer fluid is low, a can damage your vehicle's paint, while
‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message a vinegar/water solution can damage
appears on the multi-information the windshield washer pump. Use only
display. commercially-available windshield
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality washer fluid.
RESERVE TANK MIN windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank. prevents freezing in cold weather.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX When you refill the reservoir, clean
and MIN marks. Put the cap back the edges of the windshield wiper
on the reserve tank. blades with windshield washer fluid
Do not add any rust inhibitors or on a clean cloth. This will help to
other additives to your vehicle's condition the blade edges.
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
398 2009 MDX

Automatic Transmission Fluid
The transmission should be drained DIPSTICK

and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on a maintenance
message in the multi-information
display.
Check the fluid level with the engine
UPPER MARK
at normal operating temperature. LOWER MARK
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
DIPSTICK
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
no longer than 90 seconds) before from the transmission, and wipe it the transmission securely as
Maintenance
doing step 2. with a clean cloth. shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check the
fluid level. It should be between
the upper and lower marks.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 399

Automatic Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower The transmission should be drained

mark, add fluid into the dipstick and refilled with new fluid when this
hole to bring it to the level service is shown on a maintenance Use only Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic
between the upper and lower message in the multi-information Transmission Fluid). Do not mix with
marks. display. other transmission fluids.
Using transmission fluid other than
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully If you are not sure how to add fluid, Acura ATF-Z1 may cause deterioration
so you do not spill any. Clean up contact your dealer. in transmission operation and
any spill immediately; it could durability, and could result in damage
damage components in the engine to the transmission.
compartment. Damage resulting from the use of
Always use Acura ATF-Z1 transmission fluid other than Acura
(automatic transmission fluid.) ATF-Z1 is not covered by the Acura
new vehicle warranty.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
400 2009 MDX

Brake Fluid
Replace the brake fluid when this Always use Honda Heavy Duty
service is indicated on a maintenance Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
message in the multi-information available, you should use only DOT 3
display. or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
Check the fluid level in the brake
replacement.
fluid reservoir monthly.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT MIN MAX
3 as soon as possible.
The fluid level should be between
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not the MIN and MAX marks on the side
Maintenance
compatible with your vehicle's of the reservoir. If the level is at or
braking system and can cause below the MIN mark, your brake
extensive damage. system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
2009 MDX 401

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid Always use Acura Power Steering Timing Belt
Fluid. You may use another power The timing belt should be replaced at
UPPER LEVEL steering fluid as an emergency the intervals shown in the
replacement, but have the power maintenance minder schedule.
steering system flushed and refilled
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
with Acura PSF as soon as possible.
miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km
A low power steering fluid level can (Canada) if you regularly drive your
indicate a leak in the system. Check vehicle in any of the following
the fluid level frequently, and have conditions:
the system inspected as soon as ● In very high temperatures
possible.
(over 110°F, 43°C).
LOWER LEVEL If you are not sure how to add fluid, ●
In very low temperatures
contact your dealer.
Check the level on the side of the (under －20°F, －29°C).
reservoir when the engine is cold. ●
Frequently tow a trailer.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the Turning the steering wheel to full left or
UPPER LEVEL mark. right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
402 2009 MDX

Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a High Beam Headlight BULB

The headlights were properly aimed Bulb
when your vehicle was new. If you Your vehicle has halogen headlight
regularly carry heavy items in the bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment it by its base, and protect the glass
may be required. Adjustments from contact with your skin or hard
should be done by your dealer or objects. If you touch the glass, clean
another qualified technician. it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Low Beam Headlight Bulb
Replacement
The low beam headlight bulbs are a CONNECTOR
type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot 3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
Maintenance
circuit even with the light switch off when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
and the key removed. Because of on the glass can cause the bulb to tab and pulling the connector
this, you should not attempt to overheat and shatter. down.
examine or change a low beam 4. Remove the bulb by turning it
headlight bulb yourself. If a low 1. Open the hood. about one-quarter turn
beam headlight bulb fails, take the counterclockwise.
vehicle to your dealer to have it 2. Remove the front bulkhead cover
replaced. (see page 392).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 403

Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole, Replacing Front Turn Signal/ PARKING LIGHT BULB
and turn it one-quarter turn Parking and Side Marker Light
clockwise to lock it in place. Bulbs
6. Push the electrical connector onto FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
the new bulb. BULB
7. Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
SOCKET
5. Push the new bulb straight into

the socket until it bottoms.
SOCKET
6. Insert the socket back into the
1. Open the hood. headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
2. Remove the front bulkhead cover
(see page 392). 7. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
404 2009 MDX

Lights
SIDE MARKER LIGHT Replacing Front Fog/Daytime

BULB Running Light Bulbs
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle BOLT
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a HOLDING
clean cloth. CLIPS
SOCKET
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. 1. Remove the bolt and use the flat-
tip screwdriver to remove the
Maintenance
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the
glass can cause the bulb to overheat holding clips located under the
and shatter. front bumper.
2. Push down the inner fender.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 405

Lights
CONNECTOR Replacing Rear Bulbs BOLT

(in Rear Pillar)
COVER
INNER FENDER BOLT
3. Remove the electrical connector 2. Remove the two bolts, and remove
from the bulb by pushing on the the rear light assembly from the
tab and pulling the connector rear pillar.
1. Open the tailgate. Use a flat-tip
down.
screwdriver protected with a cloth 3. Determine which of the two bulbs
4. Remove the bulb from the fog light to pry open the two covers. is burned out: turn signal/hazard
assembly by turning it one-quarter lights or side marker light.
turn counterclockwise.
406 2009 MDX

Lights
6. Push the new bulb straight into Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb
7. Turn on the lights to make sure
8. Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
9. Install the rear light assembly in
BULB SOCKET the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts. Snap the bolt covers into
position. COVER
Maintenance
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
5. Pull the bulb straight out of its the edge of the light assembly
socket. cover. Remove the cover by
carefully prying in the notch on its
middle edge with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 407

Lights
6. Put the socket back into the light Side Turn Signal Light
BULB assembly, and turn it clockwise to Each outside mirror has side turn
lock it in place. signal lights. The lights should be
replaced by your dealer.
7. Place the cover back into the light
assembly. Push it up until it locks Rear License Plate Bulb
in place. The license plate has two lights
above it. The bulbs should be
replaced by your dealer.
SOCKET

3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
4. Push the new bulb straight into
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
408 2009 MDX

Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Dust and Pollen Filter Cleaning the Seat Belts Dirt build-up around the openings of
This filter removes the dust and the seat belt anchors can cause the
pollen that is brought in from the OPENING belts to retract slowly. Wipe the
outside through the climate control openings with a clean cloth
system. dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the multi-
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
Maintenance
the climate control system becomes If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
less than usual. brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
2009 MDX 409

Floor Mats
Front Rear
The floor mats that came with your If you use a non-Acura floor mat,
vehicle hook over the floor mat make sure it fits properly and that it
anchors. This keeps the floor mats can be used with the floor mat
from sliding forward, possibly anchors. Do not put additional floor
interfering with the pedals, or mats on top of the anchored mats.
backwards, making the front
passenger's weight sensors
ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
410 2009 MDX

Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
LOCK TAB
To replace the front wiper blades: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm:
Maintenance
1. Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver's side ● Press and hold the lock tab.
first, then the passenger's side. ● Slide the blade assembly toward
the lock tab until it releases
from the wiper arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper When replacing a wiper blade, make
arms are raised, or you will damage the sure not to drop the wiper blade or
hood and the wiper arms. wiper arm down on the windshield.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 411

Wiper Blades
BLADE BLADE 5. Slide the new wiper blade into the

holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm against the
window.
Windshield: Lower the passenger's
side first, then the driver's side.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
by grabbing the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in the
slots along the edge of the new
blade.
412 2009 MDX

Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
To replace the rear wiper blade: 2. Slide the blade out of the wiper 3. Examine the new wiper blades. If
arm. they have no plastic or metal
Maintenance
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window. reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in the
slots along the edge of the new
blade.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 413

Wiper Blades
4. Slide the new blade into the wiper

arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
414 2009 MDX

Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Use a gauge to measure the air
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated pressure in each tire at least once a
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of month. Even tires that are in good
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
comfort. 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per
The following pages give more
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, month. Remember to check the
detailed information on how to take ●
adversely affect handling and fuel spare tire at the same time.
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
● Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
Using tires that are excessively more prone to damage from road
worn or improperly inflated can hazards, and wear unevenly.
Maintenance
be seriously hurt or killed. The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
Follow all instructions in this pressure is low. See page 351 for
owner's manual regarding tire more information.
inflation and maintenance. Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 415

Tires
Check the air pressures when the While tubeless tires have some Recommended Tire Pressures
tires are cold. This means the vehicle ability to self-seal if they are The following chart shows the
has been parked for at least 3 hours, punctured, you should look closely recommended cold tire pressures for
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). for punctures if a tire starts losing most normal and high-speed driving
Add or release air, if needed, to pressure. conditions.
match the recommended cold tire Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
You should get your own tire
pressures. for Normal Driving
pressure gauge and use it whenever P255/55R18 104H Front/Rear:
If you check air pressures when the you check your tire pressures. This 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2
tires are hot [driven for several miles will make it easier for you to tell if a kgf/cm2)
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4 pressure loss is due to a tire problem The compact spare tire pressure is:
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 and not due to a variation between 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
kgf/cm2) higher than the cold gauges.
readings. This is normal. Do not let For convenience, the recommended
air out to match the recommended tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
cold air pressure. The tire will be on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
underinflated. For additional information about your
tires, see page 454.
416 2009 MDX

Tires
Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Service Life

Every time you check inflation, you The service life of your tires is
should also examine the tires for dependent on many factors,
damage, foreign objects, and wear. including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
You should look for: loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
●
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
environmental conditions (even
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
when the tires are not in use).
you find either of these conditions.
In addition to your regular
● Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of TREAD WEAR INDICATORS inspections and inflation pressure
the tire. Replace the tire if you can maintenance, it is recommended that
see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators you have annual inspections
molded into the tread. When the performed once the tires reach five
Maintenance
●
Excessive tread wear.
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 years old. It is also recommended
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the that all tires, including the spare, be
tread. This shows there is less than removed from service after 10 years
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on from the date of manufacture,
the tire. regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
A tire this worn gives very little The last four digits of the TIN (tire
traction on wet roads. You should identification number) are found on
replace the tire if you can see three the sidewall of the tire and indicate
or more tread wear indicators. the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 456).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 417

Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

In addition to proper inflation, correct Replace your tires with radial tires of
wheel alignment helps to decrease Front Front the same size, load range, speed
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn rating, and maximum cold tire
unevenly, have your dealer check the pressure rating (as shown on the
wheel alignment. tire's sidewall).
Have your dealer check the tires if Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
you feel a consistent vibration while your vehicle can reduce braking
driving. A tire should always be ability, traction, and steering
rebalanced if it is removed from the accuracy. Using tires of a different
wheel. When you have new tires size or construction can cause the
installed, make sure they are (For Non-directional (For Directional ABS and vehicle stability assist
Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
balanced. This increases riding system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and The ABS works by comparing the
have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate speed of the wheels. When replacing
balance. the tires according to the tires, use the same size originally
maintenance messages displayed on supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
the multi-information display. Move and construction can affect wheel
the tires to the positions shown in speed and may cause the system to
Improper wheel weights can damage the illustration each time they are activate.
your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use rotated. If you purchase directional
only Acura wheel weights for tires, rotate only front-to-back. When the tires are rotated, make
balancing. sure the air pressures are checked.
418 2009 MDX

Tires
It is best to replace all four tires at Winter Driving

the same time. If that is not possible Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All
or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and weather tread design suitable for
Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash most winter driving conditions.
affect your vehicle's handling. in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed. For the best performance in snowy
If you ever replace a wheel, make or icy conditions, you should install
sure that the wheel's specifications Always use the size and type of snow tires or tire chains. They may
match those of the original wheels. tires recommended in this be required by local laws under
owner's manual. certain conditions.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the tire Snow Tires
pressure monitoring system will not Wheel and Tire Specifications If you mount snow tires on your
work. vehicle, make sure they are radial
Maintenance
Wheel:
18 x 8 J tires of the same size and load range
Replacement wheels are available at
as the original tires. Mount snow
your dealer. Tires: tires on all four wheels. The traction
P255/55R18 104H provided by snow tires on dry roads
See page 454 for information about may be lower than your original tires.
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page Check with the tire dealer for
456 for tire size and labeling maximum speed recommendations.
information.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 419

Tires
Tire Chains Wheels

Mount tire chains on your tires when Clean the wheels as you would the
required by driving conditions or Using the wrong chains, or not rest of the exterior. Wash them with
local laws. Install them only on the properly installing chains, can the same solution, and rinse them
front tires. damage the brake lines and thoroughly.
Because your vehicle has limited tire be seriously injured or killed. Aluminum alloy wheels have a
clearance, Acura strongly protective clear-coat that keeps the
recommends using the chains listed Follow all instructions in this aluminum from corroding and
below. owner's manual regarding the tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
selection and use of tire chains. harsh chemicals (including some
SCC Super Z-6＃ SZ 435
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
When installing chains, follow the brush can damage the clear-coat. To
manufacturer's instructions and clean the wheels, use a mild
mount them as tightly as you can. detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If Traction devices that are the wrong size
you hear them contacting the body or improperly installed can damage
or chassis, stop and investigate. your vehicle's brake lines, suspension,
Make sure the chains are installed body, and wheels. Stop driving if they
tightly, and that they are not are hitting any part of the vehicle.
contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove the chains as
soon as you start driving on cleared
roads.
420 2009 MDX

Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW Check the terminals for corrosion (a

white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a The battery gives off explosive
solution of baking soda and water. It hydrogen gas during normal
will bubble up and turn brown. When operation.
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a cloth A spark or flame can cause the
or paper towel. Coat the terminals battery to explode with enough
with grease to help prevent further force to kill or seriously hurt
corrosion. you.
If additional battery maintenance is Wear protective clothing and a
needed, see your dealer or a face shield, or have a skilled
Check the condition of the battery qualified technician.
monthly by looking at the test technician do the battery
Maintenance
indicator window: WARNING: Battery posts, maintenance.
Green － Good condition terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. If the radio fuse is removed, the
White － Liquid level low, replace Wash your hands after handling.
battery audio system will disable itself. The
If you need to connect the battery to next time you turn on the radio you
Black － Charging necessary
a charger, disconnect both cables to will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
prevent damaging your vehicle's frequency display. Use the preset
electrical system. Always disconnect buttons to enter the digit code (see
the negative (－) cable first, and page 235).
reconnect it last.
2009 MDX 421

Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for ●

Block the rear wheels. ●
Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made from
● If the vehicle is to be stored for a
month), there are several things you a porous material such as cotton.
longer period, it should be
should do to prepare it for storage. Non-porous materials, such as
supported on jackstands so the
Proper preparation helps prevent plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
tires are off the ground.
deterioration and makes it easier to which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If ●
Leave one window open slightly (if ●
If possible, periodically run the
possible, store your vehicle indoors. the vehicle is being stored
engine until it reaches full
indoors).
●
Fill the fuel tank. operating temperature (the cooling
● Disconnect the battery. fans cycle on and off twice).
● Wash and dry the exterior
Preferably, do this once a month.
completely. ●
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
●
Clean the interior. Make sure the
rag so they do not touch the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
windshield.
completely dry.
●
To minimize sticking, apply a
●
Leave the parking brake off. Put
silicone spray lubricant to all door
the transmission in Park.
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
422 2009 MDX

Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire .................... 424
common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ................... 425
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won't Start ............. 431
gives you information about how to Jump Starting .............................. 432
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats .............. 434
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 436
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator ......... 436
you may be able to get going again. If Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 437
not, you will also find instructions on Brake System Indicator ............... 438
getting your vehicle towed. Fuses .......................................... 439
Fuse Locations ............................ 443
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ................................. 446
Emergency Towing ..................... 446
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck .......... 447

2009 MDX 423
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a ●

Do not mount snow chains on a INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare.
your regular tire repaired or ● Do not use your compact spare tire
replaced, and put it back on your
on another vehicle unless it is the
vehicle as soon as you can.
same make and model.
Check the inflation pressure of the ●
After the flat tire is replaced with
compact spare tire every time you
the spare tire, the low tire
check the other tires. It should be
pressure/TPMS indicator stays on.
inflated to:
After several miles (kilometers)
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
driving with the spare, this
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions: indicator begins to flash, then
stays on again. You will also see a Replace the tire when you can see
●
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ the tread wear indicator bars. The
●
This tire gives a harsher ride and message on the multi-information replacement should be the same size
less traction on some road display (see page 354). and design tire, mounted on the
surfaces. Use greater caution while same wheel. The spare tire is not
driving. designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
424 2009 MDX

Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,

stop in a safe place to change it. CARGO AREA JACK
Drive slowly along the shoulder until FLOOR
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off

TOOLS
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for

changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
SPARE TIRE

when it is supported only by the
jack.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, 4. Push the rear edge of the handle
and turn the ignition switch to the to raise the handle loop and pull up
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and LOCK (0) position. Have all the loop to raise the cargo area
non-slippery ground. Put the passengers get out of the vehicle floor.
transmission in Park. Apply the while you change the tire.
parking brake.
3. Open the tailgate.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 425

PLASTIC COVER
KNOB COVER
5. The tools and jack are under the 6. Turn the jack's end bracket 7. The spare tire is stored
cargo area behind a cover on the counterclockwise to loosen it, then underneath the rear cargo area.
driver's side. Remove the cover by remove the jack. Remove the plastic cover on the
turning the knobs cargo area lining to access the
counterclockwise, then pulling out shaft for the spare tire hoist.
the cover.
426 2009 MDX

WHEEL NUT WRENCH WHEEL NUT WRENCH
BRACKET
9. Keep turning the wheel nut 11. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
wrench to create slack in the with the wheel nut wrench.
cable.
The wheel nut wrench supplied with

your vehicle is specially adapted to fit 10. Remove the bracket from the
the hoist shaft. Do not use any other spare tire.
tool.
8. Put the wheel nut wrench on the

hoist shaft. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 427

EXTENSION
JACKING POINT WHEEL NUT WRENCH BRAKE HUB
12. Place the jack under the jacking 13. Use the extension and the wheel 15. Before mounting the spare tire,
point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
change. Turn the end bracket vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with
clockwise until the top of the jack ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
contacts the jacking point. Make carefully; it may be hot from
14. Remove the wheel nuts, then
sure the jacking point tab is driving.
remove the flat tire.
resting in the jack notch.
428 2009 MDX

16. Put on the spare tire. Put the 20. Place the flat tire face up under the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight, hoist.
then tighten them in a crisscross
21. Insert the hoist bracket into the
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
center hole of the flat tire.
until the wheel is firmly against the
hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
17. Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
18. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in

the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at

the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m, 13 kgf·m)
19. Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 429

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

Always raise the spare tire hoist, even if Loose items can fly around the
you are not stowing a tire. If the hoist is interior in a crash and could
left down, it will be damaged during seriously injure the occupants.
driving and need to be replaced.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
24. Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack's end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tools, and install
the cover.
22. Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench 25. Refer to Changing a Tire with
clockwise to take up the slack of TPMS (see page 355).
the hoist cable. Make sure the
bracket is seated in the center hole
of the flat tire.
23. Turn the wheel nut wrench
clockwise until the flat tire rests
against the underbody of the
vehicle and you hear the hoist
click.
430 2009 MDX

If the Engine Won't Start
Diagnosing why the engine won't Check these things: If the headlights dim noticeably or
start falls into two areas, depending go out when you try to start the
● Check the transmission interlock.
on what you hear when you turn the engine, either the battery is
The transmission must be in Park
ignition switch to the START (III) discharged or the connections are
or neutral or the starter will not
position: corroded. Check the condition of
operate.
the battery and terminal
●
You hear nothing, or almost ●
Turn the ignition switch to the ON connections (see page 421). You
nothing. The engine's starter
(II) position. Turn on the can then try jump starting the
motor does not operate at all, or
headlights, and check their vehicle from a booster battery (see
operates very slowly.
brightness. If the headlights are page 432).
● You can hear the starter motor very dim or do not come on at all,
The Starter Operates Normally
operating normally, or the starter the battery is discharged. See
In this case, the starter motor's speed
motor sounds like it is spinning Jump Starting on page 432.
sounds normal, or even faster than
faster than normal, but the engine ●
Turn the ignition switch to the normal, when you turn the ignition
does not start up and run.
START (III) position. If the switch to the START (III) position,

Nothing Happens or the Starter headlights do not dim, check the but the engine does not run.
Motor Operates Very Slowly condition of the fuses. If the fuses ●
Are you using a properly coded
When you turn the ignition switch to are OK, there is probably
key? An improperly coded key will
the START (III) position, you do not something wrong with the
cause the immobilizer system
hear the normal noise of the engine electrical circuit for the ignition
indicator in the instrument panel
trying to start. You may hear a switch or starter motor. You will
to blink rapidly (see page 70).
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or need a qualified technician to
nothing at all. determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 446.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 431

If the Engine Won't Start, Jump Starting
●
Are you using the proper starting Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
procedure? Refer to Starting the Although this seems like a simple 1. Open the hood, and check the
Engine on page 339. procedure, you should take several physical condition of the battery.
precautions. In very cold weather, check the
●
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel condition of the electrolyte. If it
gauge; the warning indicator may seems slushy or frozen, do not try
not be working. jump starting until it thaws.
●
There may be an electrical A battery can explode if you do
problem, such as no power to the not follow the correct
fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see procedure, seriously injuring
page 440). anyone nearby. If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
If you find nothing wrong, you will electrolyte inside can freeze. Attempting
need a qualified technician to find the Keep all sparks, open flames, to jump start with a frozen battery can
problem. See Emergency Towing on and smoking materials away cause it to rupture.
page 446. from the battery.
2. Turn off all the electrical
You cannot start your vehicle by accessories: heater, A/C, climate
pushing or pulling it. control, audio system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
432 2009 MDX

Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start that
vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
BOOSTER BATTERY your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
The numbers in the illustration show 4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle,
you the order to connect the jumper to the negative (－) terminal on and then from the booster battery.
cables. the booster battery. Connect the Keep the ends of the jumper cables

3. Connect one jumper cable to the other end to the grounding strap away from each other and any metal
as shown. Do not connect this on the vehicle until everything is
positive (＋) terminal on your
vehicle's battery. Connect the jumper cable to any other part of disconnected. Otherwise, you may
the engine. cause an electrical short.
other end to the positive (＋)
terminal on the booster battery.
2009 MDX 433

If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicle's 1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
temperature gauge should stay in the Put the transmission in Park, and
midrange under most conditions. If it Steam and spray from an set the parking brake. Turn off all
climbs to the red mark, you should overheated engine can accessories, and turn on the
determine the reason (hot day, seriously scald you. hazard warning indicators.
driving up a steep hill, etc.).
Do not open the hood if steam 2. If you see steam and/or spray
If the vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. coming from under the hood, turn
take immediate action. The only off the engine. Wait until you see
indication may be the temperature no more signs of steam or spray,
gauge climbing to or above the red then open the hood.
mark. Or you may see steam or spray
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
coming from under the hood.
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to
overloading, the engine should
Driving with the temperature gauge start to cool down almost
pointer at the red mark can cause immediately. If it does, wait until
serious damage to the engine. the temperature gauge comes
down to the midpoint, then
continue driving.
434 2009 MDX

If the Engine Overheats
4. If the temperature gauge stays at 9. Start the engine and set the
the red mark, turn off the engine. climate control to AUTO at ‘‘Hi.’’
Removing the radiator cap Add coolant to the radiator up to
5. Look for any obvious coolant while the engine is hot can the base of the filler neck. If you
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. cause the coolant to spray out, do not have the proper coolant
Everything is still extremely hot, seriously scalding you. mixture available, you can add
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
plain water. Remember to have the
must be repaired before you Always let the engine and cooling system drained and refilled
continue driving (see Emergency radiator cool down before with the proper mixture as soon as
Towing on page 446). removing the radiator cap. you can.
6. If you do not find an obvious leak,
10. Put the radiator cap back on
check the coolant level in the 8. Using gloves or a large heavy tightly. Run the engine, and check
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant cloth, turn the radiator cap the temperature gauge. If it goes
if the level is below the MIN mark. counterclockwise, without pushing back to the red mark, the engine
7. If there was no coolant in the down, to the first stop. After the needs repair (see Emergency

reserve tank, you may need to add pressure releases, push down on Towing on page 446).
coolant to the radiator. Let the the cap, and turn it until it comes
off. 11. If the temperature stays normal,
engine cool down until the pointer
check the coolant level in the
reaches the middle of the
radiator reserve tank. If it has gone
temperature gauge, or lower,
down, add coolant to the MAX
before checking the radiator.
mark. Put the cap back on tightly.
2009 MDX 435

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning indicators. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. when the engine is running, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very Open the hood, and check the oil battery is not being charged.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine level (see page 326). An engine You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
damage is possible, and you should very low on oil can lose pressure CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
take immediate action. during cornering and other driving the multi-information display (see
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK maneuvers. page 81).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the Immediately turn off all electrical
the multi-information display when level back to the full mark on the accessories. Try not to use other
this indicator comes on. dipstick (see page 393). electrically operated controls such as
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil the power windows. Keep the engine
pressure indicator. If it does not go running; starting the engine will
out within 10 seconds, turn off the discharge the battery rapidly.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical engine. There is a mechanical Go to a service station or garage
damage almost immediately. Turn off problem that needs to be repaired where you can get technical
the engine as soon as you can safely get before you can continue driving assistance.
the vehicle stopped. (see Emergency Towing on page
446).
436 2009 MDX

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, Readiness Code

while driving, it means one even though it may turn off as you Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
of the engine's emissions control continue driving, have your vehicle codes’’ that are part of the on-board
systems may have a problem. Even checked by the dealer as soon as diagnostics for the emissions
though you may feel no difference in possible. systems. In some states, part of the
your vehicle's performance, it can emissions testing is to make sure
reduce your fuel economy and cause these codes are set. If they are not
increased emissions. Continued set, the test cannot be completed.
operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the malfunction If the battery in your vehicle has
If you have recently refueled your indicator lamp on, you can damage been disconnected or gone dead,
vehicle, the indicator coming on your vehicle's emissions controls and these codes may be erased. It takes
could be due to a loose or missing engine. Those repairs may not be several days of driving under various
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it covered by your vehicle's warranties. conditions to set the codes again.
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off To check if they are set, turn the
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK

immediately; it can take several days ignition switch to the ON (II)
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on position, without starting the engine.
of normal driving. the multi-information display (see The malfunction indicator lamp will
page 81). come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 463).
2009 MDX 437

Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada If the fluid level is low, take your Slow down by shifting to a lower
The brake system vehicle to a dealer, and have the gear, and pull to the side of the road
indicator normally brake system inspected for leaks or when it is safe. Because of the long
comes on when you turn the ignition worn brake pads. distance needed to stop, it is
switch to the ON (II) position, and as hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
However, if the brake pedal does not
a reminder to check the parking should have it towed, and repaired as
feel normal, you should take
brake. It will stay on if you do not soon as possible (see Emergency
immediate action. A problem in one
fully release the parking brake. Towing on page 446).
part of the system's dual circuit
If the brake system indicator comes design will still give you braking at If you must drive the vehicle a short
on while driving, the brake fluid level two wheels. You will feel the brake distance in this condition, drive
is probably low. Press lightly on the pedal go down much farther before slowly and carefully.
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. If the vehicle begins to slow down, and
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
it does, check the brake fluid level you will have to press harder on the
system indicator come on with the
the next time you stop at a service pedal.
brake system indicator, have your
station (see page 401). You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE vehicle inspected by your dealer
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE SYSTEM’’ message on the multi- immediately.
FLUID’’ message on the multi- information display (see page 81).
information display (see page 81).
438 2009 MDX

Fuses
INTERIOR REAR LID UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)

LID
TAB
The vehicle's fuses are located in The rear fuse box is located at the
four fuse boxes. left side of cargo area. UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)
The interior fuse box is underneath The primary under-hood fuse box is

the dashboard on the driver's side. located next to the battery. The
secondary fuse box is on the
To remove the fuse box lid, put your
passenger's side.
finger in the notch on the lid, pull it
toward you, and take it out of its To open it, push the tabs as shown.
hinges.
TAB
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 439

Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE BLOWN

BLOWN
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
443, 444, and 445, or the diagram on
the fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 3. Check each of the large fuses in
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the the under-hood fuse boxes by
headlights and all other looking through the top at the wire
accessories are off. inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
2. Remove the cover from the fuse screwdriver.
box.
440 2009 MDX

Fuses
BLOWN If you cannot drive the vehicle

without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
FUSE PULLER might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
4. Check the smaller fuses in the 5. Look for a burned wire inside the fuse with one of the correct rating as
under-hood fuse boxes and rear fuse. If it is burned out, replace it soon as you can.
fuse box, and all the fuses in the with one of the spare fuses of the

interior and rear fuse boxes by same rating or lower.
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 441

Fuses
If the radio fuse is removed, the

audio system will disable itself. The
Replacing a fuse with one that has a next time you turn on the radio you
higher rating greatly increases the will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
chances of damaging the electrical frequency display. Use the preset
system. If you do not have a buttons to enter the digit code (see
replacement fuse with the proper rating page 235).
for the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the same

rating blows in a short time, there
is probably a serious electrical
problem with your vehicle. Leave
the blown fuse in that circuit, and
have your vehicle checked by a
qualified technician.
442 2009 MDX

Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 120 A Main fuse 3－5 50 A Power Window
－ Not Used 3－6 60 A SH-AWD, Power Tailgate
2－1 － Not Used Open/Closer, Rear ACC
Socket, Cargo Area Light,
2－2 － Not Used Rear Defroster
2－3 30 A Rear Blower Motor 3－7 30 A ECU (PCM)
2－4 40 A ABS VSA 3－8 － Not Used
2－5 40 A Trailer Main 4 40 A Audio, Door Lock, Interior
2－6 40 A Power Seats, Driver's Position Lights
Memory System, Subwoofer 5 － Not Used
2－7 40 A Front Heated Seat, TPMS, 6 － Not Used
Moonroof, Driver's Lumbar
Support 7 30 A Active Damper Control Unit
2－8 － Not Used 8 30 A Audio Amplifier
3－1 60 A Fog Lights, Front Blower 9 7.5 A Rear Entertainment System
Motor 10 15 A Hazard
3－2 40 A Headlights, Daytime Running 11 15 A Horn, Stop
Lights 12 20 A ABS VSA

3－3 60 A Cooling Fan, Condenser Fan, 13 20 A Trailer (Brake)
MG Clutch, Headlight
Washerꭧ 14 20 A Rear Heated Seat
3－4 50 A Ignition Switch Main 15 20 A A/C Inverter
ꭧ: Canadian model
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 443

Fuse Locations
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected REAR FUSE BOX
5 7.5 A Small Lights (Exterior)
6 30 A Headlight Low Main
7 7.5 A Cooling Fan Timer
8 15 A IGP
9 15 A IG Coil
10 15 A DBW
11 15 A AFHT
12 40 A Front Blower Motor
13 20 A Fog lights
14 30 A Headlight Washerꭧ
15 30 A Condenser Fan
16 30 A Cooling Fan
17 7.5 A MG Clutch No. Amps. Circuits Protected
No. Amps. Circuits Protected 18 15 A Left Headlight Low 1 － Not Used
1 10 A Left Daytime Running Light 19 15 A Right Headlight Low 2 － Not Used
2 10 A Right Daytime Running 22 7.5 A Small Lights (Interior) 3 － Not Used
Light 4 － Not Used
ꭧ: Canadian model
3 10 A Left Headlight High 5 10 A Rear ACC Socket
4 10 A Right Headlight High 6 20 A Power Tailgateꭧ
7 － Not Used
8 7.5 A Cargo Area Light
9 30 A SH-AWD
10 30 A Rear Defroster
11 40 A Power Tailgate
ꭧ: If equipped
444 2009 MDX

Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
6 7.5 A Interior Light 22 10 A SRS
7 10 A Interior Light, Moonroof 23 － Not Used
8 20 A Door Lock 24 20 A Left Rear Power Window
9 15 A ACC Socket 25 20 A Right Rear Power Window
10 15 A IG Coil 26 30 A Passenger's Power Window
11 30 A Windshield Wiper 27 30 A Driver's Power Window
12 10 A Subwoofer 28 20 A Tilt Steering Wheel
13 20 A Passenger's Power Recline 29 10 A ABS VSA
14 20 A Driver's Power Slide 30 10 A A/C
Auxiliary 15 20 A Telescope Steering Wheel Headlight Auto Leveling,
16 20 A Driver's Power Recline 31 15 A Rear Wiper, Windshield/
Rear Washer
17 20 A Passenger's Power Slide
No. Amps. Circuits Protected 32 10 A ACC
18 10 A Alternator
1 7.5 A TPMS 33 － Not Used
19 20 A Fuel Pump
2 10 A Driver's Lumbar Support 20 7.5 A SH-AWD, Active Damper Auxiliary
Motor Control Unit No. Amps. Circuits Protected

3 15 A Moonroof 21 7.5 A Gauges 1 7.5 A Starter DIAG
4 20 A Front Heated Seats
2 7.5 A STS
5 10 A Audio
2009 MDX 445

Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually, Emergency Towing
Opening the Fuel Fill Door Emergency Towing

Manually If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
LID
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
RELEASE LEVER Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
To open the fuel fill door, pull the contact the towing agency, inform
release lever rearward. them a flat-bed is required.
If the fuel fill door release button
does not work, use the release lever
inside the rear fuse box lid in the
cargo area. Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the all-
wheel-drive system. Your vehicle should
be transported on a flat-bed truck or
trailer.
446 2009 MDX

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, Front COVER Rear

COVER
mud, or snow, call a towing service to
pull it out (see the previous page).
For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchors in the front and rear
bumpers.
1. Remove the cover, put cloth on the The cover is attached to the bumper
edge of the cover and carefully pry with a tether.
with a small flat-tip screwdriver or

a metal fingernail file.
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 447

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WHEEL NUT WRENCH WHEEL NUT WRENCH
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use

the towing hook for straight, flat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a flat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.
Front TOWING HOOK Rear TOWING HOOK
2. Remove the towing hook and

wheel nut wrench placed behind a
cover under the cargo area.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.
448 2009 MDX

Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give you Identification Numbers ............... 450
the dimensions and capacities of Specifications .............................. 452
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.
identification numbers. It also Vehicles) ................................. 454
includes information you should Tire Labeling .............................. 456
know about your vehicle's tires and Tire Pressure Monitoring System
emissions control systems. (TPMS) － Required Federal
Explanation ......................... 458
Emissions Controls ..................... 460
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 462
Emissions Testing....................... 463
Technical Inf ormation

2009 MDX 449
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers located in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver's side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver's doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
450 2009 MDX

Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into ENGINE NUMBER

the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
2009 MDX 451

Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 190.7 in (4,844 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 78.5 in (1,995 mm) 21.00 US gal (79.5 L)
Height 68.2 in (1,733 mm) Engine Changeꭧ1 1.93 US gal (7.3 L)
coolant Total 2.43 US gal (9.2 L)
Wheelbase 108.3 in (2,750 mm)
Track Front 67.7 in (1,720 mm) Engine oil Changeꭧ2
Rear 67.5 in (1,715 mm) Including 4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
filter
Weights
Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
Gross vehicle weight rating See the tire information label filter
attached to the driver's doorjamb. Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 L)
Gross combined weightꭧ1 10,053 lbs (4,560 kg) Automatic Change 3.0 US qt (2.8 L)
rating (GCWR) transmission Total 8.3 US qt (7.9 L)
ꭧ1: The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305 fluid
meters) of elevation. Rear Change 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
differential Total 2.9 US qt (2.7 L)
Air Conditioning
fluid
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) Transfer Change 0.4 US qt (0.4 L)
Charge quantity 21.2－22.9 oz (600－650 g) assembly Total 0.4 US qt (0.4 L)
Lubricant type ND-OIL 8 fluid
Windshield U.S. vehicles 4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
Seating Capacities
washer Canadian 6.1 US qt (5.8 L)
Total 7 reservoir vehicles
Front 2
ꭧ1: Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
Second 3 engine
Third 2 Reserve tank capacity:
0.18 US gal (0.7 L)
ꭧ2: Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
452 2009 MDX

Specifications
Lights Fuses
Headlights High 12 V － 60 W (HB3) Interior See page 445 or the fuse label attached
to the inside of the fuse box lid.
Lowꭧ 12 V － 35 W (D2S)
Rear See page 444 or the fuse label attached
Daytime running lights 12 V － 60 W (HB3) to the inside of the fuse box lid.
Front side marker lights 12 V － 3 CP Under-hood See page 443 and 444 or the fuse box
Front turn signal lights 12 V － 21 W cover.
Parking lights 12 V － 3 CP Engine
Fog light 12 V － 55 W (H11) Type Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC VTEC V6
Rear turn signal lights 12 V － 21 W gasoline engine
Bore x Stroke 3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm)
Rear side marker lights 12 V － 3 CP
Displacement 223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm3)
Backup lights 12 V －18 W
Compression ratio 11.0 : 1
License plate lights 12 V － 3 CP
Spark plugs DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
Individual map lights Front 12 V － 5 W NGK: IZFR6K11
Rear 12 V － 5 W Alignment
Cargo area lights 12 V － 8 W
Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Tailgate lights 12 V － 3.4 W Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
12 V － 2 W

Vanity mirror lights Camber Front － 0 ° 30 ’
Door lights 12 V － 3.4 W Rear － 0 ° 30 ’
ꭧ: The low beam headlights are high voltage discharged type. Caster Front 4 ° 12 ’
Replacement of a low beam headlight bulb should be performed by Tires
your dealer.
Size Front/Rear P255/55R18 104H
Battery Spare T165/80D17 104M
Capacity 12 V － 65AH/5 HR Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
12 V － 76AH/20 HR
2009 MDX 453

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U. Treadwear Traction

S. Federal Safety Requirements. All The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from highest to
tires are also graded for treadwear, comparative rating based on the wear lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
traction, and temperature rate of the tire when tested under grades represent the tire's ability to
performance according to controlled conditions on a specified stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation (DOT) government test course. For under controlled conditions on
standards. The following explains example, a tire graded 150 would specified government test surfaces of
these gradings. wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
as well on the government course as C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
a tire graded 100. The relative performance.
Quality grades can be found where
performance of tires depends upon Warning: The traction grade
applicable on the tire sidewall
the actual conditions of their use, assigned to this tire is based on
between tread shoulder and
however, and may depart straight-ahead braking traction tests,
maximum section width. For
significantly from the norm due to and does not include acceleration,
example:
variations in driving habits, service cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Treadwear 200
practices and differences in road traction characteristics.
Traction AA
characteristics and climate.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
454 2009 MDX

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire's resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
2009 MDX 455

Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle Tire Size

Whenever tires are replaced, they 104 － Load index (a numerical code
have a number of markings. Those associated with the
you should be aware of are described should be replaced with tires of the
same size. The following is an maximum load the tire can
below.
example of tire size with an carry).
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE explanation of what each component
(1) means. H － Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
P255/55R18 104H the maximum speed rating).
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
P － Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle). The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters that
look like the following example. TIN
255 － Tire width in millimeters. is located on the sidewall of the tire.
55 － Aspect ratio (the tire's DOT B97R FW6X 2202
section height as a
percentage of its width). DOT － This indicates that the tire
(1) meets all requirements of
R － Tire construction code (R the U.S. Department of
(4) (3) (2) indicates radial). Transportation.
(1) Tire Size 18 － Rim diameter in inches. B97R － Manufacturer's

(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN) identification mark.
(3) MaximumTire Pressure
(4) MaximumTire Load
456 2009 MDX

Tire Labeling
FW6X － Tire type code.
2202 － Date of manufacture.

Year
Week
Maximum Tire Pressure
Max Press －The maximum air
pressure the tire can
hold.
Maximum Tire Load
Max Load － The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.

2009 MDX 457
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) － Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if As an added safety feature, your Driving on a significantly under-
provided), should be checked vehicle has been equipped with a tire inflated tire causes the tire to
monthly when cold and inflated to pressure monitoring system (TPMS) overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the inflation pressure recommended that illuminates a low tire pressure Under-inflation also reduces fuel
by the vehicle manufacturer on the telltale efficiency and tire tread life, and may
vehicle placard or tire inflation affect the vehicle's handling and
pressure label. stopping ability.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different when one or more of your tires is Please note that the TPMS is not a
size than the size indicated on the significantly under-inflated. substitute for proper tire
vehicle placard or tire inflation maintenance, and it is the driver's
pressure label, you should determine Accordingly, when the low tire responsibility to maintain correct tire
the proper tire inflation pressure for pressure telltale illuminates, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
those tires.) should stop and check your tires as not reached the level to trigger
soon as possible, and inflate them to illumination of the TPMS low tire
the proper pressure. pressure telltale.
458 2009 MDX

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) － Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to telltale after replacing one or more
indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to
operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or
malfunction indicator is combined alternate tires and wheels allow the
with the low tire pressure telltale. TPMS to continue to function
When the system detects a properly.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
2009 MDX 459

Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act Crankcase Emissions Control
vehicle's engine produces several The United States Clean Air Actꭧ System
byproducts. Some of these are sets standards for automobile Your vehicle has a positive crankcase
carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of emissions. It also requires that ventilation system. This keeps
nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons automobile manufacturers explain to gasses that build up in the engine's
(HC). Gasoline evaporating from the owners how their emissions controls crankcase from going into the
tank also produces hydrocarbons. work and what to do to maintain atmosphere. The positive crankcase
Controlling the production of NOx, them. This section summarizes how ventilation valve routes them from
CO, and HC is important to the the emissions controls work. the crankcase back to the intake
environment. Under certain Scheduled maintenance is on page manifold. They are then drawn into
conditions of sunlight and climate, 390. the engine and burned.
NOx and HC react to form ꭧ
In Canada, Acura vehicles comply Evaporative Emissions Control
photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon
with the Canadian emission System
monoxide does not contribute to As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
requirements, as specified in an
smog creation, but it is a poisonous tank, an evaporative emissions
agreement with Environment
gas. control canister filled with charcoal
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
460 2009 MDX

Emissions Controls
Onboard Refueling Vapor PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter

Recovery The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is
The onboard refueling vapor multiport fuel injection.It has three in the exhaust system. Through
recovery (ORVR) system captures subsystems: air intake, engine chemical reactions, it converts HC,
the fuel vapors during refueling. The control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine's exhaust
vapors are adsorbed in a canister powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
filled with activated carbon. While uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn how much air is going into the
Replacement Parts
into the engine and burned off. engine. It then controls how much
The emissions control systems are
fuel to inject under all operating
Exhaust Emissions Controls designed and certified to work
conditions.
The exhaust emissions controls together in reducing emissions to
include four systems: PGM-FI, Ignition Timing Control System levels that comply with the Clean Air
ignition timing control, exhaust gas This system constantly adjusts the Act. To make sure the emissions
recirculation, and three way catalytic ignition timing, reducing the amount remain low, you should use only new
converter. These four systems work of HC, CO, and NOx produced. Acura replacement parts or their
together to control the engine's Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) equivalent for repairs. Using lower
combustion and minimize the System quality parts may increase the

amount of HC, CO, and NOx that The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) emissions from your vehicle.
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust system takes some of the exhaust The emissions control systems are
emissions control systems are gas and routes it back into the intake covered by warranties separate from
separate from the crankcase and manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the the rest of your vehicle. Read your
evaporative emissions control air/fuel mixture reduces the amount warranty manual for more
systems. of NOx produced when the fuel is information.
burned.
2009 MDX 461

Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Acura part or
its equivalent.
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER CONVERTERS
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic ●
Keep the engine well maintained.
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution, ● Have your vehicle diagnosed and
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine's
repaired if it is misfiring,
near it. Park your vehicle away from performance. Follow these
backfiring, stalling, or otherwise
high grass, dry leaves, or other guidelines to protect your vehicle's
not running properly.
flammables. three way catalytic converter.
●
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
462 2009 MDX

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that 4. Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for an the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can
hold it there until the temperature
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following.
scale (about 3 minutes).
systems. These codes are erased 1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
when the battery is disconnected, 6. Without touching the accelerator
but not completely, full (around
and set again only after several days pedal, let the engine idle for 20
3/4).
of driving under a variety of seconds.
conditions. 2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and

95°F (4° and 35°C).
CONTINUED
2009 MDX 463

Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled 8. Then drive in city/suburban traffic 9. Make sure the vehicle has been
major highway where you can for at least 10 minutes. When parked with the engine off for 30
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph traffic conditions allow, let the minutes.
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 vehicle coast for several seconds
If the testing facility determines the
minutes. Drive on the highway in without using the accelerator pedal
readiness codes are still not set, see
D. Do not use the cruise control. or the brake pedal.
your dealer.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a continuous
90 seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
464 2009 MDX

Main Menu
Warranty and Client Relations
Client Service Information........... 466

Warranty Coverages ................... 467
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Vehicles) ................................. 468
Authorized Manuals .................... 469

2009 MDX 465
Client Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Acura Client Services us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue ● Vehicle Identification Number (see
If you encounter a problem that your Toronto, ON page 450)
dealership does not solve to your M1B 2K8
satisfaction, please discuss it with the ●
Name and address of the dealer
dealership's management. The Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9 who services your vehicle
service manager or general manager Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 ●
Date of purchase
can help. Almost all problems are Toronto (416) 287-4776
solved in this way. ● Mileage on your vehicle
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
If you are dissatisfied with the Islands: ● Your name, address, and
decision made by the dealership's Vortex Motor Corp. telephone number
management, contact Acura Client Bella International
P.O. Box 190816 ●
A detailed description of the
Services. San Juan, PR 00919-0816 problem
U.S. Owners: ●
Name of the dealer who sold the
Tel: (787) 620-7546
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Services vehicle to you
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
466 2009 MDX

Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty － a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty － provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. Please coverage for a replacement battery
read your warranty booklet for purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty －
details.
covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime

the battery, emissions control Rust Perforation Limited Warranty － Limited Warranty － provides
systems, and accessories, against all exterior body panels are covered coverage for as long as the purchaser
defects in materials and for rust-through from the inside for of the muffler owns the vehicle.
workmanship. the specified time period with no
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
mileage limit.
Emissions Control Systems Defects all these warranties. Please read the
Warranty and Emissions Accessory Limited Warranty － Acura 2009 Acura warranty information
Performance Warranty － these two accessories are covered under this booklet that came with your vehicle
warranties cover your vehicle's warranty. Time and mileage limits for precise information on warranty
emissions control systems. Time, depend on the type of accessory and coverages. Your vehicle's original
mileage, and coverage are other factors. Please read your tires are covered by their
conditional. Please read your warranty manual for details. manufacturer. Tire warranty
warranty booklet for exact information is in a separate booklet.
information. Replacement Parts Limited Warranty
－ covers all Acura replacement parts Canadian Owners
Original Equipment Battery Limited against defects in materials and Please refer to the 2009 warranty
Warranty － this warranty gives up to workmanship. manual that came with your vehicle.
100% credit toward a replacement
battery.
2009 MDX 467

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or complaints, it may open an Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you investigation, and if it finds that a 1-888-327-4236
should immediately inform the safety defect exists in a group of (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
National Highway Traffic Safety vehicles, it may order a recall and http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administration (NHTSA), in addition remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
to notifying American Honda Motor cannot become involved in individual Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
Co., Inc. problems between you, your dealer, 20590. You can also obtain other
or American Honda Motor Co., Inc. information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
468 2009 MDX

Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S.only) Service Manual:

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
●
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
●
Go online at www. helminc. com

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
at 1-800-782-4356. troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in
Publication Form Description your vehicle.
Form Number
61STX02 2007-2009 Acura MDX Service Manual
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
61STX02EL 2009 Acura MDX
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
of damaged body parts.
61STX30 2008 Acura MDX Body Repair Manual
31STX620 2009 Acura MDX Owner's Manual
31STX820 2009 Acura MDX
Navigation System Owner's Manual
31STXM20 2009 Acura MDX Maintenance Journal
31STXQ20 2009 Acura MDX Quick Start Guide
ACU-R Order Form for Previous Years
Indicate Year and Model Desired
2009 MDX 469

470 2009 MDX

Main Menu
Index
A Anti-theft Steering Column Jump Starting .......................... 432

Lock ....................................... 129 Maintenance ........................... 421
Accessories and Audio System .............. 180, 181, 200 Specifications .......................... 453
Modifications .......................... 330 Auto Control Mode, Starting Before Driving ........................... 321
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Engine .................................... 339 Belts, Seat ................................ 8, 20
Position) ................................. 129 Automatic Climate Control ......... 170 Beverage Holders ...................... 163
Accessory Power Sockets .......... 166 Automatic Lighting .................... 118 Booster Seats ............................... 55
AC Power Outlet ........................ 167 Automatic Seat Belt Brakes
Active Damper System ............... 361 Tensioners ............................... 22 Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ........... 357
AcuraLink® (U.S. models Automatic Speed Control ........... 270 Break-in, New Linings ............. 322
only) ....................................... 307 Automatic Transmission ............ 341 Bulb Replacement ................... 406
Additives, Engine Oil ................. 394 Capacity, Fluid ........................ 452 Fluid ....................................... 401
Advanced Airbags ........................ 29 Checking Fluid Level .............. 399 Parking ................................... 153
Airbag (SRS) ............................ 9, 24 Shifting ................................... 341 System Indicator ............... 65, 438
Air Conditioning System ............ 170 Shift Lever Position Wear Indicators ....................... 357
Rear A/C Control .................... 175 Indicators ............................ 341 Braking System .......................... 356
Air Outlets (Vents) ..................... 177 Shift Lever Positions ............... 342 Break-in, New Vehicle ................ 322
Air Pressure, Tires ..................... 415 Shift Lock Release ................... 346 Brightness Control,
Alcohol in Gasoline .................... 322 Auxiliary Input Jack ................... 232 Instruments ............................ 123
Antifreeze ................................... 396
INDEX
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) B
Indicator Light .................. 66, 357
Operation ................................ 357 Battery
Anti-theft, Audio System ............. 235 Charging System
Indicator ........................ 65, 436
CONTINUED
2009 MDX I
Main Menu
Index
Bulb Replacement Chains, Tires .............................. 420 Clock .......................................... 236

Back-up Lights ........................ 407 Changing a Flat Tire .................. 425 Code, Audio System ................... 235
Brake Lights ........................... 406 Changing Oil CO in the Exhaust ................ 58, 460
Front Parking Lights ............... 404 How to .................................... 394 Cold Weather, Starting in ........... 339
Front Side Marker Lights ........ 404 When to .................................. 383 Compact Spare Tire .................... 424
Headlights .............................. 403 Charging System Console Compartment ............... 164
Rear Bulbs .............................. 406 Indicator ........................... 65, 436 Consumer Information (U.S.
Specifications .......................... 453 Checklist, Before Driving ........... 338 only) ....................................... 466
Taillights ................................. 406 Childproof Door Locks ............... 131 Controls, Instruments and ............ 61
Turn Signal Lights .......... 404, 406 Child Safety .................................. 37 Coolant
Bulbs, Halogen .......................... 403 Booster Seats ........................... 55 Adding .................................... 396
Child Seats .......................... 42, 45 Checking ................................ 326
C Important Safety Reminders ..... 41 Proper Solution ....................... 396
Infants ...................................... 42 Temperature Gauge ................. 72
Cancel Button ............................ 272 Large Children ......................... 54 Crankcase Emissions Control
Capacities Chart ......................... 452 LATCH ..................................... 47 System ................................... 460
Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............ 58 Risks with Airbags ................... 38 Cruise Control Indicator ............... 70
Cargo ......................................... 332 Small Children ......................... 43 Cruise Control Operation ........... 270
Cargo Area Light ........................ 161 Tethers .................................... 51 Cup Holders ............................... 163
Cargo Hook ................................ 336 Where Should a Child Sit? ........ 38 Customize Settings ...................... 83
Cargo, How to Carry .................. 332 Child Seats ............................. 37, 45 Door/Window Setup ............... 105
Carrying Cargo .......................... 332 LATCH Anchorage Points ........ 47 Lighting Setup ......................... 100
CAUTION, Explanation of ............. iii Tether Anchorage Points ......... 51 Meter Setup ............................. 89
CD Care ..................................... 229 Cleaning the Seat Belts .............. 409 Position Setup .......................... 97
Certification Label ...................... 450 Client Services ........................... 466 Setting to Default ..................... 86
Climate Control System ............. 170 Wiper Setup ............................ 113
II 2009 MDX
Main Menu
Index
D Locking and Unlocking ........... 130 Checking the Fuses ................ 440
Lockout Prevention ................. 131 Driving with a Flat Tire ........... 424
DANGER, Explanation of .............. iii Monitor .................................... 11 Hazard Warning Flashers ....... 122
Dashboard ............................... 3, 62 Power Door Locks .................. 130 Jump Starting .......................... 432
Daytime Running Lights ............ 120 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Low Oil Pressure Indicator ..... 436
Dead Battery .............................. 432 Vehicles) ................................ 454 Malfunction Indicator
Defects, Reporting Safety ........... 468 Driver and Passenger Safety .......... 5 Lamp ................................... 437
Defogger, Rear Window ............. 122 Driving ....................................... 337 Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Defrosting the Windows ............ 174 Economy ................................. 327 Manually ............................. 446
Differential Fluid ........................ 452 Driving Guidelines ..................... 338 Overheated Engine ................. 434
Dimensions ................................ 452 Driving Position Memory Towing .................................... 446
Dimming the Headlights ............ 118 System ................................... 157 Emergency Brake ...................... 153
Dipstick Dust and Pollen Filter ................ 409 Emergency Flashers .................. 122
Automatic Transmission ......... 399 DVD Player ................................ 239 Emergency Towing .................... 446
Engine Oil ............................... 326 DVD Player Error Emissions Controls .................... 460
Directional Signals ....................... 67 Messages ............................... 265 Emissions Testing ...................... 463
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ....... 357
Disc Care ................................... 229 E
Disc Changer ...................... 190, 218
Disc Changer Error
INDEX
Economy, Fuel ........................... 327
Messages ........................ 199, 228 Emergencies on the Road .......... 423
Disc Player .......................... 190, 218 Battery, Jump Starting ............. 432
Disposal of Used Oil ................... 395 Brake System Indicator ........... 438
Doors Changing a Flat Tire ............... 425
Childproof Door Locks ............ 131 Charging System Indicator ..... 436
CONTINUED
2009 MDX III

Main Menu
Index
Engine F Front Seat .................................. 140

Adding Engine Coolant ........... 396 Adjusting ................................. 140
Check Starting System ............ 340 Fan, Interior ............................... 173 Airbags ................................. 9, 27
Coolant Temperature Gauge .... 72 Features, Comfort and Heaters ................................... 148
If it Won’t Start ........................ 431 Convenience ........................... 169 Fuel ............................................ 322
Malfunction Indicator Filling the Fuel Tank .................. 323 Fill Door and Cap .................... 323
Lamp ............................. 65, 437 Filters Gauge ...................................... 72
Oil Life Indicator ..................... 383 Dust and Pollen ....................... 409 Low Fuel Indicator ................... 71
Oil Pressure Indicator ....... 65, 436 Oil ........................................... 394 Octane Requirement ............... 322
Oil, What Kind to Use ............. 393 Flashers, Hazard Warning ......... 122 Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Overheating ............................ 434 Flat Tire, Changing a ................. 425 Manually ............................. 446
Specifications .......................... 453 Floor Mats ................................. 410 Oxygenated ............................. 322
Speed Limiter .......................... 346 Fluids Reserve Indicator ..................... 71
Starting ................................... 339 Automatic Transmission ......... 399 Tank, Filling the ...................... 323
Ethanol in Gasoline .................... 322 Brake ...................................... 401 Tighten Fuel Cap .................... 324
Evaporative Emissions Power Steering ........................ 402 Fuel Economy ............................ 327
Controls .................................. 460 Windshield Washer ................. 398 Fuses, Checking the .................. 440
Exhaust Fumes ............................ 58 FM Stereo Radio
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Reception ................................ 205 G
System ................................... 461 Fog Lights .................................. 120
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Folding the Second Seat ............. 144 Gas Mileage, Improving ............. 327
Belts by .................................... 18 Folding the Third Seat ............... 145 Gasohol ...................................... 322
Four-way Flashers ...................... 122 Gasoline ..................................... 322
Front Airbags ........................... 9, 27 Gauge ...................................... 72
Low Fuel Indicator ................... 71
IV 2009 MDX
Main Menu
Index
Octane Requirement ............... 322 Headlights ................................. 118 I

Tank, Refueling ....................... 323 Aiming .................................... 403
Gas Station Procedures .............. 323 Automatic Lighting ................. 118 Identification Number,
Gauges Daytime Running Lights ......... 120 Vehicle ................................... 450
Engine Coolant High Beam Indicator ................ 70 Ignition
Temperature ......................... 72 High Beams, Turning on ......... 118 Keys ........................................ 126
Fuel .......................................... 72 Lights On Indicator .................. 70 Switch ..................................... 129
Speedometer ............................ 72 Low Beams, Turning on .......... 118 Timing Control System ........... 461
Tachometer .............................. 72 Reminder Chime ..................... 118 Immobilizer System ................... 128
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Replacing Halogen Bulbs ........ 403 Important Safety Precautions ......... 6
Rating) ................................... 364 Turning on .............................. 118
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Washers .................................. 117
Rating) ................................... 364 Headphones ............................... 266
Gearshift Lever Positions Head Restraints .......................... 141
Automatic Transmission ......... 342 Heated Mirror ............................ 156
Glove Box .................................. 164 Heaters, Seats ............................ 148
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Heating and Cooling .................. 170
Rating) ................................... 364 High-Low Beam Switch .............. 118
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver ............................ 276
INDEX
H
Hood, Opening and Closing
Halogen Headlight Bulbs ........... 403 the .......................................... 325
HandsFreeLink® ........................ 278 Horn .......................................... 115
HFL Buttons ........................... 280
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 122
CONTINUED
2009 MDX V
Main Menu
Index
Indicators, Instrument Panel ........ 63 Tire Pressure Monitor .............. 68 Jump Starting ............................. 432
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) .............. 66 Turn Signal and Hazard
Active Damper System ...... 71, 361 Warning ............................... 67 K
A/T Temp ................................ 68 VSA Activation ......................... 67
Brake (Parking and Brake VSA System ............................. 67 Keyless Memory Settings .......... 139
System) ......................... 65, 438 Individual Map Lights ................ 160 Keys ........................................... 126
Charging System .............. 65, 436 Infant Restraint ............................ 42
Cruise Control .......................... 70 Infant Seats .................................. 42
Cruise Main ............................. 70 Tether Anchorage Point ........... 51 L
Fog Lights ................................ 70 Inflation, Proper Tire .................. 415
High Beam ............................... 70 Inside Mirror ............................. 154 Label, Certification ..................... 450
Key (Immobilizer System) ....... 70 Inspection, Tire .......................... 417 Lane Change, Signaling ............. 118
Lights On ................................. 70 Installing a Child Seat .................. 46 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 15, 21
Low Fuel .................................. 71 Instrument Panel .......................... 63 LATCH Anchorage System .......... 47
Low Oil Pressure .............. 65, 436 Instrument Panel Light Control Switch .................. 159
Low Tire Pressure .................... 68 Brightness .............................. 123 Lights
Maintenance Minder ............... 383 Instruments and Controls ............. 61 Bulb Replacement ................... 403
Malfunction Indicator Interface Dial ............................. 200 Indicator ................................... 63
Lamp ................................... 437 Interior Lights ............................ 159 Interior .................................... 159
Passenger Airbag Off ............... 34 Introduction ................................... i Parking ................................... 118
Seat Belt Reminder ............. 20, 64 Load Limit ........................... 333, 364
Security System ....................... 71 J LOCK (Ignition Key
SH-AWD® ................................. 69 Position) ................................. 129
Side Airbag Off ......................... 66 Locks
Jacking up the Vehicle ............... 425 Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 129
SRS ..................................... 33, 66 Jack, Tire ................................... 425
System Message ................. 69, 80 Childproof Door ...................... 131
VI 2009 MDX
Main Menu
Index
Fuel Fill Door .......................... 323 Message Display .......................... 80 Oil

Glove Box ............................... 164 Message Indicator ....................... 69 Change, How to ...................... 394
Lockout Prevention ................. 131 Meters, Gauges ............................ 72 Change, When to .................... 383
Power Door ............................. 130 Methanol in Gasoline ................. 322 Checking Engine .................... 326
Tailgate ........................... 131, 132 Mirrors, Adjusting ...................... 155 Life, Engine ............................. 383
Low Coolant Level ...................... 326 Modifications ............................. 331 Pressure Indicator ............. 65, 436
Lower Anchors ............................. 47 Modifying Your Vehicle ............. 331 Selecting Proper Viscosity
Low Fuel Indicator ....................... 71 Moonroof ................................... 152 Chart ................................... 393
Low Oil Pressure Multi-Information Display ............ 73 ON (Ignition Key Position) ........ 129
Indicator ........................... 65, 436 Outside Mirrors ......................... 154
Lubricant Specifications N Outside Temperature ................... 76
Chart ...................................... 452 Overheating, Engine .................. 434
Luggage, Storing (cargo) ........... 332 Neutral Gear Position ................. 342 Owner's Maintenance
New Vehicle Break-in ................. 322 Checks ................................... 389
M NOTICE, Explanation of ................ i Oxygenated Fuels ...................... 322
Numbers, Identification ............. 450
Maintenance .............................. 381 P
Main Items and Sub Items ...... 387 O
Minder .................................... 383 Panel Brightness Control ........... 123
INDEX
Owner's Maintenance Odometer ..................................... 75 Park Gear Position ..................... 342
Checks ................................ 389 Odometer, Trip ............................ 75 Parking ...................................... 350
Safety ...................................... 382 Off-Highway Driving Parking Brake ............................ 153
Schedule ................................. 390 Guidelines .............................. 378 Parking Brake and Brake System
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ....... 437 Off-Road Precautions .................. 378 Indicator ........................... 65, 438
Memory, Driving Position .......... 157 Parking Lights ........................... 118
CONTINUED
2009 MDX VII

Main Menu
Index
Parking Over Things that R Replacement Information

Burn ................................ 350, 462 Dust and Pollen Filter ............. 409
Passenger Airbag Off Radiator Overheating ................. 434 Engine Oil and Filter ............... 394
Indicator ................................... 34 Radio/Disc Sound Fuses ...................................... 439
PGM-FI System .......................... 461 System ............................ 181, 201 Light Bulbs ............................. 403
Playing the AM/FM Radio Theft Protection ............... 235 Schedule ................................. 383
Radio ............................... 201, 207 Readiness Codes ........................ 463 Timing Belt ............................. 402
Pollen Filter ............................... 409 Rear A/C Unit ............................ 175 Tires ....................................... 418
Power Seat Adjustments ............ 140 Rear Audio Control Panel ........... 241 Wiper Blades .......................... 411
Power Socket Locations ............. 162 Rear Entertainment System ....... 237 Replacing Seat Belts After a
Power Windows ......................... 149 Rear Lights, Bulb Crash ........................................ 23
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts ........ 18 Replacement ........................... 406 Reserve Tank, Engine
Preparing to Drive ...................... 338 Rearview Camera and Coolant ............................ 326, 396
Proper Solution .......................... 396 Monitor .................................. 319 Restraint, Child ............................ 37
Protecting Adults and Teens ........ 11 Rear View Mirror ....................... 154 Reverse Gear Position ................ 342
Additional Safety Rear Window Defogger .............. 122 Reverse Lockout ........................ 346
Precautions .......................... 19 Rear Window Wiper and Rotation, Tire ............................. 418
Advice for Pregnant Women .... 18 Washer ................................... 117
Protecting Children ...................... 37 Reclining the Seat Backs ............ 140 S
General Guidelines .................. 37 Reclining the Second Seats ........ 144
Protecting Infants ..................... 42 Refueling .................................... 323 Safety Belts .............................. 8, 20
Protecting Larger Children ...... 54 Reminder Indicators ..................... 64 Safety Defects, Reporting (U.S.
Protecting Small Children ........ 43 Remote Audio Controls .............. 233 only) ....................................... 468
Using Child Seats with Remote Control (RES) ............... 262 Safety Features .............................. 7
Tethers ................................. 51 Remote Transmitter ................... 135 Airbags ...................................... 9
Using LATCH .......................... 47
VIII 2009 MDX

Main Menu
Index
Door Locks .............................. 11 Heaters ................................... 148 How Your Side Airbags
Head Restraints ........................ 14 Position Memory .................... 157 Work .................................... 30
Seat Belts .............................. 8, 15 Third Row Access ................... 145 Off Indicator ............................. 33
Seats & Seat-Backs .............. 12, 13 Seats, Adjusting the ................... 140 Side Curtain Airbags .................... 32
Safety Labels, Location of ............. 59 Security System ......................... 269 How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Safety Messages ........................... iii Sensors Work .................................... 32
Satellite Radio, XM® ............ 185, 210 Driver's Seat Position Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Seat Belts ................................. 8, 15 Sensor .................................. 29 Replacement in ....................... 404
Additional Information ............. 20 Front Passenger's Weight Signaling Turns ............................ 67
Advice for Pregnant Women .... 18 Sensors ................................ 29 Snow Tires ................................. 419
Automatic Seat Belt Impact Sensors ................... 24, 25 Sound System ..................... 180, 200
Tensioners ........................... 22 Sequential SportShift Mode ........ 343 Spare Tire .................................. 424
Cleaning .................................. 409 Serial Number ............................ 450 Inflating ........................... 415, 424
Lap/Shoulder Belt .............. 15, 21 Service Intervals ......................... 383 Specifications .......................... 453
Maintenance ............................ 23 Service Manual (U.S. only) ........ 469 Spark Plugs ................................ 453
Reminder Indicator and Service Station Procedures ........ 323 Specifications ............................. 452
Beeper ............................. 20, 64 SH-AWD® Speed Control ............................ 270
System Components ................ 20 Indicator ................................... 69 Speed Limiter ............................. 346
Use During Pregnancy ............. 18 Shifting the Automatic Speedometer ................................ 72
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Transmission .......................... 341
INDEX
Belt ....................................... 21 Shift Lever Position
Seats .......................................... 140 Indicators ............................... 341
Adjusting the Second Seat ....... 144 Shift Lock Release ...................... 346
Folding the Second Seat .......... 144 Side Airbags ................................. 30
Folding the Third Seat ............ 145 How the Side Airbag Off
Head Restraints ....................... 141 Indicator Works ................... 33
CONTINUED
2009 MDX IX
Main Menu
Index
SRS, Additional Information ......... 24 Steering Wheel Open Monitor .......................... 11

Additional Safety Adjustment .............................. 124 Power ...................................... 132
Precautions .......................... 35 Anti-theft Column Lock ........... 129 Taillights, Changing Bulbs
Airbag Service .......................... 35 Buttons .................... 233, 270, 280 in ............................................ 406
Airbag System Components ..... 24 Position Memory .................... 157 Taking Care of the
How the Side Airbag Off Stereo Sound Unexpected ............................ 423
Indicator Works ................... 33 System .................... 180, 181, 200 Technical Descriptions
How the SRS Indicator Storage Compartment ................ 164 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.
Works .................................. 33 Storing Your Vehicle .................. 422 Vehicles) ............................. 454
How Your Front Airbags Sunglasses Holder ..................... 165 Emissions Control Systems ..... 460
Works .................................. 27 Sun Visor ................................... 166 Three Way Catalytic
How Your Side Airbags Super Handling-All Wheel Drive™ Converter ............................ 462
Work .................................... 30 (SH-AWD®) System ................ 348 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
How Your Side Curtain Airbags Supplemental Restraint (TPMS) － Required Federal
Work .................................... 32 System .............................. 9, 24 Explanation ...................... 458
SRS Indicator ......................... 33, 66 Servicing .................................. 35 Temperature Gauge ..................... 72
START (Ignition Key SRS Indicator ...................... 33, 66 Temperature, Inside Sensor ....... 179
Position) ................................. 129 System Components ................ 24 Temperature, Outside .................. 76
Starting the Engine .................... 339 Synthetic Oil .............................. 394 Tensioners, Seat Belts .................. 22
Auto Control Mode ................. 339 Tether Anchorage Points ............. 51
In Cold Weather at High T Theft Protection, Radio .............. 235
Altitude ................................ 340 Three Way Catalytic
With a Dead Battery ................ 432 Tachometer .................................. 72 Converter ............................... 462
State Emissions Testing ............. 463 Tailgate ...................................... 131 Tilt/Telescopic Steering
Steam Coming from Engine ....... 434 Opening the ............................ 131 Wheel ..................................... 124
Timing Belt ................................ 402
X 2009 MDX
Main Menu
Index
Tire Chains ................................ 420 Tools, Tire Changing ................. 425 U

Tire, How to Change a Flat ........ 425 Towing
Tire Information ......................... 456 A Trailer .................................. 363 Unexpected, Taking Care of
Tire Labeling .............................. 456 Emergency Wrecker ............... 446 the .......................................... 423
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Equipment and Uniform Tire Quality
(TPMS) ....................... 351, 458 Accessories ......................... 369 Grading .................................. 454
Low Tire Pressure Trailer Loading ....................... 364 Unleaded Gasoline ..................... 322
Indicator ........................ 68, 351 Trailer Stability Assist ............. 377 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ...... 395
Tire Pressure Monitor ....... 77, 352 Trailer Towing Tips ................. 373
Tires .......................................... 415 Weight Limit ........................... 364 V
Air Pressure ............................ 415 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
Checking Wear ....................... 417 System) .............................. 351
Compact Spare ........................ 424 Required Federal Vanity Mirror ............................. 166
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Explanation ......................... 458 Vehicle Capacity Load ................ 333
Vehicles) ............................. 454 Trailer Stability Assist ................ 376 Vehicle Dimensions ................... 452
Inflation ................................... 415 Transmission Vehicle Identification
Inspection ............................... 417 Checking Fluid Level .............. 399 Number .................................. 450
Labeling .................................. 456 Fluid Selection ........................ 399 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®),
Maintenance ........................... 418 Identification Number ............. 450 aka Electronic Stability
Pressure Monitoring Shifting the Automatic ............. 341 Control (ESC),
INDEX
System ................................ 351 Treadwear .................................. 417 System ........................ 359
Replacing ................................ 418 Trip Computer ............................. 78 VSA Activation Indicator ..... 67, 81
Rotating .................................. 418 Trip Meter ................................... 75 VSA System Indicator ......... 67, 81
Snow ....................................... 419 Turn Signals ................................. 67 Vehicle Storage .......................... 422
Specifications .......................... 453 Ventilation .................................. 177
Tire Chains ............................. 420 VIN ............................................ 450
CONTINUED
2009 MDX XI
Main Menu
Index
Viscosity, Oil .............................. 393 Windshield

Cleaning .................................. 116
W Defroster ................................. 174
Washers .......................... 116, 398
WARNING, Explanation of ............ iii Wipers, Windshield
Warning Labels, Location of ......... 59 Changing Blades ..................... 411
Warranty Coverages Operation ................................ 116
(U.S. only) ............................... 467 Rear Windshield Wiper and
Washer, Windshield Washer ................................ 117
Checking the Fluid Level ........ 398 Worn Tires ................................. 417
Level Indicator ......................... 82 Wrecker, Emergency
Operation ................................ 116 Towing ................................... 446
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ............. 124 X
Alignment and Balance ........... 418
Aluminum Alloy Wheels ......... 420 XM® Satellite Radio ............. 185, 210
Cleaning .................................. 420
Compact Spare ........................ 424
Wrench, Nut ........................... 425
Windows
Auto Down .............................. 149
Auto Reverse ........................... 149
Operating the Power ............... 149
Rear, Defogger ........................ 122
XII 2009 MDX

Main Menu
2009 MDX
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Rear Differential Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Premium unleaded gasoline, Use Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
pump octane number of 91 or Transmission Fluid) only. DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
higher. DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
Capacity:
replacement (see page 401).
Fuel Tank Capacity: SH-AWD differential case
21.00 US gal (79.5 L) 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
Recommended Engine Oil:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
API Premium grade 5W-20 Transfer Assembly Fluid:
detergent oil (see page 393). Compact Spare Tire:
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
hypoid gear oil, API service
Oil change capacity (including
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 L) Power Steering Fluid:
Acura Power Steering Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
preferred, or another brand of
Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic
power steering fluid as a
Transmission Fluid) (see page
temporary replacement. Do not
400).
use ATF (see page 402).
2009 MDX
Main Menu
Owner's Identification
OWNER _________________________________________________________ This owner's manual should be considered a

permanent part of the vehicle and should
______________________________________________________________________________ remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
ADDRESS _______________________________________________________ This Owner's Manual covers all models of the

MDX. You may find descriptions of
STREET equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________
The information and specifications included
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
in this publication were in effect at the time of
POSTAL CODE approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
V. I. N. ___________________________________________________________ reserves the right, however, to discontinue or
change specifications or design at any time
DELIVERY DATE __________________________________________________ without notice and without incurring any
obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME ___________________ DEALER NO. ___________________
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
ADDRESS _______________________________________________________ AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
STREET besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________ votre concessionnaire de
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ commander le numéro de pièce
POSTAL CODE 33STXC20
OWNER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________
DEALER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________
2009 MDX

Manualacuramdx 2009

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manualacuramdx 2009

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

08/06/06 16:58:07 09 ACURA MDX MMC North America Owner's M 50 31STX620 enu

California Proposition 65 Warning

A Few Words About Safety

2009 MDX iii

Important Handling Information

Owner's Identification Form

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

Contents Before Driving Technical Information

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your Vehicle at a Glance

HOOD RELEASE PARKING BRAKE AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSꭧ HEADPHONE CONNECTORSꭧ

Your Vehicle at a Glance

HEADLIGHT WASHER HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/ STEERING WHEEL WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL

VEHICLE STABILITY PASSENGER AIRBAG

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Saf ety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Important Safety Precautions

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Saf ety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Saf ety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Your vehicle has a door and tailgate

Driver and Passenger Saf ety

When one or more doors are not

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Locking the doors reduces the 2. Adjust the Front Seats

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3. Adjust the Seat-Backs

Driver and Passenger Saf ety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

4. Adjust the Head Restraints

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Saf ety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

6. Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of

Driver and Passenger Saf ety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you are pregnant, the best way to

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Additional Safety Precautions ●

Driver and Passenger Saf ety

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Main Menu Table Of Contents